UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction

UPCC
V300R006C10
CLI Interface Instruction
Document
Version 1.130
Release Date 2014-3-27
Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd.

UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd., Bantian, Longgang District,
Address:
Shenzhen, 518129, People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Telephone: 4008302118
Email: Support@huawei.com.
Issue 1.130 (2014-3-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd
UPCCV300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction About This Document
About This Document
Purpose
This document describes the man-machine language (MML) commands managed on the
command line interface (CLI) of the Unified Policy and Charging Controller (UPCC). The
commands are used to manage the following objects: Condition Group, Action Group, Service
Flow, Notification, Rating, Rule, Policy, Service Provider, Quota, Account, Accumulation,
Service, Service Package, Mutex Group, Application Service Mapping, Domain, Charging
Server, Subscriber Group, Terminal Type, Roam Region, PLMN, Service Zone, and Message
Template. This document provides guides to obtain the information about each command,
such as parameters, parameter types, value ranges of parameters, and command results.
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
Technical support engineers
Maintenance engineers
Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all the
changes made in earlier issues.
Date Revised Edition Description Prepared by
2014/5/19 V1.134 Delete description about UTF-8 in /

chapter 1.2.
Add parameter DECODEMODE in
command LGI to describe which decode
mode to be used.
Change Muti to Multi for ADD/MOD
NOTIFICATION command.
Update VALUE to optional for
ADD/MOD CUSTOMACTIONELEM

Copyright Huawei
2014/5/6 V1.133 In chapter 1.2 MML Format Description, /

there is a note that when buffer transfer
from port 7780, the encode mode must be
UTF-8.
2014/4/21 V1.132 Update commands ADD/MOD /

PROFILEUPDATEACTION that can set
extend attribute 11~13 type as object
attribute.
Add enum value MaxQoSPerSrv for
QoSMode of ADD/MOD SERVICE
2014/4/9 V1.131 Add parameter MTRSWITCH for /

ADD/MOD NOTIFICATION
Update error code and parameters for
ADD/MOD MESSAGETEMPLATE and
ADD/MOD NOTIFICATION
2014/02/27 V1.130 Add error code 98358 in RMV /

CUSTOMENUM command.
Remove error code 98358 in RMV
CUSTOMENUMELEM command.
Update chapter 1.1.3
According to CR-01273508:
Added Not Exist Enum of
OPERATORparameter for
ADD/MOD CONDITION commands.
2014/2/25 V1.129 Update error code 98402 for ADD /
MUTEXSERVICE, MOD SERVICE
2014/2/20 V1.128 Update Decription for ADD PRAYTIME /
Update PROFILEUPDATE to
PROFILEUPDATEACTION
Update parameter name of subscribers
extend attribute under
PROFILEUPDATEACTION.
Add error code 94586 for ADD/MOD
SERVICE
2014/01/08 V1.127 Updated the element of the ADD/MOD Wang Juhui

PROFILEUPDATE action. 00131893

Copyright Huawei
2014/01/05 V1.126 Add Customized Action Management. Wen Minliang

00257351
2013/12/31 V1.125 Added ADD/RMV PRAYTIME Jiang Zhihua
commands. 00257349
2013/12/23 V1.124 This issue is the V300R006C10 Baseline. Cheng Zhi

00160004
Synchronized changes from

Wang Juhui
2013/12/21 V1.123 V300R006C01 between 2013/11/1 and
00131893
2013/12/21.
2013/11/11 V1.122 Added CUSTOMERSTRATTRT Jiang Zhihua

parameter for ADD QUOTA and MOD 00257349
QUOTA commands.
2013/11/7 v1.121 Added ADD/MOD/RMV Jiang Guilan
SUBSEGMENT and ADD/RMV 00266905
NUMBERPREFIX commands.
2013/11/6 v1.120 Added ADD QUOTASTATUSMAP, Cheng Zhi
MOD QUOTASTATUSMAP and RMV 00160004
QUOTASTATUSMAP commands
2013/11/01 V1.119 Added the QUOTAMANAGER type in Xu Bin 00224192
ADD QUOTA
2013/10/29 V1.118 This issue is the V300R006C02 baseline. Liu Kaiwei
00257350
2013/10/22 V1.117 CR20131021073: Wang Juhui
Added 94607 for command ADD 00131893
SERVICEQUOTA.
DTS2013102101244:
Added 94608 for command RMV
QUOTA.
OR.UPCC.361.002:
Added parameter
NOTIFICATIONRECEIVER for
command ADD/MOD RULE.
Modified minimum value of parameter
QUOTASLICEVALUE to 1 for
command ADD/MOD QUOTA.
CR20131023052:
Added 94609 for command ADD
SERVICEQUOTA.

Copyright Huawei
2013/10/15 V1.116 DTS2013101404239 Wang Juhui

Modify ADD/MOD QUOTA, update the 00131893
parameter description about
MONITORKEY and MKSTRING
DTS2013101802303
Each domain defined by customer can
only have 512 services or 512 packages.
OR.UPCC.361.040
ADD/MOD SERVICE add parameter
NOTIFYCODE and
QRYNOTIFICATION. Add error code
94583 94584.
Add operation type Overwrite when
quota exhaust for ADD
MUTEXGROUP.
DTS2013101502464
Update value range of parameter last in
datetime.
2013-10-08 1.115 DTS2013091804579: Wang Juhui
Updated error description for 12526: 00131893
The mutex groups of same types but
different operation attributes can have
only one identical service.
DTS2013092407761:
Updated description of error code 94580
to "The Reservation-Priority mapping
already exists".
2013-09-24 1.114 According to CR20130923054: Wang Juhui
Modify ADD/MOD QUOTA, update 00131893
parameter definition about
MONITORKEY and MKSTRING
2013-09-24 1.113 According to CR20130916005: Jiang Zhihua
Add ADD 00257349
CMDSUBPROFILEACTION
command.
Add MOD
CMDSUBPROFILEACTION
command.
Add RMV
CMDSUBPROFILEACTION
command.

Copyright Huawei
2013-09-21 1.112 DTS2013091700609, modify Wang Juhui

CMDCHARGINGTION description 00131893
error.
DTS2013091804978, modify description
of error code 12526.
DTS2013090408313 update error code of
ADD/MOD/RMV RPMAP.
2013-09-09 V1.111 For Group-Member function: Jiang Zhihua
Added IsGroupService parameter for 00257349
ADD SERVICE command.
Added IsGroupService parameter for
MOD SERVICE command.
Added error code 94581 for MOD
SERVICE command.
Added error code 94581 for ADD
PACKAGESERVICE command.
SERVICEQUOTAcommand.
SUBSCRIBERGROUPSERVICE
command.
2013-09-07 V1.110 DTS2013090700304 Wang Juhui
Added error code 12609 for MOD 00131893
SERVICE. Update error code 12525
12609 description for MOD SERVICE.
2013-08-20 V1.109 Modify the Note of ADD Jiang Guilan
SERVICE/QUOTA/DOMAINSERVICE/ 00266905
DOMAINPACKAGE:
A maximum of 1024 quotas can be
configured in the system.
A maximum of 1024 services can be
2013-08-19 V1.108 Added parameter Liu Kaiwei
BILLINGCYCLEMODE for MOD 00257350
QUOTA, and add error code 94585.
2013-08-17 V1.107 Modified the type and range of the Jiang Guilan
parameter MONITORKEY in command 00266905
ADD/MOD QUOTA, and add error code
94582.
2013-07-22 V1.106 Added the ADD RPMA, MOD RPMA, Xu Bin 00224192
and RMV RPMAP commands.
2013-07-06 V1.105 This issue is the UPCC V300R006C01 Wang Juhui
baseline. 00131893

Copyright Huawei
2013-05-23 v1.104 Modified the parameter Jiang Guilan

BEFOREEXPIRYINTERVAL's range 00266905
from [30, 1440] to [30, 43200] in the
ADD SERVICE, MOD SERVICE,
ADD PACKAGE, and MOD
PACKAGE commands.
2013-05-22 v1.103 Added parameter Jiang Guilan
USERSTATUSAUTORESET for ADD 00266905
QUOTA and MOD QUOTA commands.
Added parameter ISSETSHAREDMODE
and SHAREDMODE for ADD
SERVICE and MOD SERVICE
commands.
Added error code 94553, 94554 for
ADD SERVICEZONEAREA command.
2013-05-09 v1.102 This issue is the UPCC V300R005C16 Jiang Guilan
baseline. 00266905
2013-04-18 v1.101 According to DTS2013041702294: Chen Yu 69387
Corrected the format and description
error for ADD QUOTA and MOD
QUOTA commands.
2013-04-18 v1.100 According to CR20130409052: Chen Yu 69387
Added description that the command
name without I can be supported for two
commands ADD
RULECONDITONGROUP and RMV
RULECONDITONGROUP.
2013-04-11 v1.99 According to CR20130319034: Jiang Zhihua
00257349
Added Exist Enum of
OPERATORparameter for
ADD/MOD CONDITION commands.
Changed the range to 0-2147483645 of
CUSTOMERATTRIBUTE for
ADD/MOD SERVICE commands.
2013-04-08 v1.98 According to CR20130321044: Jiang Zhihua
Deleted ADD/MOD/RMV 00257349
RELATIVETIMERANGE commands.
Deleted Minute Enum value of
parameter DURATIONTYPE for
ADD/MOD SERVICE command.
2013-04-03 v1.97 Modified the description of parameter Jiang Guilan
Quota Slice Type in the ADD/MOD 00266905
QUOTA commands according
DTS2013040102898.

Copyright Huawei
2013-03-20 v1.96 Added the CUSTOMERATTRIBUTE Jiang Guilan

parameter in the ADD SERVICE and 00266905
MOD SERVICE commands according
CR20130319034.
2013-03-13 v1.95 Updated ADD/MOD QUOTA commands: Jiang Zhihua
Modified Type attribute from "O" to 00257349
"C" for QUOTASLICETYPE and
QUOTASLICEVALUE parameters.
Added "CUMULATIVEPERCENT"
and "MAXCUMULATION for
Command Format section.
2013-03-02 v1.94 Modified according Jiang Zhihua
DTS2013012505294/DTS201301300163 00257349
0/DTS2013020600300
2013-2-25 v1.93 Added parameter QUOTASLICETYPE Jiang Guilan
and QUOTASLICEVALUE for 00266905
ADD/MOD QUOTA commands.
2013-1-31 V1.92 Added the Zhang Guangquan
CYCLEUNIT,HOURS,STARTMINUTE 00246365
parameters in the ADD QUOTA and
MOD QUOTA commands.
2013-1-29 v1.91 Added an error code(94576) for ADD Jiang Guilan
ROAMREGIONPLMN commands. 00266905
Modified the maximum of roaming
regions can be configured in the system
from 64 to 128.
2013-1-29 v1.90 Added relative time range action Jiang Guilan
configuration, include commands: 00266905
ADD RELATIVETIMERANGE,
MOD RELATIVETIMERANGE,
RMV RELATIVETIMERANGE
Added a value Minute for the parameter
Duration Type in ADD/MOD SERVICE
commands.
2013-1-28 v1.89 Modified the Description about the Liu Hongyan
parameter NOTIFICATIONNAME of
COMMAND ADD/MOD RULE.

Copyright Huawei
013-01-28 1.88 This issue is the V300R005C15 baseline. Jiang Zhihua

00257349
2012-11-20 1.87 Added holiday define management, Jiang Guilan
include commands: ADD HOLIDAY, 00266905
MOD HOLIDAY, RMV HOLIDAY.
2012-11-15 1.86 This issue is the UPCC V300R005C13 Yang Ming
baseline. 00247547
2012-11-2 1.85 According to CR20121102034: Jiang Zhihua
Deleted parameter 00257349
EXTERNALNOTIFICATION for
Delete 94553 error code for
2012-11-1 1.84 According to DTS2012103101103: Jiang Zhihua
Changed the maximum value for service 00257349
relation of the ADD PSRVMAP
command from 20000 to 2048.
2012-10-30 1.83 Changed the Type from M to O for Jiang Zhihua
parameter PAIDTYPE at the ADD 00257349
SUBSCRIBERGROUP command.
2012-10-22 1.82 Added Note for the value Predefined Jiang Guilan
ADC of parameter type of ADD/MOD 00266905
RULE commands.
2012-10-05 1.81 Added enumerate value for the value Jiang Zhihua
Predefined ADC of parameter type of 00257349
ADD/MOD RULE commands.
2012-09-28 1.80 Changed the type of Xu Bin 00224192
CONTROLINTERVAL and SLIDETYPE
from C to O for ADD/MOD
ACCUMULATION command.
2012-09-13 1.79 Added Xu Bin 00224192
ACTIONGROUPNAMEDURINGDELA
Y and
PREDEFINDEDNAMEDURINGDELA
Y in ADD/MOD RULE commands./
Modify the type of STARTTIME from
DateTime to String in ADD/MOD
MESSAGETEMPLATE commands/

Copyright Huawei
2012-09-08 1.78 Modified the PRECEDENCE to be an Jiang Guilan

optional parameter for ADD 00266905
SUBSCRIBERGROUPcommands;
Each dynamic subscriber group is
configured with a maximum of 10
services;
Added the value of Remove Rule for
the OPERATION parameter in
ADD/MOD RULE commands.
Changed the Type from M to C for
EDR parameter at ADD RULE
command.
2012-09-03 1.77 Added EXTERNALNOTIFICATION Jiang Zhihua
parameter and 94553 error code for 00257349
ADD/MOD SERVICE commands
2012-08-29 1.76 Added STARTTIME and DURATION Xu Bin 00224192
for ADD/MOD
MESSAGETEMPLATE commands;
Added DELAYTIME for ADD/MOD
RULE commands;
Added CONTROLINTERVAL
forADD/MOD ACCUMULATION
commands;
Added SLIDETYPE for ADD
ACCUMULATION command;
Added ACCUMULATEATTRIBUTE
for ADD MUTEXGROUP command.
2012-08-29 1.75 Added QUOTAALLOCATIONMODE Jiang Guilan
for ADD/MOD SERVICE command. 00266905
2012-08-28 1.74 Modified ADD SRVMAP. Liu Xianghui
A maximum of 20000 records can be 131847
2012-07-27 1.66 Updated according to Jiang Guilan
DTS2012072508124. 00266905
2012-07-25 1.65 Updated according to CR20120703037. Jiang Guilan
00266905
2012-07-24 1.64 Updated according to CR20120716029. Jiang Guilan
00266905
DTS2012071104392. 00266905
2012-07-12 1.62 Updated according to Tang Ge KF74680
DTS2012070502622.
2012-07-10 1.61 Revised based on DTS2012070901092. Xu Bin 00224192

Copyright Huawei

DTS2012060107219. 00266905
DTS2012061803178. 00266905
2012-06-25 1.58 Added ISONEOFF for ADD QUOTA Xu Bin 00224192
command and remove the One Off
enumerated value.
2012-06-20 1.57 Modified ADD QUOTA and MOD Wangqing
QUOTA.
Added the enumerated value: Cumulate
Based on Remaining Quota.
2012-05-26 1.56 Added commands for Redirection URL Xu Bin 00224192
and Service Map.
Modified the data type of RESETDATE
to Enumerated, and add Effective Date.
Added RedirectTimes and
RedirectReport action elements.
2012-05-11 1.55 Addeded the QUOTAMANAGER Yang Ming
parameter for ADD QUOTA. 00247547
ACCUMULATIONQUOTA.
MUTEXSERVICE.
2012-04-26 1.54 Added commands for MBB Smart Xu Bin 00224192
Charging solution and message language.
2012-04-25 1.53 Revised the description for Jiang Zhihua
94507/94508/94509 error code based 00257349
onCR20120425018.
2012-10-22 1.55 Revised based on DTS2012101908131. Jiang Zhihua
00257349

Copyright Huawei
2012-04-07 1.52 Modified ADD POLICY command,the Jiang Zhihua

parameter, TRIGGERNAME change to 00257349
optional.
Modified MOD POLICYcommand and
deleted the parameter
TRIGGERNAME.
Added ADD/RMV POLICYTRIGGER
commands.
Modified ADD /MOD
CONDITIONGROUP commands and
added one parameter RELATION.
Modified ADD RULE command and
added parameter RELATION.
Modified MOD RULE command and
added one parameter and delete one
parameter CONDITIONGROUUP.
Add ADD/RMV
RULECONDITIONGROUP
commands.
Added ADD/RMV SUBGRPCONGRP
commands.
Modified RMV CONDITIONGROUP
command and added one error code
94511.
Modified ADD/MOD CONDITION
commands and added one error code
94519.
2012-3-28 v1.51 Modified the maximum of notification Wen Mingliang
for 2048. 00257351
Modified the maximum of rule for
3072.
Modified the maximum of template for
512.
2012-03-19 v1.50 Added the ADD/MOD/RMV Wang Qing
URLFILTERING commands.
Added the ADD/MOD/RMV
APNLIST, ADD/MOD/RMV APN
commands.
2012-03-05 v1.49 Modify MOD /ADD Jiang Zhihua
SUBSCRIBERGROUP according to 00257349
DTS2012030500581
2012-01-20 v1.48 Extended the ADDRESSVALUE Jiang Zhihua
parameter of ADD/MOD 00257349
REDIRECTION to 127

Copyright Huawei
2012-01-19 v1.47 Added the ADD/MOD/RMV Wang Qing

CHARGINGSERVERGROUP
commands;
Added the parameter and error code in
the ADD/MOD/RMV
CHARGINGSERVER commands;
Added the error code in the ADD/MOD
SUBSCRIBERGROUP;
2012-01-19 v1.46 Modify the value range of the parameter Liu Hongyan
RESETDATE and RESETTIMETYPE;
Added the error code 98308 in MOD
QUOTA;
2012-01-06 v1.41 Revised based on the trouble ticket Xu Hu
DTS2012010506404.
DTS2011121905327.
2011-12-21 v1.39 Revised based on the trouble ticket Xue Zhen
DTS2011122005870.
2011-11-01 v1.38 Added the enumerated value Cumulate Kong Sanwen
After Recharge for the
BALANCERESETMETHOD
parameter.
2011-11-01 v1.37 Revised the description of error code Xue Zhen
94254 and added error code 94332.
2011-10-27 v1.36 Revised error codes in the ADD Wang Qing
PLMNSGSN, MOD PLMNSGSN,ADD
PLMNANGW, and MOD PLMNANGW
commands.
2011-10-14 v1.35 Added the CUSTOMERATTR Wang Qing

parameter in the ADD
SUBSCRIBERGROUP and MOD
SUBSCRIBERGROUP commands.
2011-09-24 v1.34 Added the SGSNNUMBER parameter Liu Xianghui
for PLMN configuration and the
enumerated value Friend.
2011-09-23 v1.33 Revised IPv6 addresses involved in MML Wang Qing
commands related with subscriber group,
flow filter, SGSN roaming area, and
service zone area, added MML
commands for ANGW roaming area
management, and updated the note part of
the ADD INDICATESERVICENAME
command.

Copyright Huawei
2011-09-23 v1.32 Added BOD SERVICE in the service Xue Zhen

management.
2011-09-07 v1.31 Updated for CLI phase 2. Xu Hu
DTS2011082403516.
DTS2011081104372.
2011-08-16 v1.28 Revised to incorporate review comments. Xu Hu
DTS2011081202286.
DTS2011081104320.
2011-08-05 v1.25 Revised to incorporate review comments. Xu Hu
2011-08-04 v1.24 Revised based on CR20110801005. Xu Hu
DTS2011070706678.
2011-08-02 v1.22 Revised based on the trouble tickets Xu Hu
DTS2011080104210,
DTS2011080105122, and
DTS2011080105715.
2011-07-31 v1.11 Revised according to to incorporate Zhang Xiaolin
review comments from translators. 00257401
2011-07-27 v1.10 Revised according to incorporate review Xu Hu
comments from translators.
2011-07-22 v1.09 Deleted the error code 94259 in the Liu Hongyan
output of MOD
DEFAULTBEARERQOS.
2011-07-21 v1.08 Revised the example part of command Xu Hu
results related with account based on the
trouble ticket DTS2011071501009.
2011-07-21 v1.07 Revised the value length of the Xu Hu
DateTime parameter based on the trouble
ticket DTS2011071602302.
2011-07-21 v1.06 Added description about error codes Xu Hu
94258, 94259, and 94260 in the output of
ADD QOSACTION based on the
2011-07-20 v1.05 Revised to incorporate review comments. Zhang Xiaolin
00257401

Copyright Huawei
2011-07-19 v1.04 Deleted error codes 1001, 1003, 1004, Kong Sanwen
1009, 1010, 1118 and added error code
8201 mapping those deleted error codes.
2011-07-19 v1.03 Revised parameters and MML command Xu Hu
format of the account and quota based on
the trouble ticket DTS2011071501009.
2011-07-19 v1.02 Added description that UNICODE Zhang Xiaolin
characters are not supported by MML 00257401
commands based on the trouble ticket
DTS2011062305047.
2011-07-19 v1.01 Revised the format of time based on the Xu Hu
2011-06-29 v1.00 Initial release.
2012-11-16 v1.01 Modify ADD QUOTA and MOD Cheng Zhi
QUOTA commands to support Sy Quota.
2012-11-16 v1.02 Added the Liu Hongyan
RECHARGENOTIFICATION
parameter in the ADD QUOTA and
MOD QUOTA commands.
2012-12-13 v1.03 Revised based on the trouble ticket Yang Ming
DTS2012091107995. 00267273
2012-12-22 v1.04 Deleted error codes 94564and revised Yang Ming
description for error code 00267273
94562,94563,94565,94566,94567 based
on the trouble ticket
DTS2012122007515.
2012-12-22 v1.05 Add SERVICEFLOWDETECTION Yang Ming
action 00267273
2013-11-19 v1.06 Added ADD AUXILIARYAREA and Liu Kaiwei
RMV AUXILIARYAREA in the service 00257350
zone management.
2013-11-28 v1.07 Added description about error codes Liu Kaiwei
12609 in the output of ADD 00257350
SERVICEQUOTA and RMV
SERVICEQUOTA based on the trouble
ticket DTS2013112603365.
2013-12-03 v1.08 Added ADD/MOD/RMV Guan Zehui
TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIERAD 00257400
D/MOD/RMV MUTENOTIFICATION
and ADD/MOD/RMV
REDIRECTINFORMATION in the
action group zone management.

Copyright Huawei
2013-12-12 V1.09 Added error code 98325 in ADD Xu Bin 00224192

PACKAGESERVICE command
according to DTS2013120506674

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Contents
Contents
About This Document....................................................................................................................ii

1 Description.....................................................................................................................................1
1.1 CLI Interface Description..................................................................................................................................1
1.1.1 Concept of the CLI Interface....................................................................................................................1
1.1.2 Network connect.......................................................................................................................................1
1.1.3 Other.........................................................................................................................................................2
1.1.4 Interface Authentication mechanism........................................................................................................2
1.2 MML Format Description..................................................................................................................................2
1.3 Data Type Definition..........................................................................................................................................3
1.3.1 String/Characters......................................................................................................................................3
1.3.2 HexString..................................................................................................................................................4
1.3.3 Number.....................................................................................................................................................4
1.3.4 Boolean.....................................................................................................................................................4
1.3.5 Enumerated...............................................................................................................................................4
1.3.6 DateTime..................................................................................................................................................4
1.4 MML Description Document.............................................................................................................................4
1.4.1 Command Description..............................................................................................................................4
1.4.2 Command Parameter................................................................................................................................4
1.4.3 Command Format.....................................................................................................................................5
1.4.4 Result........................................................................................................................................................5
1.5 Value Range.......................................................................................................................................................6
1.6 Heartbeat Mechanism........................................................................................................................................7
2 Operation List................................................................................................................................9
3 Object List.....................................................................................................................................10
3.1 Condition Group Management........................................................................................................................10
3.2 Action Group Management..............................................................................................................................10
3.3 Service Flow Management...............................................................................................................................11
3.4 Notification Management................................................................................................................................11
3.5 Rating Management.........................................................................................................................................12
3.6 Rule Management............................................................................................................................................12
3.7 Policy Management.........................................................................................................................................12

Copyright Huawei
3.8 Service Provider Management.........................................................................................................................12

3.9 Quota Management..........................................................................................................................................12
3.10 Account Management....................................................................................................................................13
3.11 Accumulation Management...........................................................................................................................13
3.12 Service Management......................................................................................................................................13
3.13 Service Package Management.......................................................................................................................13
3.14 Mutex Group Management............................................................................................................................14
3.15 Application Service Mapping Management...................................................................................................14
3.16 Domain Management.....................................................................................................................................14
3.17 Charging Server Group Management............................................................................................................14
3.18 Subscriber Group Management.....................................................................................................................15
3.19 Terminal Type Management..........................................................................................................................15
3.20 Roam Region Management...........................................................................................................................15
3.21 PLMN Management......................................................................................................................................15
3.22 Service Zone Management............................................................................................................................16
3.23 Message/Email Template Management.........................................................................................................16
3.24 APN List Management...................................................................................................................................16
3.25 Message Language Management...................................................................................................................16
3.26 Redirection URL Management......................................................................................................................17
3.27 Service Map Management.............................................................................................................................17
3.28 ReservationPriority Map Management..........................................................................................................17
3.29 Pray Time Management.................................................................................................................................17
3.30 Customized Action Management...................................................................................................................18
4 Condition Group Management................................................................................................19

4.1 Add Condition Group (ADD CONDITIONGROUP).....................................................................................19
4.1.1 Command Description............................................................................................................................19
4.1.2 Command Parameter..............................................................................................................................19
4.1.3 Command Format...................................................................................................................................19
4.1.4 Result......................................................................................................................................................20
4.2 Modify Condition Group (MOD CONDITIONGROUP)...............................................................................20
4.2.3 Command Format...................................................................................................................................21
4.2.4 Result......................................................................................................................................................21
4.3 Delete Condition Group (RMV CONDITIONGROUP).................................................................................21
4.3.3 Command Format...................................................................................................................................22
4.3.4 Result......................................................................................................................................................22
4.4 Add Condition (ADD CONDITION)..............................................................................................................22

Copyright Huawei

4.4.3 Command Format...................................................................................................................................24
4.4.4 Result......................................................................................................................................................25
4.5 Modify Condition (MOD CONDITION)........................................................................................................25
4.5.3 Command Format...................................................................................................................................27
4.5.4 Result......................................................................................................................................................28
4.6 Delete Condition (RMV CONDITION)..........................................................................................................28
4.6.3 Command Format...................................................................................................................................29
4.6.4 Result......................................................................................................................................................29
5 Action Group Management.......................................................................................................30

5.1 Add Action Group (ADD ACTIONGROUP)..................................................................................................30
5.1.3 Command Format...................................................................................................................................30
5.1.4 Result......................................................................................................................................................31
5.2 Modify Action Group (MOD ACTIONGROUP)............................................................................................31
5.2.3 Command Format...................................................................................................................................32
5.2.4 Result......................................................................................................................................................32
5.3 Delete Action Group (RMV ACTIONGROUP)..............................................................................................32
5.3.3 Command Format...................................................................................................................................33
5.3.4 Result......................................................................................................................................................33
5.4 Add QoS Action (ADD QOSACTION)...........................................................................................................33
5.4.3 Command Format...................................................................................................................................36
5.4.4 Result......................................................................................................................................................36
5.5 Modify QoS Action (MOD QOSACTION).....................................................................................................37
5.5.3 Command Format...................................................................................................................................39
5.5.4 Result......................................................................................................................................................39
5.6 Delete QoS Action (RMV QOSACTION)......................................................................................................40

Copyright Huawei

5.6.3 Command Format...................................................................................................................................40
5.6.4 Result......................................................................................................................................................40
5.7 Add Gate Action (ADD GATEACTION)........................................................................................................41
5.7.3 Command Format...................................................................................................................................41
5.7.4 Result......................................................................................................................................................42
5.8 Modify Gate Action (MOD GATEACTION)..................................................................................................42
5.8.3 Command Format...................................................................................................................................43
5.8.4 Result......................................................................................................................................................43
5.9 Delete Gate Action (RMV GATEACTION)....................................................................................................44
5.9.3 Command Format...................................................................................................................................44
5.9.4 Result......................................................................................................................................................44
5.10 Add Charging Action (ADD CHARGINGACTION)....................................................................................45
5.10.1 Command Description..........................................................................................................................45
5.10.2 Command Parameter............................................................................................................................45
5.10.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................46
5.10.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................47
5.11 Modify Charging Action (MOD CHARGINGACTION)..............................................................................47
5.11.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................49
5.11.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................49
5.12 Delete Charging Action (RMV CHARGINGACTION)................................................................................50
5.12.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................50
5.12.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................50
5.13 Add Redirection Action (ADD REDIRECTION).........................................................................................51
5.13.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................53
5.13.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................53
5.14 Modify Redirection Action (MOD REDIRECTION)...................................................................................54
5.14.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................55

Copyright Huawei
5.14.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................56
5.15 Delete Redirection Action (RMV REDIRECTION).....................................................................................56
5.15.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................56
5.15.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................57
5.16 Add AFChargingIdentifier Action (ADD AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIER)....................................................57
5.16.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................58
5.16.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................58
5.17 Modify AFChargingIdentifier Action (MOD AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIER)..............................................59
5.17.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................59
5.17.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................59
5.18 Delete AFChargingIdentifier Action (RMV AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIER)................................................60
5.18.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................60
5.18.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................61
5.19 Add AFMediaFlowsNumber Action (ADD AFMEDIAFLOWSNUMBER)................................................61
5.19.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................62
5.19.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................62
5.20 Modify AFMediaFlowsNumber Action (MOD AFMEDIAFLOWSNUMBER)..........................................63
5.20.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................64
5.20.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................64
5.21 Delete AFMediaFlowsNumber Action (RMV AFMEDIAFLOWSNUMBER)............................................65
5.21.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................65
5.21.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................65
5.22 Add UsageReport Action (ADD USAGEREPORT)......................................................................................66
5.22.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................66
5.22.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................66
5.23 Modify UsageReport Action (MOD USAGEREPORT)................................................................................67

Copyright Huawei

5.23.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................68
5.23.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................68
5.24 Delete UsageReportAction (RMV USAGEREPORT)..................................................................................68
5.24.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................69
5.24.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................69
5.25 Add IndicateServiceNameAction (ADD INDICATESERVICENAME).......................................................69
5.25.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................70
5.25.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................70
5.26 Modify IndicateServiceName Action (MOD INDICATESERVICENAME)................................................71
5.26.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................72
5.26.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................72
5.27 Delete IndicateServiceName Action (RMV INDICATESERVICENAME)..................................................73
5.27.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................73
5.27.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................73
5.28 Add RuleTimeRange Action (ADD RULETIMERANGE)...........................................................................74
5.28.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................75
5.28.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................75
5.29 Modify RuleTimeRange Action (MOD RULETIMERANGE).....................................................................76
5.29.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................77
5.29.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................77
5.30 Delete RuleTimeRange Action (RMV RULETIMERANGE).......................................................................78
5.30.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................78
5.30.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................78
5.31 Add DefaultBearerQoS Action (ADD DEFAULTBEARERQOS)................................................................79

Copyright Huawei
5.31.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................80

5.31.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................81
5.32 Modify DefaultBearerQoS Action (MOD DEFAULTBEARERQOS)..........................................................82
5.32.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................83
5.32.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................84
5.33 Delete DefaultBearerQoS Action (RMV DEFAULTBEARERQOS)............................................................85
5.33.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................85
5.33.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................85
5.34 Add CmdChargingAction Action (ADD CMDCHARGINGACTION)........................................................86
5.34.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................87
5.34.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................87
5.35 Modify CmdChargingAction Action <MOD CMDCHARGINGACTION >...............................................88
5.35.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................88
5.35.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................89
5.36 Delete CmdChargingAction Action <RMV CMDCHARGINGACTION >.................................................89
5.36.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................90
5.36.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................90
5.37 Add FBBAction Action <ADD FBBACTION>............................................................................................90
5.37.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................91
5.37.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................92
5.38 Modify FBBAction Action <MOD FBBACTION >.....................................................................................93
5.38.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................94
5.38.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................94
5.39 Delete FBBAction Action <RMV FBBACTION >.......................................................................................95
5.39.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................95
5.39.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................95

Copyright Huawei
5.40 Add URLFILTERING Action <ADD URLFILTERING >...........................................................................96

5.40.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................97
5.40.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................97
5.41 Modify URLFILTERING Action <MOD URLFILTERING >.....................................................................98
5.41.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................99
5.41.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................99
5.42 Delete URLFILTERING Action <RMV URLFILTERING >.....................................................................100
5.42.1 Command Description........................................................................................................................100
5.42.2 Command Parameter..........................................................................................................................100
5.42.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................100
5.42.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................100
5.43 Add SCE Action (ADD SCE)......................................................................................................................101
5.43.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................101
5.43.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................102
5.44 Modify SCE Action (MOD SCE)................................................................................................................102
5.44.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................103
5.44.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................103
5.45 Delete SCE Action (RMV SCE)..................................................................................................................104
5.45.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................104
5.45.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................104
5.46 Add SCEPSINFORMATION Action (ADD SCEPSINFORMATION)......................................................105
5.46.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................107
5.46.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................108
5.47 Modify SCEPSINFORMATION Action (MOD SCEPSINFORMATION)................................................108
5.47.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................110
5.47.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................111
5.48 Delete SCEPSINFORMATION Action (RMV SCEPSINFORMATION)..................................................111

Copyright Huawei
5.48.2 Command Parameter...........................................................................................................................111

5.48.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................112
5.48.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................112
5.49 Add SERVICEFLOWDETECTION Action (ADD SERVICEFLOWDETECTION).................................112
5.49.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................113
5.49.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................113
5.50 Modify SERVICEFLOWDETECTION Action (MOD SERVICEFLOWDETECTION)...........................114
5.50.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................115
5.50.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................115
5.51 Delete SERVICEFLOWDETECTION Action (RMV SERVICEFLOWDETECTION).............................116
5.51.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................116
5.51.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................116
5.52 Add CMDSUBPROFILEACTION<ADD CMDSUBPROFILEACTION>...............................................117
5.52.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................118
5.52.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................118
5.53 Modify CMDSUBPROFILEACTION<MOD CMDSUBPROFILEACTION>.........................................118
5.53.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................119
5.53.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................119
5.54 Delete CMDSUBPROFILEACTION<RMV CMDSUBPROFILEACTION>...........................................120
5.54.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................120
5.54.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................120
5.55 Add TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER<ADD TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER>..................................121
5.55.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................122
5.55.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................122
5.56 Modify TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER <MOD TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER >..........................123
5.56.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................123

Copyright Huawei
5.56.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................124
5.57 Delete TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER <RMV TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER >...........................124
5.57.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................125
5.57.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................125
5.58 Add MUTENOTIFICATION<ADD MUTENOTIFICATION>.................................................................125
5.58.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................126
5.58.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................126
5.59 Modify MUTENOTIFICATION <MOD MUTENOTIFICATION >.........................................................127
5.59.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................128
5.59.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................128
5.60 Delete MUTENOTIFICATION <RMV MUTENOTIFICATION >...........................................................128
5.60.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................129
5.60.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................129
5.61 Add REDIRECTINFORMATION<ADD REDIRECTINFORMATION>.................................................129
5.61.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................131
5.61.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................131
5.62 Modify REDIRECTINFORMATION <MOD REDIRECTINFORMATION >.........................................132
5.62.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................133
5.62.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................134
5.63 Delete REDIRECTINFORMATION<RMV REDIRECTINFORMATION >............................................134
5.63.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................135
5.63.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................135
5.64 Add PROFILEUPDATEACTION<ADD PROFILEUPDATEACTION >.................................................135
5.64.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................137
5.64.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................138
5.65 Modify PROFILEUPDATEACTION <MOD PROFILEUPDATEACTION >..........................................139

Copyright Huawei

5.65.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................141
5.65.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................141
5.66 Delete PROFILEUPDATEACTION <RMV PROFILEUPDATEACTION >............................................142
5.66.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................142
5.66.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................142
6 Service Flow Management.......................................................................................................143

6.1 Add Service Flow (ADD SERVICEFLOW)..................................................................................................143
6.1.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................143
6.1.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................144
6.2 Modify Service Flow (MOD SERVICEFLOW)............................................................................................144
6.2.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................144
6.2.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................145
6.3 Delete Service Flow (RMV SERVICEFLOW).............................................................................................145
6.3.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................145
6.3.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................146
6.4 Add Flow Filter (ADD FLOWFILTER)........................................................................................................146
6.4.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................148
6.4.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................149
6.5 Modify Flow Filter (MOD FLOWFILTER)..................................................................................................150
6.5.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................152
6.5.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................152
6.6 Delete Flow Filter (RMV FLOWFILTER)....................................................................................................153
6.6.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................154
6.6.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................154
7 Notification Management........................................................................................................155

Copyright Huawei
7.1 Add Notification (ADD NOTIFICATION)...................................................................................................155

7.1.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................157
7.1.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................157
7.2 Modify Notification (MOD NOTIFICATION).............................................................................................158
7.2.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................159
7.2.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................160
7.3 Delete Notification (RMV NOTIFICATION)...............................................................................................161
7.3.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................161
7.3.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................161
8 Rating Management..................................................................................................................163
8.1 Add Rating (ADD RATING).........................................................................................................................163
8.1.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................164
8.1.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................164
8.2 Modify Rating (MOD RATING)...................................................................................................................165
8.2.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................165
8.2.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................166
8.3 Delete Rating (RMV RATING).....................................................................................................................166
8.3.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................166
8.3.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................167
9 Rule Management.....................................................................................................................168
9.1 Add Rule (ADD RULE)................................................................................................................................168
9.1.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................172
9.1.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................173
9.2 Modify Rule (MOD RULE)..........................................................................................................................174
9.2.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................178

Copyright Huawei
9.2.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................179
9.3 Delete Rule (RMV RULE)............................................................................................................................180
9.3.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................180
9.3.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................180
9.4 ADD Rule Condition Group <ADD RULECONDITIONGROUP>.............................................................181
9.4.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................181
9.4.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................182
9.5 Delete Rule Condition Group <RMV RULECONDITIONGROUP>..........................................................182
9.5.3 Command Format.................................................................................................................................183
9.5.4 Result....................................................................................................................................................183
10 Policy Management.................................................................................................................184
10.1 Add Policy (ADD POLICY)........................................................................................................................184
10.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................184
10.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................185
10.2 Modify Policy (MOD POLICY)..................................................................................................................185
10.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................186
10.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................186
10.3 Delete Policy (RMV POLICY)....................................................................................................................186
10.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................187
10.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................187
10.4 Add Policy Trigger (ADD POLICYTRIGGER)..........................................................................................187
10.4.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................188
10.4.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................188
10.5 Delete Policy Trigger (RMV POLICYTRIGGER)......................................................................................188
10.5.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................189

Copyright Huawei
10.5.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................189
10.6 Add Policy Rule (ADD POLICYRULE).....................................................................................................190
10.6.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................190
10.6.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................190
10.7 Delete Policy Rule (RMV POLICYRULE).................................................................................................191
10.7.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................191
10.7.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................191
11 Service Provider Management..............................................................................................193

11.1 Add Service Provider (ADD SP).................................................................................................................193
11.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................193
11.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................194
11.2 Modify Service Provider (MOD SP)...........................................................................................................194
11.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................194
11.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................195
11.3 Delete Service Provider (RMV SP).............................................................................................................195
11.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................195
11.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................196
12 Quota Management.................................................................................................................197
12.1 Add Quota (ADD QUOTA).........................................................................................................................197
12.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................204
12.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................206
12.2 Modify Quota (MOD QUOTA)...................................................................................................................206
12.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................213
12.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................214
12.3 Delete Quota (RMV QUOTA).....................................................................................................................216

Copyright Huawei
12.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................216

12.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................216
13 Account Management.............................................................................................................217
13.1 Add Account (ADD ACCOUNT)................................................................................................................217
13.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................220
13.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................221
13.2 Modify Account (MOD ACCOUNT)..........................................................................................................221
13.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................224
13.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................225
13.3 Delete Account (RMV ACCOUNT)............................................................................................................226
13.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................226
13.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................226
14 Accumulation Management..................................................................................................227
14.1 Add Accumulation (ADD ACCUMULATION)..........................................................................................227
14.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................232
14.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................233
14.2 Modify Accumulation (MOD ACCUMULATION)....................................................................................233
14.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................238
14.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................239
14.3 Delete Accumulation (RMV ACCUMULATION)......................................................................................239
14.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................239
14.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................240
14.4 Add Accumulation Quota (ADD ACCUMULATIONQUOTA)..................................................................240
14.4.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................241
14.4.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................241
14.5 Delete Accumulation Quota (RMV ACCUMULATIONQUOTA)..............................................................242

Copyright Huawei

14.5.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................242
14.5.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................242
15 Service Management...............................................................................................................244
15.1 Add Service (ADD SERVICE)....................................................................................................................244
15.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................248
15.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................249
15.2 Modify Service (MOD SERVICE)..............................................................................................................250
15.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................254
15.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................255
15.3 Delete Service (RMV SERVICE)................................................................................................................257
15.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................257
15.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................257
15.4 Add Service Policy (ADD SERVICEPOLICY)..........................................................................................258
15.4.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................258
15.4.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................258
15.5 Delete Service Policy (RMV SERVICEPOLICY)......................................................................................259
15.5.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................259
15.5.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................259
15.6 Add Service Quota (ADD SERVICEQUOTA)............................................................................................260
15.6.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................260
15.6.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................260
15.7 Delete Service Quota (RMV SERVICEQUOTA)........................................................................................261
15.7.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................261
15.7.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................262
16 Package Management.............................................................................................................263
16.1 Add Package (ADD PACKAGE).................................................................................................................263

Copyright Huawei

16.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................264
16.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................265
16.2 Modify Package (MOD PACKAGE)...........................................................................................................265
16.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................267
16.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................267
16.3 Delete Package (RMV PACKAGE)............................................................................................................268
16.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................268
16.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................268
16.4 Add Package Service (ADD PACKAGESERVICE)...................................................................................269
16.4.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................269
16.4.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................269
16.5 Delete Package Service (RMV PACKAGESERVICE)...............................................................................270
16.5.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................270
16.5.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................271
17 Mutex Group Management...................................................................................................272

17.1 Add Mutex Group (ADD MUTEXGROUP)...............................................................................................272
17.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................273
17.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................274
17.2 Modify Mutex Group (MOD MUTEXGROUP).........................................................................................274
17.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................274
17.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................275
17.3 Delete Mutex Group (RMV MUTEXGROUP)...........................................................................................275
17.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................275
17.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................276
17.4 Add Mutex Service (ADD MUTEXSERVICE)..........................................................................................276

Copyright Huawei

17.4.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................276
17.4.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................277
17.5 Delete Mutex Service (RMV MUTEXSERVICE)......................................................................................277
17.5.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................278
17.5.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................278
18 Application Service Mapping Management......................................................................279

18.1 Add Application Service Mapping (ADD APPLICATIONSERVICEMAPPING).....................................279
18.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................279
18.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................280
18.2 Modify Application Service Mapping (MOD APPLICATIONSERVICEMAPPING)...............................280
18.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................281
18.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................281
18.3 Delete Application Service Mapping (RMV APPLICATIONSERVICEMAPPING).................................282
18.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................282
18.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................282
19 Domain Management.............................................................................................................284
19.1 Add Domain (ADD DOMAIN)...................................................................................................................284
19.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................284
19.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................285
19.2 Modify Domain (MOD DOMAIN).............................................................................................................285
19.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................285
19.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................286
19.3 Delete Domain (RMV DOMAIN)...............................................................................................................286
19.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................286
19.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................287

Copyright Huawei
19.4 Add Domain Service (ADD DOMAINSERVICE)......................................................................................287

19.4.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................287
19.4.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................288
19.5 Delete Domain Service (RMV DOMAINSERVICE)..................................................................................288
19.5.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................289
19.5.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................289
19.6 Add Domain Package (ADD DOMAINPACKAGE)..................................................................................289
19.6.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................290
19.6.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................290
19.7 Delete Domain Package (RMV DOMAINPACKAGE)..............................................................................290
19.7.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................291
19.7.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................291
20 Charging Server Group Management.................................................................................292

20.1 Add Charging Server Group(ADD CHARGINGSERVERGROUP)..........................................................292
20.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................293
20.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................293
20.2 Modify Charging Server Group(MOD CHARGINGSERVERGROUP)....................................................293
20.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................294
20.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................294
20.3 Delete Charging Server Group(RMV CHARGINGSERVERGROUP)......................................................295
20.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................295
20.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................295
20.4 Add Charging Server (ADD CHARGINGSERVER)..................................................................................296
20.4.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................297
20.4.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................297

Copyright Huawei
20.5 Modify Charging Server (MOD CHARGINGSERVER)............................................................................298

20.5.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................299
20.5.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................300
20.6 Delete Charging Server (RMV CHARGINGSERVER)..............................................................................300
20.6.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................301
20.6.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................301
21 Subscriber Group Management...........................................................................................302

21.1 Add Subscriber Group (ADD SUBSCRIBERGROUP)..............................................................................302
21.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................305
21.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................306
21.2 Modify Subscriber Group (MOD SUBSCRIBERGROUP)........................................................................306
21.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................308
21.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................309
21.3 Delete Subscriber Group (RMV SUBSCRIBERGROUP)..........................................................................310
21.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................310
21.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................311
21.4 Add Condition Group for a Subscriber Group (ADD SUBGRPCONGRP)................................................311
21.4.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................312
21.4.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................312
21.5 Delete Condition Group for a Subscriber Group (RMV SUBGRPCONGRP)............................................312
21.5.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................313
21.5.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................313
21.6 Add Subscriber Group Service (ADD SUBSCRIBERGROUPSERVICE).................................................314
21.6.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................314
21.6.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................314

Copyright Huawei
21.7 Delete Subscriber Group Service (RMV SUBSCRIBERGROUPSERVICE).............................................315

21.7.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................315
21.7.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................316
22 Terminal Type Management.................................................................................................317

22.1 Add Terminal Type (ADD TERMINALTYPE)...........................................................................................317
22.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................317
22.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................318
22.2 Modify Terminal Type (MOD TERMINALTYPE).....................................................................................318
22.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................318
22.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................319
22.3 Delete Terminal Type (RMV TERMINALTYPE).......................................................................................319
22.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................319
22.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................319
22.4 Add Terminal (ADD TERMINAL)..............................................................................................................320
22.4.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................320
22.4.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................321
22.5 Modify Terminal (MOD TERMINAL)........................................................................................................321
22.5.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................321
22.5.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................322
22.6 Delete Terminal (RMV TERMINAL).........................................................................................................322
22.6.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................322
22.6.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................323
23 Roam Region Management...................................................................................................324

23.1 Add Roam Region (ADD ROAMREGION)...............................................................................................324
23.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................324

Copyright Huawei
23.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................325
23.2 Modify Roam Region (MOD ROAMREGION).........................................................................................325
23.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................325
23.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................326
23.3 Delete Roam Region (RMV ROAMREGION)...........................................................................................326
23.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................326
23.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................326
23.4 Add Roam Region PLMN (ADD ROAMREGIONPLMN)........................................................................327
23.4.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................327
23.4.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................328
23.5 Delete Roam Region PLMN (RMV ROAMREGIONPLMN)....................................................................328
23.5.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................328
23.5.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................329
24 PLMN Management................................................................................................................330
24.1 Add PLMN (ADD PLMN)..........................................................................................................................330
24.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................331
24.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................331
24.2 Modify PLMN (MOD PLMN)....................................................................................................................332
24.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................332
24.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................333
24.3 Delete PLMN (RMV PLMN)......................................................................................................................333
24.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................333
24.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................334
24.4 Add PLMN SGSN (ADD PLMNSGSN).....................................................................................................334
24.4.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................335

Copyright Huawei
24.4.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................335
24.5 Modify PLMN SGSN (MOD PLMNSGSN)...............................................................................................336
24.5.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................337
24.5.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................337
24.6 Delete PLMN SGSN (RMV PLMNSGSN).................................................................................................338
24.6.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................338
24.6.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................339
24.7 Add PLMN ANGW (ADD PLMNANGW).................................................................................................339
24.7.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................340
24.7.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................340
24.8 Modify PLMN ANGW (MOD PLMNANGW)...........................................................................................341
24.8.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................342
24.8.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................342
24.9 Delete PLMN ANGW (RMV PLMNANGW).............................................................................................343
24.9.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................343
24.9.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................343
25 Service Zone Management....................................................................................................344

25.1 Add Service Zone (ADD SERVICEZONE)................................................................................................344
25.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................344
25.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................345
25.2 Modify Service Zone (MOD SERVICEZONE)..........................................................................................345
25.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................345
25.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................346
25.3 Delete Service Zone (RMV SERVICEZONE)............................................................................................346
25.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................346

Copyright Huawei
25.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................347
25.4 Add Service Zone Area (ADD SERVICEZONEAREA).............................................................................347
25.4.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................348
25.4.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................349
25.5 Modify Service Zone Area (MOD SERVICEZONEAREA).......................................................................349
25.5.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................350
25.5.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................350
25.6 Delete Service Zone Area (RMV SERVICEZONEAREA).........................................................................352
25.6.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................352
25.6.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................352
25.7 Add Auxiliary Area (ADD AUXILIARYAREA).........................................................................................353
25.7.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................353
25.7.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................354
25.8 Delete Auxiliary Area (RMV AUXILIARYAREA)....................................................................................354
25.8.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................355
25.8.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................355
26 Message/Email Template Management..............................................................................357

26.1 Add Template (ADD MESSAGETEMPLATE)...........................................................................................357
26.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................359
26.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................359
26.2 Modify Template (MOD MESSAGETEMPLATE).....................................................................................360
26.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................361
26.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................361
26.3 Delete Template (RMV MESSAGETEMPLATE)......................................................................................362
26.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................362

Copyright Huawei
26.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................362
27 Login Management.................................................................................................................364
27.1 User Login (LGI).........................................................................................................................................364
27.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................364
27.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................364
27.2 User Logout (LGO).....................................................................................................................................365
27.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................365
27.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................365
28 APN List Management...........................................................................................................366

28.1 Add APN List (ADD APNLIST).................................................................................................................366
28.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................366
28.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................367
28.2 Modify APN List (MOD APNLIST)...........................................................................................................367
28.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................367
28.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................368
28.3 Delete APN List (RMV APNLIST).............................................................................................................368
28.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................368
28.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................369
28.4 Add APN (ADD APN).................................................................................................................................369
28.4.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................370
28.4.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................370
28.5 Modify APN (MOD APN)...........................................................................................................................370
28.5.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................371
28.5.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................371
28.6 Delete APN (RMV APN).............................................................................................................................371

Copyright Huawei
28.6.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................372

28.6.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................372
29 Message Language Management.........................................................................................373

29.1 Add Message Language (ADD MESSAGELANGUAGE).........................................................................373
29.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................373
29.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................374
29.2 Modify Message Language (MOD MESSAGELANGUAGE)...................................................................374
29.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................375
29.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................375
29.3 Delete Message Language (RMV MESSAGELANGUAGE).....................................................................376
29.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................376
29.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................376
30 Redirection URL Management.............................................................................................377

30.1 Add Redirection URL (ADD REDIRECTIONURL)..................................................................................377
30.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................377
30.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................377
30.2 Delete Redirection URL (RMV REDIRECTIONURL)..............................................................................378
30.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................378
30.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................378
31 Holiday Define Management...............................................................................................380

31.1 Add Holiday Define (ADD HOLIDAY)......................................................................................................380
31.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................381
31.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................381
31.2 Modify Holiday Define (MOD HOLIDAY)................................................................................................382
31.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................383
31.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................383
31.3 Delete Holiday Define (RMV HOLIDAY)..................................................................................................383

Copyright Huawei

31.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................384
31.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................384
32 Service Map Management.....................................................................................................385

32.1 Add Service Map (ADD SRVMAP)............................................................................................................385
32.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................385
32.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................385
32.2 Delete Service Map (RMV SRVMAP)........................................................................................................386
32.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................386
32.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................386
33 ReservationPriority Map Management...............................................................................388

33.1 Add ReservationPriority Map (ADD RPMAP)...........................................................................................388
33.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................388
33.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................389
33.2 Modify ReservationPriority Map (MOD RPMAP).....................................................................................389
33.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................390
33.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................390
33.3 Delete ReservationPriority Map (RMV RPMAP).......................................................................................390
33.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................391
33.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................391
34 Quota Status Map Management...........................................................................................392

34.1 Add Quota Status Map (ADD QUOTASTATUSMAP)...............................................................................392
34.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................393
34.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................393
34.2 Modify Quota Status Map (MOD QUOTASTATUSMAP).........................................................................393
34.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................394

Copyright Huawei
34.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................394
34.3 Delete Quota Status Map (RMV QUOTASTATUSMAP)...........................................................................395
34.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................395
34.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................395
35 Subscriber Segment Management.......................................................................................397

35.1 Add Subscriber Segment (ADD SUBSEGMENT)......................................................................................397
35.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................397
35.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................398
35.2 Modify Subscriber Segment (MOD SUBSEGMENT)................................................................................398
35.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................399
35.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................399
35.3 Delete Subscriber Segment (RMV SUBSEGMENT)..................................................................................399
35.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................400
35.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................400
35.4 Add Number Prefix (ADD NUMBERPREFIX)..........................................................................................400
35.4.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................401
35.4.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................401
35.5 Delete Number Prefix (RMV NUMBERPREFIX)......................................................................................402
35.5.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................402
35.5.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................402
36 Pray Time Management............................................................................................................405

36.1 Add Pray Time (ADD PRAYTIME)............................................................................................................405
36.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................405
36.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................406
36.2 Delete Pray Time <RMV PRAYTIME>......................................................................................................406

Copyright Huawei
36.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................406

36.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................406
37 Customized Action Management.........................................................................................408

37.1 Add Enumeration (ADD CUSTOMENUM)...............................................................................................408
37.1.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................408
37.1.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................408
37.2 Delete Enumeraton (RMV CUSTOMENUM)............................................................................................409
37.2.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................409
37.2.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................409
37.3 Add Enumeration Member (ADD CUSTOMENUMELEM)......................................................................410
37.3.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................410
37.3.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................411
37.4 Delete Enumeration Member (RMV CUSTOMENUMELEM ).................................................................411
37.4.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................412
37.4.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................412
37.5 Add Action Dictionary (ADD CUSTOMACTIONDICT)...........................................................................413
37.5.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................413
37.5.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................413
37.6 Delete Action Dictionary (RMV CUSTOMACTIONDICT).......................................................................414
37.6.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................414
37.6.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................414
37.7 Add Action Element Dictionary (ADD CUSTOMACTIONELEMDICT).................................................415
37.7.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................416
37.7.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................417
37.8 Delete Action Element Dictionary (RMV CUSTOMACTIONELEMDICT).............................................417

Copyright Huawei
37.8.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................418

37.8.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................418
37.9 Add Action (ADD CUSTOMACTION)......................................................................................................419
37.9.3 Command Format...............................................................................................................................419
37.9.4 Result..................................................................................................................................................419
37.10 Delete Action (RMV CUSTOMACTION)................................................................................................420
37.10.1 Command Description......................................................................................................................420
37.10.2 Command Parameter........................................................................................................................420
37.10.3 Command Format.............................................................................................................................420
37.10.4 Result................................................................................................................................................420
37.11 Add Action Element (ADD CUSTOMACTIONELEM)...........................................................................421
37.11.3 Command Format.............................................................................................................................422
37.11.4 Result................................................................................................................................................422
37.12 Modify Action Element (MOD CUSTOMACTIONELEM).....................................................................423
37.12.3 Command Format.............................................................................................................................423
37.12.4 Result................................................................................................................................................424
37.13 Delete Action Element (RMV CUSTOMACTIONELEM).......................................................................424
Command Format..........................................................................................................................................425
37.13.3 Result................................................................................................................................................425
Acronyms and Abbreviations......................................................................................................426

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction DescriptionDescription
1 Description
1.1 CLI Interface Description

1.1.1 Concept of the CLI Interface
The CLI commands supported by the UPCC V300R006C01 are in the format of the string
command line, which consists of the command name, parameter name, and parameter value.
The following sections describe the commands in details.
Huawei UPCC (V300R006C01) provides the CLI client which is integrated with PMS
webUI.
1.1.2 Network connect

The integrated CLI client in UPCC webUI connects to service process unit throughput
internal port. To be compatible, UPCC also provides a permanent IP address and CLI service
port 7780 for the CLI client. UPCC support CLI client connects to the UPCC over TCP/IP. By
default, the port is closed.
The CLI client and the UPCC can be deployed in the same LAN or different LANs based on
actual requirements. When they are deployed in different LANs, at least one gateway must be
used to ensure normal connection between them.
Before the CLI client connects to the UPCC via CLI interface, the admin should execute
MOD PMGRPORT command to enable the port through OMU LMT. To protect the CLI
service against attacks and minimize adverse impact on services, the admin should configure
the access control list (ACL) based on the networking and link configuration through OMU
LMT. For example:
//Add an access control list (ACL) rule group
ADD ACLGRP: ACLGRPTYPE=AG, ACLGRPNUM=3000;
//Forbid all IP address access port 7780

ADD ACLRULE: ACLGRPTYPE=AG, ACLGRPNUM=3000, RULENUM=0, AA=DENY, IPV1=IPV4, LIPV4=[Local CLI
service IP address], LNETMASK=[Local CLI service IP network mask], PT=TCP, LOP=EQ, LPORT1=7780, PIPV4="0.0.0.0",
POP=RANGE;
//Permit the CLI client1 to access port 7780

ADD ACLRULE: ACLGRPTYPE=AG, ACLGRPNUM=3000, RULENUM=1, AA=PERMIT, IPV1=IPV4, LIPV4=[Local CLI
service IP address], LNETMASK=[Local CLI service IP network mask], PT=TCP, LOP=EQ, LPORT1=7780, PIPV4=[CLI client
IP address1], PNETMASK=[CLI client I1P network mask], POP=RANGE;
/Permit the CLI client2 to access port 7780

Copyright Huawei
ADD ACLRULE: ACLGRPTYPE=AG, ACLGRPNUM=3000, RULENUM=2, AA=PERMIT, IPV1=IPV4, LIPV4=[Local CLI

service IP address], LNETMASK=[Local CLI service IP network mask], PT=TCP, LOP=EQ, LPORT1=7780, PIPV4=[CLI client
IP address2], PNETMASK=[CLI client IP2 network mask], POP=RANGE;
//Add all the CLI client IP address to ACL rule group to permit the CLI client to access port 7780
//Apply the ACL rule group to the CLI service network card
ADD ACLFILTER: SRN=[UPPDU board1 subrack number], SN=[UPPDU board1 slot number], PORT=[CLI service network card
name], ACLGRPNUM=3000;
ADD ACLFILTER: SRN=[UPPDU board2 subrack number], SN=[UPPDU board2 slot number], PORT=[CLI service network card
name], ACLGRPNUM=3000;
1.1.3 Other
When CLI client connect to UPCC server, after TCP/IP three times handshakes, UPCC will
send a response message as RETCODE = 0 Operation is successful to the client if the
number of the CLI client is not exceed the system limitation. The figure is as follow:
If the number of the CLI client is exceed the system limitation, UPCC will send a response
message as RETCODE = 1062 Maximum clients are connected. No more connection after
TCP/IP three times handshakes.
1.1.4 Interface Authentication mechanism

This interface is using MML protocol. This interface can use username/password for
authentication.
1.2 MML Format Description

The command syntax of the MML is as follows:
Command Name: parameter 1 = parameter value 1, parameter 2 = parameter value 2, ;
For different commands, parameter names, number of parameters, and parameter types
are different.
The command name and the parameter are separated by a colon (:).
The parameters are separated by a comma (,).
The parameter name and the parameter value are separated by an equal sign (=).
The command line ends with a semicolon (;).

Copyright Huawei
For example, if you want to add a condition group with Condition Group Name set to abcd
and Description set to abcd Condition Group, run the following command:
ADD CONDITIONGROUP: CONDITIONGROUPNAME = "abcd", DESCRIPTION =
"abcd Condition Group";
The command name and the parameter name must be capitalized.

A command line must begin with the command name.
1.3 Data Type Definition

There are six types of parameters, including string/characters, hexstring, number, Boolean,
enumerated, and datetime.
1.3.1 String/Characters
The value of the parameter is a string of characters from A to Z, from a to z, from 0 to 9, or
other characters in the formats that the Windows operating system supports except for
symbols such as a colon (:), comma (,), equal sign (=), and semicolon (;).
Table 1.1 lists the characters that are not supported by the parameters of the string/characters
type.
Table 1.1 Unsupported characters

Index Character Name Character
FF (form feeding) \f
LF (line feed) \n
CR (carriage return) \r
HT (tab) \t
VT (home) \v
Comma ,
Less than <
More than >
Percentage %
Number sign #
Ampersand &
Plus sign +
Left square bracket [
Right square bracket ]
Semicolon ;

Copyright Huawei
Slash /
Equal sign =
Double quotation mark "
Single quotation mark '
Characters that is not allowed in 0x00 - 0x08,0x0b - 0x0c, and 0x0e - 0x1f
the XML specifications
1.3.2 HexString
The value of the parameter consists of digits from 0 to 9 and characters from a to f or A to F,
for example, 98AF.
1.3.3 Number
The value of the parameter is an Arabic number consisting of digits from 0 to 9.
1.3.4 Boolean
The value of the parameter is TRUE or FALSE.
1.3.5 Enumerated
The values of the parameter are enumerated names or values.
1.3.6 DateTime
The value of the parameter has the following three formats:
YYYY&MM&DD&HH&MM&SS, YYYY&MM&DD, and HH&MM&SS. Add a zero in
front of the month, day, hour, minute, or second if the month, day, hour, minute, or second is
a one-digit number. Values in the YYYY&MM&DD&HH&MM&SS, YYYY&MM&DD,
and HH&MM&SS format are strings of 19, 10, and 8 characters respectively.
1.4 MML Description Document

The description document of each MML command contains four parts:
Command Description
Command Parameter
Command Format
Result
1.4.1 Command Description

This part describes the function of a command.
1.4.2 Command Parameter

Table 1.2 describes the parameters of a command.

Copyright Huawei
Table 1.2 Command parameter

No. ID Name Description Data Type Value or Value Type
Range
No.: lists the sequence of parameters.

ID: lists the abbreviations for parameters.
Name: lists the names of parameters.
Description: describes the meanings of parameters.
Data Type: lists the type of parameters.
Value or Value Range
If the type of a parameter is Number, this column lists the value range of the
parameter. For example, 1-5 indicates that the value range is 1 to 5, but 2|10 indicates
that the valid value is 2 or 10.
If the type of a parameter is Enumerated type, this column lists all the enumerated
values.
If the type of a parameter is Time type, this column lists all time values.
If the type of a parameter is String/Characters or HexString, this column lists the
minimum and maximum length of the string. For example, 1-10 indicates that the
parameter value is a string of 1 to 10 characters.
Type: lists whether the parameter must be specified. M indicates that this parameter
must be specified. O indicates that this parameter can be specified or not. C indicates
that this parameter can be mandatory or optional depending on specific conditions.
1.4.3 Command Format

This part gives one or more examples of a command.
The command action is enclosed by [].
The parameter name is enclosed by {}, and the parameter value is enclosed by <>.
1.4.4 Result
The UPCC will return the output of each command after processing the command, no matter
whether the command execution succeeds or not. There are two types of execution results:
successful and failed.
If the operation is successful, code 0 is displayed:
If the operation is not successful, the related non-0 error code with error description is
displayed.

Copyright Huawei
1.5 Value Range

Table 1.3 Right value stipulation table
Left Object Attribute Right Value Stipulation
Type/Object Attribute
Name
UTF8String All characters are supported. The value length depends on the
length of the object attribute.
Enumerated The value depends on the enumerated values of the object
attribute.
Unsigned32 [0, 4294967295]
Integer32 [0, 2147483647]
Float32/Float64 [0, 10000000.0000], accurate to four digits after the decimal
point
IPv4Address The format is D.D.D.D [/MaskLength]. D is an 8-digit decimal
number. The value of MaskLength is less than or equal to 32.
IPv6Prefix The format is X:X:X:X:X:X:X:X [/PrefixLen]. X is a 16-digit
hexadecimal number. The value of PrefixLen is less than or
equal to128.
The X:X:X:X:X:X:D.D.D.D format with an IPv4 address
(D.D.D.D) inserted can also be used. X is a 16-digit
hexadecimal number, and D is an 8-digit decimal number.
One or any number of consecutive groups of 0 value may be
replaced with two colons (::). Therefore, the address
X:X:X:0:0:0:X:X can be further simplified and expressed as
X:X:X::X:X.
IPv6Address Same as IPv6Prefix
OctetString The value contains only numbers or characters A(a)-F(f). The
value length depends on the length of the object attribute.
DateTime abs|2011-06-15 00:00:00#2011-06-22 00:00:00
(System.DateTime) or
rel|year(*) mon(1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9:10:11:12)
date(1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9:10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17:18:19:20:21:22
:23:24:25:26:27:28:29:30:31) week(1:2:3:4:5:6:7)
starttime(03:32:00) last(12)
Note: Ranging from 1970-01-01 00:00:00 to 2037-12-31
23:59:59.
Format of last is HH:MM or HH.
Unit of HH is hour and range is from 0 to 24.
Unit of MM is minute and range is from 0 to 59.
When HH is 24, MM must be 0.
BearerRequestedQCI [1, 255]

Copyright Huawei
Left Object Attribute Right Value Stipulation

Type/Object Attribute
Name
ANGWAddress IPv4Address or IPv6Address
Table 1.4 Left value stipulation table
Left Object Value Range of Operation Right Value Type

Attribute Type
DateTime Equal Value

UTF8String Equal, Not Less Than, Not More Than, Value or Attribute
Not Equal, More Than, Less Than, and
Like
OctetString Equal, Not Less Than, Not More Than, Value or Attribute
Not Equal, More Than, Less Than, and
Like
Enumerated Equal, Not Less Than, Not More Than, Value or Attribute
Not Equal, More Than, and Less Than
Unsigned32 Equal, Not Less Than, Not More Than, Value or Attribute
Integer32 Equal, Not Less Than, Not More Than, Value or Attribute
Float32/Float64 Less Than, More Than, and Not Equal Value or Attribute
IPv4Address Equal, Not Less Than, Not More Than, Value or Attribute
Not Equal, More Than, Less Than, and In
SubNet
IPv6Prefix Equal, Not Less Than, Not More Than, Value or Attribute
Not Equal, More Than, Less Than, and In
SubNet
IPv6Address Equal, Not Equal, and In SubNet Value or Attribute
1.6 Heartbeat Mechanism

After the connection between the CLI client and server is established, the CLI client sends
SHK HAND to notify the CLI server that the connection is normal. Then, the CLI server
returns a response to the CLI client. If the CLI client does not receive the response from the
CLI server within 10 seconds, it determines that the CLI server is abnormal.
If the CLI server does not receive an MML command from the CLI client within 30 minutes,
the CLI server disconnects from the CLI client no matter whether the CLI client sends a
heartbeat command or how often the CLI client sends a heartbeat command.

Copyright Huawei

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Operation ListOperation List
2 Operation List
Table 1.5 Operation list

Operation Description Operation Type
ADD Add Add type

MOD Modify Modify type
RMV Delete Delete type

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Object ListObject List
3 Object List
3.1 Condition Group Management

Table 1.6 Condition group object list
Object Name Description
CONDITIONGROUP The operation object is Condition Group.

CONDITION The operation object is Condition in Condition Group.
3.2 Action Group Management

Table 1.7 Action group object list
ACTIONGROUP The operation object is Action Group.

QOSACTION The operation object is QoSAction of Action Group.
GATEACTION The operation object is GateAction of Action Group.
CHARGINGACTION The operation object is ChargingAction of Action Group.
REDIRECTION The operation object is Redirection of Action Group.
AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIER The operation object is AFChargingIdentifier of Action
Group.
AFMEDIAFLOWSNUMBER The operation object is AFMediaFlowsNumber of Action
Group.
USAGEREPORT The operation object is UsageReport of Action Group.
INDICATESERVICENAME The operation object is IndicateServiceName of Action
Group.

Copyright Huawei
RULETIMERANGE The operation object is RuleTimeRange of Action Group.

DEFAULTBEARERQOS The operation object is DefaultBearerQoS of Action
Group.
CMDCHARGINGACTION The operation object is CmdChargingAction of Action
Group.
FBBACTION The operation object is FBBAction of Action Group.
URLFILTERING The operation object is URLFILTERING of Action Group.
SCE The operation object is SCE of Action Group.
SCEPSINFORMATION The operation object is SCEPsInformation of Action
Group.
SERVICEFLOWDETECTIO The operation object is ServiceFlowDetection of Action
N Group.
CMDSUBPROFILEACTION The operation object is CmdSubProfileAction of Action
Group.
TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIF The operation object is TDFApplicationIdentifier of
IER Action Group.
MUTENOTIFICATION The operation object is MuteNotification of Action Group.
REDIRECTINFORMATION The operation object is RedirectInformation of Action
Group.
3.3 Service Flow Management

Table 1.8 Service flow object list
SERVICEFLOW The operation object is Service Flow.

FLOWFILTER The operation object is Flow Filter of Service Flow.
3.4 Notification Management

Table 1.9 Notification object list
NOTIFICATION The operation object is Notification.

Copyright Huawei
3.5 Rating Management

Table 1.10 Rating object list
RATING The operation object is Rating.
3.6 Rule Management

Table 1.11 Rule object list
RULE The operation object is Rule.

RULECONDITIONGRP The operation object is Condition Group of Rule.
3.7 Policy Management

Table 1.12 Policy object list
POLICY The operation object is Policy.

POLICYRULE The operation object is Rule of Policy.
POLICYTRIGGER The operation object is Trigger of Policy.
3.8 Service Provider Management

Table 1.13 Service provider object list
SP The operation object is Service Provider.
3.9 Quota Management

Table 1.14 Quota object list
QUOTA The operation object is Quota.

Copyright Huawei
3.10 Account Management

Table 1.15 Account object list
ACCOUNT The operation object is Account.
3.11 Accumulation Management

Table 1.16 Accumulation object list
ACCUMULATION The operation object is Accumulation.

ACCUMULATIONQUOTA The operation object is Quota of Accumulation.
3.12 Service Management

Table 1.17 Service object list
SERVICE The operation object is Service.

SERVICEPOLICY The operation object is Policy of Service.
SERVICEQUOTA The operation object is Quota of Service.
3.13 Service Package Management

Table 1.18 Service package object list
PACKAGE The operation object is Service Package.

PACKAGESERVICE The operation object is Service of Service Package.

Copyright Huawei
3.14 Mutex Group Management

Table 1.19 Mutex group object list
MUTEXGROUP The operation object is Mutex Group.

MUTEXSERVICE The operation object is Service of Mutex Group.
3.15 Application Service Mapping Management

Table 1.20 Application service mapping object list
APPLICATIONSERVICEMAPPING The operation object is Application Service

Mapping.
3.16 Domain Management

Table 1.21 Domain object list
DOMAIN The operation object is Domain.

DOMAINSERVICE The operation object is Service of Domain.
DOMAINPACKAGE The operation object is Package of Domain.
3.17 Charging Server Group Management

Table 1.22 Charging server group object list
CHARGINGSERVERGROUP The operation object is Charging Server Group.

CHARGINGSERVER The operation object is Charging Server.

Copyright Huawei
3.18 Subscriber Group Management

Table 1.23 Subscriber group object list
SUBSCRIBERGROUP The operation object is Subscriber Group.

SUBSCRIBERGROUPSERVICE The operation object is Service of
Subscriber Group.
SUBSCRIBERGROUPCONDITIONGROUP The operation object is Condition Group of
Subscriber Group.
3.19 Terminal Type Management

Table 1.24 Terminal type object list
TERMINALTYPE The operation object is Terminal Type.

TERMINAL The operation object is Terminal of Terminal Type.
3.20 Roam Region Management

Table 1.25 Roam region object list
ROAMREGION The operation object is Roam Region.

ROAMREGIONPLMN The operation object is PLMN of Roam Region.
3.21 PLMN Management

Table 1.26 PLMN object list
PLMN The operation object is PLMN.

PLMNSGSN The operation object is SGSN of PLMN.
PLMNANGW The operation object is ANGW of PLMN.

Copyright Huawei
3.22 Service Zone Management

Table 1.27 Service zone object list
SERVICEZONE The operation object is Service Zone.

SERVICEZONEAREA The operation object is Area of Service Zone.
3.23 Message/Email Template Management

Table 1.28 Message/Email template object list
MESSAGETEMPLATE The operation object is Message Template.
3.24 APN List Management

Table 1.29 APN list object list
APNLIST The operation object is APN List.

APN The operation object is APN.
3.25 Message Language Management

Table 1.30 Message language object list
MESSAGELANGUAGE The operation object is Message Language.

Copyright Huawei
3.26 Redirection URL Management

Table 1.31 Redirection URL object list
REDIRECTIONURL The operation object is Redirection URL.
3.27 Service Map Management

Table 1.32 Service Map object list
SRVMAP The operation object is Service Map.
3.28 ReservationPriority Map Management

Table 1.33 ReservationPriority Map object list
RPMAP The operation object is ReservationPriority Map.
3.29 Pray Time Management

Table 1.34 Pray Time object list
PRAYTIME The operation object is Pray Time

Copyright Huawei
3.30 Customized Action Management

Table 1.35 Customized object list
CUSTOMENUM The operation object is the enumerations of the

customized action element dictionary.
CUSTOMENUMELEM The operation object is the enumeration members of the
customized action element dictionary.
CUSTOMACTIONDICT The operation object is the customized action dictionary.
CUSTOMACTIONELEMDICT The operation object is the customized action element
dictionary.
CUSTOMACTION The operation object is the customized action.
CUSTOMACTIONELEM The operation object is the customized action element.

Copyright Huawei
Condition Group ManagementCondition Group
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Management
4 Condition Group Management
4.1 Add Condition Group (ADD CONDITIONGROUP)

ADD CONDITIONGROUP is used to add a condition group.

No. ID Name Description Data Type Value or Type
Value
Range
1. CONDITIONGROUPNAME Condition This parameter String 1-32 M

Group specifies the name of
Name a condition group.
2. DESCRIPTION Description This parameter String 1-256 O
provides additional
information about the
condition group.
3. RELATION Relation The relation of Enumerated AND O
condition group OR
element
Default
value: AND
Condition Group Name cannot be the same as an existing condition group name.
A maximum of 3,072 condition groups and 3,072 conditions can be configured in the system. Each
condition group can be configured with a maximum of 16 conditions.

[ADD]

Copyright Huawei
CONDITIONGROUP:
{CONDITIONGROUPNAME } = <Condition Group Name>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <Description>,
{RELATION} = <Relation>;
Example:
ADD CONDITIONGROUP: CONDITIONGROUPNAME = "abcd", DESCRIPTION =
"abcd Condition Group." ,RELATION=AND;
4.1.4 Result
A code is returned, indicating the operation result.
If the operation is successful, the following code is displayed:
0: Operation is successful
If the operation is not successful, one of the following error codes may be displayed:
5002: Flow control enabled
8195: Database error
8201: Invalid parameter
8204: The number of records exceeds the maximum value
12440: The condition group already exists
94209: Processing timeout
94210: PAU system processing failed
94271: Operator not logged in
4.2 Modify Condition Group (MOD

CONDITIONGROUP)
MOD CONDITIONGROUP is used to modify a condition group.

Value
Range

Group Name specifies the name of
a condition group to
be modified.

Copyright Huawei

provides additional
condition group.
3. RELATION Relation The relation of Enumerated AND O
condition group OR
element
Default
value:
AND
Condition Group Name must be the same as an existing condition group name.

[MOD]
CONDITIONGROUP:
{CONDITIONGROUPNAME} = <Condition Group Name>,
{RELATION} = <Relation>;
Example:
MOD CONDITIONGROUP: CONDITIONGROUPNAME = "abcd",
DESCRIPTION = "abcd Condition Group." ,RELATION=AND;
4.2.4 Result
12441: The condition group does not exist

Copyright Huawei
4.3 Delete Condition Group (RMV CONDITIONGROUP)

RMV CONDITIONGROUP is used to delete a condition group.

No. ID Name Description Data Value or Type
Type Value
Range
1. CONDITIONGROUPNAME Condition This parameter specifies String 1-32 M

Group Name the name of a condition
group to be deleted.
Condition Group Name must be an existing condition group name.

[RMV]
CONDITIONGROUP:
{CONDITIONGROUPNAME} = <Condition Group Name>;
Example:
RMV CONDITIONGROUP: CONDITIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";
4.3.4 Result
12448: The condition group is associated with a rule
94511:The condition group is associated with a subscriber group

Copyright Huawei
4.4 Add Condition (ADD CONDITION)

ADD CONDITION is used to add a condition to a condition group.

Range
1. CONDITIONG Condition This parameter String 1-32 M

ROUPNAME Group Name specifies the name of
a condition group.
2. CONDITIONN Condition This parameter String 1-32 M
AME Name specifies the name of
a condition.
3. OBJECTATTRI Object This parameter String 1-65 M
BUTE Attribute specifies the attribute
of an object involved
in the condition.
4. OBJECTINSTA Object This parameter String 1-32 C
NCE Instance specifies the object
instance associated
with a condition. The
parameter is valid
only when Object is
set to Quota or
Accumulation.
5. OPERATOR Operator This parameter Enumerated Equal M
specifies the operation Not Less Than
type of a condition.
Not More Than
Not Equal
More Than
Less Than
Like
In SubNet
Exist
Not Exist
6. RIGHTVALUE Right Value This parameter Enumerated Value M
TYPE Type specifies the type of a Attribute
right value.

Copyright Huawei

Range
7. RIGHTVALUE Right Value This parameter String 1-256 C

specifies the right
value. The parameter
must be specified if
Right Value Type is
set to Value. The right
value varies according
to the value of Data
Type provided in
Object Attribute.
8. RIGHTOBJECT Right Object This parameter String 1-65 C
ATTRIBUTE Attribute specifies the right
value attribute of an
object. The parameter
Right Value Type is
set to Attribute.
provides additional
condition.
Condition Group Name must be the same as an existing condition group name. Condition Name
cannot be the same as an existing condition name.
A maximum of 3,072 condition groups and 3,072 conditions can be configured in the system.
Each condition group can be configured with a maximum of 16 conditions.

[ADD]
CONDITION:
{CONDITIONNAME} = <Condition Name>,
{OBJECTATTRIBUTE} = <Object Attribute>,
{OBJECTINSTANCE} = <Object Instance>,
{OPERATOR} = <Operator>,
{RIGHTVALUETYPE} = <Right Value Type>,
{RIGHTVALUE} = <Right Value>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <Description>;
Or:

Copyright Huawei
[ADD]
CONDITION:
{OBJECTATTRIBUTE} = <Object Attribute >,
{RIGHTOBJECTATTRIBUTE} = <Right Object Attribute>,
{DESCRIPTION} = < Description>;
Example:
ADD CONDITION: CONDITIONGROUPNAME = "abcd", CONDITIONNAME =
"condition", OBJECTATTRIBUTE = "Quota.QuotaStatus", OBJECTINSTANCE = "quota",
OPERATOR = Equal, RIGHTVALUETYPE = Value, RIGHTVALUE = "Level1",
DESCRIPTION = "abcd quota condition.";
ADD CONDITION: CONDITIONGROUPNAME = "abcd", CONDITIONNAME =
"condition1", OBJECTATTRIBUTE = "Subscriber.MSISDN", OPERATOR = Equal,
RIGHTVALUETYPE = Attribute, RIGHTOBJECTATTRIBUTE= "IPSession.MSISDN";
4.4.4 Result
12431: The object attribute dictionary does not exist
12486: The number of conditions in the condition group exceeds the maximum value
(16)
12503: The number of conditions exceeds the maximum value
94226: The condition already exists
94228: The object instance does not exist
94333: The source PCEF does not exist

Copyright Huawei
94519:The condition group is associated with a subscriber group and the element
conflict.
12457: The objectattribute dos not exist
4.5 Modify Condition (MOD CONDITION)

MOD CONDITION is used to modify a condition of a condition group.

Range
1. CONDITIONGRO Condition This parameter String 1-32 M

UPNAME Group specifies the name of
Name a condition group.
2. CONDITIONNA Condition This parameter String 1-32 M
ME Name specifies the name of
a condition to be
modified.
3. OBJECTATTRIB Object This parameter String 1-65 C
UTE Attribute specifies the attribute
of an object involved
in the condition.
4. OBJECTINSTAN Object This parameter String 1-32 C
CE Instance specifies the object
instance associated
with a condition. The
parameter must be
specified if Object is
set to Quota or
Accumulation.
5. OPERATOR Operator This parameter Enumerated Equal C
specifies the operation Not Less Than
type of a condition.
Not More Than
Not Equal
More Than
Less Than
Like
In SubNet
Exist
Not Exist

Copyright Huawei

Range
6. RIGHTVALUETY Right Value This parameter Enumerated Value C

PE Type specifies the type of a Attribute
right value.
7. RIGHTVALUE Right Value This parameter String 1-256 C
specifies the right
value. The parameter
Right Value Type is
set to Value. The right
value varies according
to the value of Data
Type provided in
Object Attribute.
8. RIGHTOBJECTA Right This parameter String 1-65 C
TTRIBUTE Object specifies the right
Attribute value attribute of an
object. The parameter
Right Value Type is
set to Attribute.
provides additional
condition.
Object Attribute and Object Instance must exist in the system.
If Object Attribute is specified, Operator and Right Value Type must be specified, and Right
Value and Right Object Attribute are specified according to the value of Right Value Type.

[MOD]
CONDITION:
{RIGHTVALUE} = <Right Value>,

Copyright Huawei
Or:
[MOD]
CONDITION:
{RIGHTOBJECTATTRIBUTE} = <Right Object Attribute>,
Example:
MOD CONDITION: CONDITIONGROUPNAME = "abcd", CONDITIONNAME =
"condition", OBJECTATTRIBUTE = "Quota.QuotaStatus", OBJECTINSTANCE = "quota",
OPERATOR = Equal, RIGHTVALUETYPE = Value, RIGHTVALUE = "Level2",
DESCRIPTION = "abcd quota condition.";
MOD CONDITION: CONDITIONGROUPNAME = "abcd", CONDITIONNAME =
"condition1", OBJECTATTRIBUTE = "Subscriber.MSISDN", OPERATOR = Equal,
RIGHTVALUETYPE = Value, RIGHTVALUE = "123456789123456", DESCRIPTION =
"abcd quota condition.";
4.5.4 Result
12442: The condition does not exist
94333: The source PCEF does not exist

Copyright Huawei
94519:The condition group is associated with a subscriber group and the element conflict
4.6 Delete Condition (RMV CONDITION)

RMV CONDITION is used to delete a condition from a condition group.

Type Value
Range
1. CONDITIONGROUPNAME Condition This parameter specifies String 1-32 M

Group Name the name of a condition
group.
2. CONDITIONNAME Condition This parameter specifies String 1-32 M
Name the name of a condition
to be deleted.

[RMV]
CONDITION:
{CONDITIONNAME} = <Condition Name>;
Example:
RMV CONDITION: CONDITIONGROUPNAME = "abcd", CONDITIONNAME =
"condition";
4.6.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

12442: The condition does not exist

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Action Group ManagementAction Group Management
5 Action Group Management
5.1 Add Action Group (ADD ACTIONGROUP)

ADD ACTIONGROUP is used to add an action group.

Value
Range
1. ACTIONGROUPNAME Action This parameter specifies String 1-32 M

Group the name of an action
Name group.
2. DESCRIPTION Description This parameter provides String 1-256 O

additional information
about the action group.
Action Group Name cannot be the same as an existing action group name.
A maximum of 1,024 action groups and 3,072 actions can be configured in the system. Each
action group can be configured with a maximum of 64 actions.
Different action groups can be configured with the same actions.

[ADD]
ACTIONGROUP:
{ACTIONGROUPNAME} = <Action Group Name>,

Copyright Huawei
Example:
ADD ACTIONGROUP: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd", DESCRIPTION = "abcd Action
Group.";
5.1.4 Result
8196: The name already exists
12451: The action group already exists
5.2 Modify Action Group (MOD ACTIONGROUP)

MOD ACTIONGROUP is used to modify an action group.

Value
Range
1. ACTIONGROUPNAME Action This parameter identifies String 1-32 M

Group an action group to be
Name modified.
about the action group.

Copyright Huawei
Action Group Name must be the same as an existing action group name. Action Group Name cannot be
modified but Description can be modified.

[MOD]
ACTIONGROUP:
Example:
MOD ACTIONGROUP: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd", DESCRIPTION = "abc Action
Group";
5.2.4 Result
12452: The action group does not exist
5.3 Delete Action Group (RMV ACTIONGROUP)

RMV ACTIONGROUP is used to delete an action group.

Type Value
Range
1. ACTIONGROUPNAME Action This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

Group name of an action group to be
Name deleted.

Copyright Huawei
Action Group Name must be the same as an existing action group name.

[RMV]
ACTIONGROUP:
{ACTIONGROUPNAME} = <Action Group Name>;
Example:
RMV ACTIONGROUP: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";
5.3.4 Result
12453: The action group cannot be deleted because it is associated with a rule
5.4 Add QoS Action (ADD QOSACTION)

ADD QOSACTION is used to add a QoS action to an action group.

No ID Name Description Data Type Value or Value Type
. Range
1. ACTIONGROU Action Group This parameter specifies String 1-32 M

PNAME Name the name of an action
group.

Copyright Huawei

. Range
2. PREEMPTION Preemption This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O

VULNERABILI Vulnerability the value type of Object
TYTYPE Type Preemption Attribute
Vulnerability Value.
3. PREEMPTION Preemption This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
VULNERABILI Vulnerability whether a service data
TYVALUE Value flow can lose the
resources assigned in
order to admit a service
data flow with higher
priority level.
4. PREEMPTIONC Preemption This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
APABILITYTY Capability the value type of Object
PE Type Preemption Capability Attribute
Value.
5. PREEMPTIONC Preemption This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
APABILITYVA Capability whether a service data
LUE Value flow can get resources
that were already
assigned to another
service data flow with a
lower priority level.
6. ARPLEVELTYP ARP Level This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
E Type the value type of ARP Object
Level Value. Attribute
7. ARPLEVELVAL ARP Level This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
UE Value the priority of allocation
and retention.
8. GBRULTYPE GBRUL Type This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
the value type of Object
GBRUL Value. Attribute
9. GBRULVALUE GBRUL This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
Value the guaranteed uplink
bandwidth.
10. GBRDLTYPE GBRDL Type This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
GBRDL Value. Attribute
11. GBRDLVALUE GBRDL This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
Value the guaranteed downlink
bandwidth.
12. MBRULTYPE MBRUL This parameter specifies Enumerated Value M
Type the value type of Object
MBRUL Value. Attribute

Copyright Huawei

. Range
13. MBRULVALUE MBRUL This parameter specifies String 1-65 M

Value the maximum uplink
bandwidth.
14. MBRDLTYPE MBRDL This parameter specifies Enumerated Value M
MBRDL Value. Attribute
15. MBRDLVALUE MBRDL This parameter specifies String 1-65 M
Value the maximum downlink
bandwidth.
16. QCITYPE QCI Type This parameter specifies Enumerated Value M
the value type of QCI Object
Value. Attribute
17. QCIVALUE QCI Value This parameter specifies String 1-65 M
the QoS class.
The action group and actions have been configured. Action Name cannot be the same as an existing
action name.
A maximum of 1,024 action groups and 3,072 actions can be configured in the system. Each action
group can be configured with a maximum of 64 actions.
The element type and element value must be both specified, for example, QCI Type and QCI
Value.
The default description of QoSAction is "To set the QoS policy as a default action and can not be
deleted or configured.".
If Value Type is set to Value, the value range of the parameters is as follows:
Preemption Vulnerability Value can be set to Enabled or Disabled.
Preemption Capability Value can be set to Enabled or Disabled.
The value of ARP Level Value ranges from 1 to 15.
The value of GBRUL Value ranges from 0 to 4294967 (unit: kbit/s).
The value of GBRDL Value ranges from 0 to 4294967 (unit: kbit/s).
The value of MBRUL Value ranges from 0 to 4294967 (unit: kbit/s).
The value of MBRDL Value ranges from 0 to 4294967 (unit: kbit/s).
The value of QCI Value ranges from 1 to 255.

Copyright Huawei
If MBRUL Value and GBRUL Value are both specified, the value of MBRUL Value must be
greater than that of GBRUL Value. If MBRDL Value and GBRDL Value are both specified, the
value of MBRDL Value must be greater than that of GBRDL Value.
If Value Type is set to Object Attribute, the data type of the value must be the same as that of the
action element.
If an optional parameter is not specified in the command, this parameter must be set to a default
value. The default value of Preemption Vulnerability Value is Enabled. The default value of
Preemption Capability Value is Disabled. The default value of GBRUL Value or GBRDL Value
is blank.

[ADD]
QOSACTION:
{MBRULTYPE} = <MBRUL Type>,
{MBRULVALUE} = <MBRUL Value>,
{MBRDLTYPE} = <MBRDL Type>,
{MBRDLVALUE} = <MBRDL Value>,
{QCITYPE} = <QCI Type>,
{QCIVALUE} = <QCI Value>;
Example:
ADD QOSACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc", MBRULTYPE = Value,
MBRULVALUE = "1024", MBRDLTYPE = Value, MBRDLVALUE = "1024",
QCITYPE=Value, QCIVALUE = "9";
5.4.4 Result
12312: Incorrect action attribute
12434: The action element dictionary does not exist
12454: The action already exists
12487: The number of actions in the action group exceeds the maximum value

Copyright Huawei

94257: The QCI value must between 1-255
94258: The value range is 0 to 4294967 for MBRUL, MBRDL, GBRUL, GBRDL,
AMBRUL, and AMBRDL
94259: GBRUL should not bigger than MBRUL and GBRDL should not bigger than
MBRDL
94260: The ARPLevel value must between 1-15
5.5 Modify QoS Action (MOD QOSACTION)

MOD QOSACTION is used to modify information about a QoS action.

Value Range
1. ACTIONGRO Action Group This parameter specifies String 1-32 M

UPNAME Name the name of an action
group.
VULNERABIL Vulnerability the value type of Object
ITYTYPE Type Preemption Attribute
Vulnerability Value.
VULNERABIL Vulnerability whether a service data
ITYVALUE Value flow can lose the
resources assigned in
order to admit a service
data flow with higher
priority level.
CAPABILITY Capability Type the value type of Object
TYPE Preemption Capability Attribute
Value.
CAPABILITY Capability Value whether a service data
VALUE flow can get resources
that were already
assigned to another

Copyright Huawei

Value Range
6. ARPLEVELTY ARP Level Type This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O

PE the value type of ARP Object
7. ARPLEVELVA ARP Level Value This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
LUE the priority of allocation
and retention.
8. GBRULTYPE GBRUL Type This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
GBRUL Value. Attribute
9. GBRULVALU GBRUL Value This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
E the guaranteed uplink
bandwidth.
10. GBRDLTYPE GBRDL Type This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
GBRDL Value. Attribute
11. GBRDLVALU GBRDL Value This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
E the guaranteed downlink
bandwidth.
12. MBRULTYPE MBRUL Type This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
MBRUL Value. Attribute
13. MBRULVALU MBRUL Value This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
E the maximum uplink
bandwidth.
14. MBRDLTYPE MBRDL Type This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
MBRDL Value. Attribute
15. MBRDLVALU MBRDL Value This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
E the maximum downlink
bandwidth.
16. QCITYPE QCI Type This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
Value. Attribute
17. QCIVALUE QCI Value This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
the QoS class.

Copyright Huawei
The action group and actions have been configured. Action Name must be the same as an existing
action name in the action group.
The value type and the value must be both specified.

[MOD]
QOSACTION:
{PREEMPTIONVULNERABILITYTYPE} = <Preemption Vulnerability Type>,
{PREEMPTIONVULNERABILITYVALUE} = <Preemption Vulnerability Value>;
Example:
MOD QOSACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc",
PREEMPTIONVULNERABILITYTYPE = Value,
PREEMPTIONVULNERABILITYVALUE = "Enabled", ARPLEVELTYPE = Value,
ARPLEVELVALUE = "2";
5.5.4 Result
12455: The action does not exist
AMBRUL, and AMBRDL
94259: GBRUL should not bigger than MBRUL and GBRDL should not bigger than
MBRDL
94260: The ARPLevel value must between 1-15

Copyright Huawei
5.6 Delete QoS Action (RMV QOSACTION)

RMV QOSACTION is used to delete a QoS action from an action group.

Type Value
Range

Group name of an action group.
Name

RMV QOSACTION: {ACTIONGROUPNAME} = <Action Group Name>;
Example:
RMV QOSACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";
5.6.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
5.7 Add Gate Action (ADD GATEACTION)

ADD GATEACTION is used to add a Gate action to an action group.

Value
Range

Name group.
2. FLOWSTATUSTYPE Flow This parameter specifies Enumerated Value M
Status the value type of Flow Object
Type Status Value. Attribute
3. FLOWSTATUSVALUE Flow This parameter specifies String 1-65 M
Status whether a service flow is
Value allowed.
The default description of GateAction is "To set the gating policy as a default action and can not be
deleted or configured.".
If Value Type is set to Value, the value range of Flow Status Value is as follows: Enable Uplink,
Enable Downlink, Enabled, or Disabled.
action element.

[ADD]
GATEACTION:
{FLOWSTATUSTYPE} = <Flow Status Type>,
{FLOWSTATUSVALUE} = <Flow Status Value>;
Example:

Copyright Huawei
ADD GATEACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME ="abc", FLOWSTATUSTYPE=Value,

FLOWSTATUSVALUE="Enable Uplink";
5.7.4 Result
5.8 Modify Gate Action (MOD GATEACTION)

MOD GATEACTION is used to modify information about a Gate action.

Value
Range

Name group.
2. FLOWSTATUSTYPE Flow This parameter specifies Enumerated Value M
Status the value type of Flow Object
Type Status Value. Attribut
e

Copyright Huawei
3. FLOWSTATUSVALUE Flow This parameter specifies String 1-65 M

Status whether a service flow is
Value allowed.

[MOD]
GATEACTION:
{FLOWSTATUSTYPE} = <Flow Status Type>,
{FLOWSTATUSVALUE} = <Flow Status Value>;
Example:
MOD GATEACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc", FLOWSTATUSTYPE = Value,
FLOWSTATUSVALUE = "Enable Downlink";
5.8.4 Result
12455: The action does not exist.

Copyright Huawei
5.9 Delete Gate Action (RMV GATEACTION)

RMV GATEACTION is used to delete the Gate action from an action group.

Type Value
Range

Name

RMV GATEACTION: {ACTIONGROUPNAME} = <Action Group Name >;
Example:
RMV GATEACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";
5.9.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
5.10 Add Charging Action (ADD CHARGINGACTION)

ADD CHARGINGACTION is used to add a Charging action for an action group.

Value
Range
1. ACTIONGROU Action This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

PNAME Group name of an action group.
Name
2. OFFLINETYPE Offline This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value O
Type value type of Offline Value. Object
Attribute
3. OFFLINEVALU Offline This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
E Value whether offline charging is
enabled.
4. ONLINETYPE Online Type This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value O

value type of Online Value. Object
Attribute
5. ONLINEVALUE Online This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
Value whether online charging is
enabled.
6. METERINGME Metering This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value O
THODTYPE Method value type of Metering Object
Type Method Value. Attribute
7. METERINGME Metering This parameter specifies the String 1-65 C
THODVALUE Method charging method.
Value
8. RATINGGROUP Rating This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value M
TYPE Group Type value type of Rating Group Object
Value. Attribute
9. RATINGGROUP Rating This parameter specifies the String 1-65 M
VALUE Group rating group ID.
Value
10. SERVICEIDENT Service This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value O
IFIERTYPE Identifier value type of Service Object
Type Identifier Value. Attribute

Copyright Huawei

Value
Range
11. SERVICEIDENT Service This parameter specifies a String 1-65 C

IFIERVALUE Identifier type of services.
Value
12. REPORTINGLE Reporting This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value O
VELTYPE Level Type value type of Reporting Object
13. REPORTINGLE Reporting This parameter specifies the String 1-65 C
VELVALUE Level Value reporting level.
14. CHARGINGCO Charging This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value O

RRELATIONIN Correlation value type of Charging Object
DICATORTYPE Indicator Correlation Indicator Attribute
Type Value.
15. CHARGINGCO Charging This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
RRELATIONIN Correlation whether the PCEF reports
DICATORVALU Indicator the charging PCRF.
E Value
The action group and actions have been configured. Action Name cannot be the same as an
existing action name in the action group.
The default description of ChargingAction is "To set the charging action as a default action and
can not be deleted or configured.".
Offline Value can be set to DisableOffline, EnableOffline, or Null.
Online Value can be set to DisableOnline, EnableOnline, or Null.
Metering Method Value can be set to Duration, Volume, DurationVolume, or Nocharging.
Reporting Level Value can be set to Service Identifier Level or Rating Group Level.
Charging Correlation Indicator Value can be set to Charging Identifier Required or Null.
action element.
value. Metering Method Value can be set to Duration. Reporting Level Value can be set to
Service Identifier Level. The default value of Offline Value, Online Value, or Charging
Correlation Indicator Value is blank.

[ADD]

Copyright Huawei
CHARGINGACTION:
{RATINGGROUPTYPE} = <Rating Group Type>,
{RATINGGROUPVALUE} = <Rating Group Value>,
{SERVICEIDENTIFIERTYPE} = <Service Identifier Type>,
{SERVICEIDENTIFIERVALUE} = <Service Identifier Value>;
Example:
ADD CHARGINGACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc", RATINGGROUPTYPE =
Value, RATINGGROUPVALUE = "10", SERVICEIDENTIFIERTYPE = Value,
SERVICEIDENTIFIERVALUE = "1";
5.10.4 Result
5.11 Modify Charging Action (MOD

CHARGINGACTION)
MOD CHARGINGACTION is used to modify information about a Charging action.

Copyright Huawei

Value
Range
1. ACTIONGRO Action This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

UPNAME Group name of an action group.
Name
2. OFFLINETYP Offline This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value O
E Type value type of Offline Value. Object
Attribute
3. OFFLINEVAL Offline This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
UE Value whether offline charging is
enabled.
4. ONLINETYPE Online Type This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value O
value type of Online Value. Object
Attribute
5. ONLINEVALU Online This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
E Value whether online charging is
enabled.
6. METERINGM Metering This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value O
ETHODTYPE Method value type of Metering Object
Type Method Value. Attribute
7. METERINGM Metering This parameter specifies the String 1-65 C
ETHODVALU Method charging method.
E Value
8. RATINGGRO Rating This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value O
UPTYPE Group Type value type of Rating Group Object
Value. Attribute
9. RATINGGRO Rating This parameter specifies the String 1-65 C
UPVALUE Group rating group ID.
Value
10. SERVICEIDE Service This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value O
NTIFIERTYPE Identifier value type of Service Object
Type Identifier Value. Attribute
11. SERVICEIDE Service This parameter specifies a String 1-65 C
NTIFIERVAL Identifier type of services, such as
UE Value stream media, FTP, or IMS
session.
12. REPORTINGL Reporting This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value O
EVELTYPE Level Type value type of Reporting Object

Copyright Huawei

Value
Range
13. REPORTINGL Reporting This parameter specifies the String 1-65 C

EVELVALUE Level Value reporting level.
14. CHARGINGC Charging This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value O
ORRELATION Correlation value type of Charging Object
INDICATORT Indicator Correlation Indicator Attribute
YPE Type Value.
15. CHARGINGC Charging This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
ORRELATION Correlation whether the PCEF reports
INDICATORV Indicator the charging information to
ALUE Value the PCRF.

[MOD]
CHARGINGACTION:
{METERINGMETHODTYPE} = <Metering Method Type>,
{METERINGMETHODVALUE} = <Metering Method Value>,
{RATINGGROUPTYPE} = <Rating Group Type>,
{RATINGGROUPVALUE} = <Rating Group Value>,
{SERVICEIDENTIFIERTYPE} = <Service Identifier Type>,
{SERVICEIDENTIFIERVALUE} = <Service Identifier Value>,
{REPORTINGLEVELTYPE} = <Charging Correlation Indicator Type>,
{REPORTINGLEVELVALUE} = <Charging Correlation Indicator Value>;
Example:
MOD CHARGINGACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc",METERINGMETHODTYPE
= Value, METERINGMETHODVALUE = "Duration", RATINGGROUPTYPE = Value,
RATINGGROUPVALUE = "1", SERVICEIDENTIFIERTYPE = Value,
SERVICEIDENTIFIERVALUE = "1", REPORTINGLEVELTYPE = Value,
REPORTINGLEVELVALUE = "Service Identifier Level";
5.11.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

5.12 Delete Charging Action (RMV CHARGINGACTION)

RMV CHARGINGACTION is used to delete a Charging action from an action group.

Type Value
Range

Name

RMV CHARGINGACTION: {ACTIONGROUPNAME} = < Action Group Name >;
Example:
RMV CHARGINGACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";
5.12.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

5.13 Add Redirection Action (ADD REDIRECTION)

ADD REDIRECTION is used to add a redirection action for an action group.

Value Range
1. ACTIONGRO Action Group This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

UPNAME Name name of an action group.
2. REDIRECTA Redirect This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value O
DDRESSTYP Address Type value type of Redirect Object
ETYPE Type Address Type Value. Attribute
3. REDIRECTA Redirect This parameter specifies the String 1-65 C
DDRESSTYP Address Type type of the IP address of the
EVALUE Value redirected server.
4. REDIRECTSE Redirect This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value M

RVERADDRE Server value type of Redirect Server Object
SSTYPE Address Type Address Value. Attribute
5. REDIRECTSE Redirect This parameter specifies the IP String 1-127 M

RVERADDRE Server address of a redirected server.
SSVALUE Address
Value
6. ONESHOTRE Oneshot This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value O

DIRECTIONT Redirection value type of Oneshot Object
YPE Type Redirection Value. Attribute

Copyright Huawei

Value Range
7. ONESHOTRE Oneshot This parameter specifies String 1-65 C

DIRECTIONV Redirection whether only one redirection is
ALUE Value allowed.
8. REDIRECTTI Redirect This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value O

MESTYPE Times Type value type of Redirect Times Object
Value. Attribute
9. REDIRECTTI Redirect This parameter specifies the String 1-65 C

MESVALUE Times Value times of redirection.
10. REDIRECTRE Redirect This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value O

PORTTYPE Report Type value type of Redirect Report Object
Value. Attribute
11. REDIRECTRE Redirect This parameter specifies String 1-65 C

PORTVALUE Report Value whether need redirection
report.
The default description of Redirection is"To set the redirection-related parameters as a default
action and can not be deleted or configured."
Redirect Address Type Value can be set to IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, URL, or SIP URIS.
The value of Redirect Server Address Value is in dotted decimal format.
Oneshot Redirection Value can be set to Enable, Disable, or Null.
Redirect Times Value can be 1 to 255.
Redirect Report Value can be Null, Enable or Disable.
action element.
value. The default value of Redirect Address Type Value is IPv4 Address.

Copyright Huawei

[ADD]
REDIRECTION:
{REDIRECTADDRESSTYPETYPE} = <Redirect Address Type Type>,
{REDIRECTADDRESSTYPEVALUE} = <Redirect Address Type Value>,
{REDIRECTSERVERADDRESSTYPE} = <Redirect Server Address Type>,
{REDIRECTSERVERADDRESSVALUE} = <Redirect Server Address Value>,
{ONESHOTREDIRECTIONTYPE} = <Oneshot Redirection Type>,
{ONESHOTREDIRECTIONVALUE} = <Oneshot Redirection Value>,
{ REDIRECTTIMESTYPE } = <Redirect Times Type>,
{ REDIRECTTIMESVALUE } = <Redirect Times Value>,
{ REDIRECTREPORTTYPE } = <Redirect Report Type>,
{ REDIRECTREPORTVALUE } = <Redirect Report Value>;
Example:
ADD REDIRECTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "11", REDIRECTADDRESSTYPETYPE
= Value, REDIRECTADDRESSTYPEVALUE = "IPv4 Address",
REDIRECTSERVERADDRESSTYPE = Value, REDIRECTSERVERADDRESSVALUE =
"10.85.169.12", ONESHOTREDIRECTIONTYPE = Value,
ONESHOTREDIRECTIONVALUE = "Disable", REDIRECTREPORTTYPE=value,
REDIRECTREPORTVALUE="Enable";
5.13.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

5.14 Modify Redirection Action (MOD REDIRECTION)

MOD REDIRECTION is used to modify information about a redirection action.

Value
Range
1. ACTIONGROUP Action Group This parameter specifies String 1-32 M

NAME Name the name of an action
group.
2. REDIRECTADDR Redirect This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
ESSTYPETYPE Address Type the value type of Object
Type Redirect Address Type Attribute
Value.
3. REDIRECTADDR Redirect This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
ESSTYPEVALUE Address Type the type of the IP address
Value of the redirected server.
4. REDIRECTSERV RedirectServe This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
ERADDRESSTYP rAddressType the value type of Object
E Redirect Server Attribute
Address Value.
5. REDIRECTSERV Redirect This parameter specifies String 1-127 C
ERADDRESSVA Server the IP address of a
LUE Address redirected server.
Value
6. ONESHOTREDIR Oneshot This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
ECTIONTYPE Redirection the value type of Object
Type Oneshot Redirection Attribute
Value.
7. ONESHOTREDIR Oneshot This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
ECTIONVALUE Redirection whether only one
Value redirection is allowed.
8. REDIRECTTIME Redirect This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
STYPE Times Type the value type of Object
Redirect Times Value. Attribute

Copyright Huawei

Value
Range
9. REDIRECTTIME Redirect This parameter specifies String 1-65 C

SVALUE Times Value the times of redirection.
10. REDIRECTREPO Redirect This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
RTTYPE Report Type the value type of Object
Redirect Report Value. Attribute
11. REDIRECTREPO Redirect This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
RTVALUE Report Value whether need redirection
report.

[MOD]
REDIRECTION:
{REDIRECTADDRESSTYPETYPE} = <Redirect Address Type Type>,
{REDIRECTADDRESSTYPEVALUE} = <Redirect Address Type Value>,
{REDIRECTSERVERADDRESSTYPE} = <Redirect Server Address Type>,
{REDIRECTSERVERADDRESSVALUE} = <Redirect Server Address Value>,
{ONESHOTREDIRECTIONTYPE} = <Oneshot Redirection Type>,
{ONESHOTREDIRECTIONVALUE} = <Oneshot Redirection Value>,
{ REDIRECTTIMESTYPE } = <Redirect Times Type>,
{ REDIRECTTIMESVALUE } = <Redirect Times Value>,
{ REDIRECTREPORTTYPE } = <Redirect Report Type>,
{ REDIRECTREPORTVALUE } = <Redirect Report Value>;
Example:
MOD REDIRECTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "11", REDIRECTADDRESSTYPETYPE
= Value, REDIRECTADDRESSTYPEVALUE = "IPv4 Address",
REDIRECTSERVERADDRESSTYPE = Value, REDIRECTSERVERADDRESSVALUE =
"10.85.169.12", ONESHOTREDIRECTIONTYPE = Value,
ONESHOTREDIRECTIONVALUE = "Disable", REDIRECTREPORTTYPE=value,
REDIRECTREPORTVALUE="Enable";

Copyright Huawei
5.14.4 Result
5.15 Delete Redirection Action (RMV REDIRECTION)

RMV REDIRECTION is used to delete a redirection action from an action group.

Type Value
Range

Name

RMV REDIRECTION: {ACTIONGROUPNAME} = < Action Group Name>;
Example:
RMV REDIRECTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";

Copyright Huawei
5.15.4 Result
5.16 Add AFChargingIdentifier Action (ADD

AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIER)
ADD AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIER is used to add an AFChargingIdentifier action to an
action group.

Value Range

2. AFCHARGIN AF Charging This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value M
GIDENTIFIER Identifier Type value type of AF Charging Object
TYPE Identifier Value. Attribute
3. AFCHARGIN AF Charging This parameter specifies the String 1-65 M
GIDENTIFIER Identifier Value charging identifier generated
VALUE by the application layer.

Copyright Huawei
The default description of AFChargingIdentifier is "To set the charging identifier of the application
layer as a default action and can not be deleted or configured."

[ADD]
AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIER:
{AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIERTYPE} = <AF Charging Identifier Type>,
{AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIERVALUE} = <AF Charging Identifier Value>;
Example:
ADD AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIER: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc",
AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIERTYPE = Value, AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIERVALUE = "123";
5.16.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
5.17 Modify AFChargingIdentifier Action (MOD

MOD AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIER is used to modify information about an
AFChargingIdentifier action.

Value
Range
1. ACTIONGROU Action Group Name This parameter String 1-32 M

PNAME specifies the name of an
action group.
2. AFCHARGINGI AF Charging This parameter Enumerated Value O
DENTIFIERTYP Identifier Type specifies the value type Object
E of AF Charging Attribute
Identifier Value.
3. AFCHARGINGI AF Charging This parameter String 1-65 C
DENTIFIERVAL Identifier Value specifies the charging
UE identifier generated by
the application layer.

[MOD]
AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIER:
{AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIERTYPE} = <AFChargingIdentifierType>,
{AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIERVALUE} = <AFChargingIdentifierValue>;
Example:
MOD AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIER: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc",
AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIERTYPE = Value, AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIERVALUE = "456";
5.17.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

12452: The action group does not exist.
12455: The action does not exist.
5.18 Delete AFChargingIdentifier Action (RMV

RMV AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIER is used to delete the AFChargingIdentifier action from
an action group.

Type Value
Range
1 ACTIONGROUPNAME Action This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

Name

RMV AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIER: {ACTIONGROUPNAME} = <Action Group Name>;
Example:
RMV AFCHARGINGIDENTIFIER: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";

Copyright Huawei
5.18.4 Result
5.19 Add AFMediaFlowsNumber Action (ADD

AFMEDIAFLOWSNUMBER)
ADD AFMEDIAFLOWSNUMBER is used to add an AFMediaFlowsNumber action to an
action group.

Value
Range

group.
2. MEDIACOMPON Media This parameter specifies Enumerated Value M
ENTNUMBERTY Component the value type of Media Object
PE Number Type Component Number Attribute
Value.
3. MEDIACOMPON Media This parameter identifies a String 1-65 M
ENTNUMBERVA Component media component at the
LUE Number Value application layer.
4. FLOWNUMBER Flow Number This parameter specifies Enumerated Value, O

TYPE Type the value type of Flow Object
Number Value. Attribute

Copyright Huawei
5. FLOWNUMBER Flow Number This parameter specifies a String 1-65 C

VALUE Value media flow in a session.
action name.
The default description of AFMediaFlowsNumber is "To set the media flow identifier of the
application layer as a default action and can not be deleted or configured."
The value of Media Component Number Value ranges from 0 to 4294967295.
The value of Flow Number Value ranges from 0 to 4294967295.
action element.

[ADD]
AFMEDIAFLOWSNUMBER:
{MEDIACOMPONENTNUMBERTYPE} = <Media Component Number Type>,
{MEDIACOMPONENTNUMBERVALUE} = <Media Component Number Value>,
{FLOWNUMBERTYPE} = <Flow Number Type>,
{FLOWNUMBERVALUE} = < Flow Number Value>;
Example:
ADD AFMEDIAFLOWSNUMBER: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc",
MEDIACOMPONENTNUMBERTYPE = Value, MEDIACOMPONENTNUMBERVALUE
= "123", FLOWNUMBERTYPE = Value, FLOWNUMBERVALUE = "456";
5.19.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

5.20 Modify AFMediaFlowsNumber Action (MOD

AFMEDIAFLOWSNUMBER)
MOD AFMEDIAFLOWSNUMBER is used to modify information about an
AFMediaFlowsNumber action.

Value Range
1. ACTIONGROUP Action Group This parameter String 1-32 M

NAME Name specifies the name of an
action group.
2. MEDIACOMPON Media This parameter Enumerated Value O
ENTNUMBERTY Component specifies the value type Object
PE Number Type of Media Component Attribute
Number Value.
3. MEDIACOMPON Media This parameter String 1-65 C
ENTNUMBERVA Component identifies a media
LUE Number Value component at the
application layer.
4. FLOWNUMBERT Flow Number This parameter Enumerated Value O
YPE Type specifies the value type Object
of Flow Number Attribute
Value.
5. FLOWNUMBERV Flow Number This parameter String 1-65 C
ALUE Value specifies a media flow
in a session.

Copyright Huawei

[MOD]
AFMEDIAFLOWSNUMBER:
{MEDIACOMPONENTNUMBERTYPE} = <Media Component Number Type>,
{MEDIACOMPONENTNUMBERVALUE} = <Media Component Number Value>,
{FLOWNUMBERTYPE} = <Flow Number Type>,
{FLOWNUMBERVALUE} = <Flow Number Value>;
Example:
MOD AFMEDIAFLOWSNUMBER: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc",
MEDIACOMPONENTNUMBERTYPE = Value, MEDIACOMPONENTNUMBERVALUE
= "100", FLOWNUMBERTYPE = Value, FLOWNUMBERVALUE = "200";
5.20.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
5.21 Delete AFMediaFlowsNumber Action (RMV

AFMEDIAFLOWSNUMBER)
RMV AFMEDIAFLOWSNUMBER is used to delete the AFMediaFlowsNumber action
from an action group.

Type Value
Range

Name

RMV AFMEDIAFLOWSNUMBER: {ACTIONGROUPNAME} = <Action Group Name>;
Example:
RMV AFMEDIAFLOWSNUMBER: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";
5.21.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
5.22 Add UsageReport Action (ADD USAGEREPORT)

ADD USAGEREPORT is used to add a UsageReport action to an action group.

Value
Range

Name group.
2. MONITORKEYTYPE Monitor This parameter specifies Enumerated Value M
Key Type the value type of Object
Monitor Key Value. Attribut
e
3. MONITORKEYVALUE Monitor This parameter specifies String 1-65 M
Key Value a quota.
The default description of UsageReport is "To set the monitor key as a default action and can not be
deleted or configured."

[ADD]
USAGEREPORT:
{MONITORKEYTYPE} = <Monitor Key Type>,
{MONITORKEYVALUE} = <Monitor Key Value>;
Example:
ADD USAGEREPORT: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc", MONITORKEYTYPE = Value,
MONITORKEYVALUE = "123";
5.22.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

5.23 Modify UsageReport Action (MOD USAGEREPORT)

MOD USAGEREPORT is used to modify information about a UsageReportAction.

Value
Range

Name group.
2. MONITORKEYTYPE Monitor This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
Key Type the value type of Object
Monitor Key Value. Attribut
e
3. MONITORKEYVALUE Monitor This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
Key Value a quota.

Copyright Huawei

[MOD]
USAGEREPORT:
{MONITORKEYTYPE} = <Monitor Key Type>,
{MONITORKEYVALUE} = <Monitor Key Value>;
Example:
MOD USAGEREPORT: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc", MONITORKEYTYPE = Value,
MONITORKEYVALUE = "456";
5.23.4 Result
5.24 Delete UsageReportAction (RMV USAGEREPORT)

RMV USAGEREPORT is used to delete a UsageReport action from an action group.

Copyright Huawei

Type Value
Range

Name

RMV USAGEREPORT: {ACTIONGROUPNAME} = <Action Group Name>;
Example:
RMV USAGEREPORT: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";
5.24.4 Result
5.25 Add IndicateServiceNameAction (ADD

INDICATESERVICENAME)
ADD INDICATESERVICENAME is used to add an IndicateServiceName action to an
action group.

Copyright Huawei

Value Range
1. ACTIONGROU Action Group This parameter specifies String 1-32 M

PNAME Name the name of an action
group.
2. SERVICENAM Service Name This parameter specifies Enumerated Value M
ETYPE Type the value type of Service Object
Name Value. Attribute
3. SERVICENAM Service Name This parameter specifies String 1-65 M
EVALUE Value the name of a service.
action name in the action group. One action group can be configured with a maximum of 10
IndicateServiceName actions.
The default description of IndicateServiceName is "To set the service name as a default action and
can not be deleted or configured."
action element.

[ADD]
INDICATESERVICENAME:
{SERVICENAMETYPE} = <Service Name Type>,
{SERVICENAMEVALUE} = <Service Name Value>;
Example:
ADD INDICATESERVICENAME: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc",
SERVICENAMETYPE = Value, SERVICENAMEVALUE = "s1";
5.25.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

94329: The number of IndicateServiceName action in the action group exceeds the
maximum value (10)
5.26 Modify IndicateServiceName Action (MOD

MOD INDICATESERVICENAME is used to modify information about an
IndicateServiceName action.

Value Range

group.
2. SERVICENAME Service Name This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
TYPE Type the value type of Object
Service Name Value. Attribute
3. SERVICENAME Service Name This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
VALUE Value the name of a service.

Copyright Huawei
If the number of IndicateServiceName Action in the action group is more than one, it cannot be
modified, and will return error "94552: More than one IndicateServiceName Action exist".

[MOD]
INDICATESERVICENAME:
{SERVICENAMETYPE} = <Service Name Type>,
{SERVICENAMEVALUE} = <Service Name Value>;
Example:
MOD INDICATESERVICENAME: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc",
SERVICENAMETYPE = Value, SERVICENAMEVALUE = "s2";
5.26.4 Result
94552: More than one IndicateServiceName Action exist

Copyright Huawei
5.27 Delete IndicateServiceName Action (RMV

RMV INDICATESERVICENAME is used to delete all IndicateServiceName actions from
an action group.

Type Value
Range

Name

RMV INDICATESERVICENAME: {ACTIONGROUPNAME} = <Action Group Name>;
Example:
RMV INDICATESERVICENAME: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";
5.27.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
5.28 Add RuleTimeRange Action (ADD

RULETIMERANGE)
ADD RULETIMERANGE is used to add a RuleTimeRange action to an action group.

Value Range

group.
2. ACTIVATIONTI Activation This parameter specifies Enumerated Value M
METYPE Time Type the value type of Object
Activation Time Value. Attribute
3. ACTIVATIONTI Activation This parameter specifies String 1-65 M
MEVALUE Time Value the time when a rule is
activated.
4. DEACTIVATION Deactivation This parameter specifies Enumerated Value M

TIMETYPE Time Type the value type of Object
Deactivation Time Attribute
Value.
5. DEACTIVATION Deactivation This parameter specifies String 1-65 M

TIMEVALUE Time Value the time when a rule is
deactivated.

Copyright Huawei
If Activation Time Type or Deactivation Time Type is set to Value, the value is in
YYYY&MM&DD&HH&MM&SS format. For example, if a rule is activated at 01:01:01 on 2011-
06-24, the value is in "2011&06&04&01&01&01" format.
The default description of RuleTimeRange is "To set the Activation-Time and the Deactivation-Time
for the Rule as a default action and cannot be deleted or configured.".
The activation time must be earlier than the deactivation time.
action element.

[ADD]
RULETIMERANGE:
{ACTIVATIONTIMETYPE} = <Activation Time Type>,
{ACTIVATIONTIMEVALUE} = <Activation Time Value >,
{DEACTIVATIONTIMETYPE} = <Deactivation Time Type>,
{DEACTIVATIONTIMEVALUE} = <Deactivation Time Value>;
Example:
ADD RULETIMERANGE: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc", ACTIVATIONTIMETYPE =
Value, ACTIVATIONTIMEVALUE = "2011&07&20&00&00&00",
DEACTIVATIONTIMETYPE = Value, DEACTIVATIONTIMEVALUE =
"2011&07&25&00&00&00";
5.28.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

5.29 Modify RuleTimeRange Action (MOD

RULETIMERANGE)
MOD RULETIMERANGE is used to modify information about a RuleTimeRange action.

Value Range

group.
2. ACTIVATIONTI Activation This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
METYPE Time Type the value type of Object
ActivationTime. Attribute
3. ACTIVATIONTI Activation This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
MEVALUE Time Value the time when a rule is
activated.
4. DEACTIVATION Deactivation This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
TIMETYPE Time Type the value type of Object
Deactivation Time Attribute
Value.
5. DEACTIVATION Deactivation This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
TIMEVALUE Time Value the time when a rule is
deactivated.

Copyright Huawei
If Activation Time Type or Deactivation Time Type is set to Value, the value is in
YYYY&MM&DD&HH&MM&SS format. For example, if a rule is activated at 01:01:01 on 2011-
06-24, the value is in "2011&06&04&01&01&01" format.

[MOD]
RULETIMERANGE:
{ACTIVATIONTIMETYPE} = <Activation Time Type>,
{ACTIVATIONTIMEVALUE} = <Activation Time Value>,
{DEACTIVATIONTIMETYPE} = <Deactivation Time Type>,
{DEACTIVATIONTIMEVALUE} = <Deactivation Time Value>;
Example:
MOD RULETIMERANGE: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc", ACTIVATIONTIMETYPE =
Value, ACTIVATIONTIMEVALUE = "2011&07&20&00&00&00",
DEACTIVATIONTIMETYPE = Value, DEACTIVATIONTIMEVALUE =
"2011&07&25&00&00&00";
5.29.4 Result
94262: The DeactivationTime cannot be earlier than (or equal to) the ActivationTime

Copyright Huawei
5.30 Delete RuleTimeRange Action (RMV

RULETIMERANGE)
RMV RULETIMERANGE is used to delete a RuleTimeRange action from an action group.

Type Value
Range

Name
Action Group Name must be the sane as an existing action group name.

RMV RULETIMERANGE: {ACTIONGROUPNAME} = <Action Group Name>;
Example:
RMV RULETIMERANGE: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";
5.30.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
5.31 Add DefaultBearerQoS Action (ADD

DEFAULTBEARERQOS)
ADD DEFAULTBEARERQOS is used to add a DefaultBearerQoS action to an action
group.

Value Range

2. QCITYPE QCI Type This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value M
value type of QCI Value. Object
Attribute
3. QCIVALUE QCI Value This parameter specifies the String 1-65 M
QoS class.
4. ARPLEVELT ARP Level This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value M

YPE Type value type of ARP Level Object
Value. Attribute
5. ARPLEVELV ARP Level This parameter specifies the String 1-65 M

ALUE Value priority of allocation and
retention.
6. PREEMPTIO Preemption This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value O

NCAPABILIT Capability value type of Preemption Object
YTYPE Type Capability Value. Attribute
7. PREEMPTIO Preemption This parameter specifies String 1-65 C

NCAPABILIT Capability whether a service data flow
YVALUE Value can get resources that were
already assigned to another
service data flow with a lower
priority level.
8. PREEMPTIO Preemption This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value O
NVULNERAB Vulnerability value type of Preemption Object
ILITYTYPE Type Vulnerability Value. Attribute

Copyright Huawei

Value Range
9. PREEMPTIO Preemption This parameter specifies String 1-65 C

NVULNERAB Vulnerability whether a service data flow
ILITYVALUE Value can lose the resources assigned
in order to admit a service data
flow with higher priority level.
10. AMBRDLTYP AMBRDL This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value M
E Type value type of AMBRDL Object
Value. Attribute
11. AMBRDLVAL AMBRDL This parameter specifies the String 1-65 M

UE Value maximum downlink
bandwidth.
12. AMBRULTYP AMBRUL This parameter specifies the Enumerated Value M

E Type value type of AMBRUL Object
Value. Attribute
13. AMBRULVAL AMBRUL This parameter specifies the String 1-65 M

UE Value maximum uplink bandwidth.
The default description of DefaultBearerQoS is "To set the QoS for EPS default Bearer and APN-
AMBR as a default action and cannot be deleted or configured.".
The value of ARP Level Value ranges from 1 to 15.
Preemption Capability Value can be set to Enabled or Disabled.
Preemption Vulnerability Value can be set to Enabled or Disabled.
The value of AMBRDL Value ranges from 0 to 4294967 (unit: kbit/s).
The value of AMBRUL Value ranges from 0 to 4294967 (unit: kbit/s).
The value of QCI Value ranges from 1 to 255.
action element.

[ADD]

Copyright Huawei
DEFAULTBEARERQOS:
{QCITYPE} = < QCI Type>,
{QCIVALUE} = < QCI Value>,
{ARPLEVELTYPE} = <ARP Level Type>,
{ARPLEVELVALUE} = <ARP Level Value>,
{PREEMPTIONCAPABILITYTYPE} = <Preemption Capability Type>,
{PREEMPTIONCAPABILITYVALUE} = <Preemption Capability Value>,
{PREEMPTIONVULNERABILITYVALUE} = <Preemption Vulnerability Value>,
{AMBRDLTYPE} = <AMBRDL Type>,
{AMBRDLVALUE} = <AMBRDL Value>,
{AMBRULTYPE} = <AMBRUL Type>,
{AMBRULVALUE} = <AMBRUL Value>;
Example:
ADD DEFAULTBEARERQOS: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd", QCITYPE = Value,
QCIVALUE = "5", ARPLEVELTYPE = Value, ARPLEVELVALUE = "1",
PREEMPTIONCAPABILITYTYPE = Value, PREEMPTIONCAPABILITYVALUE =
"Disabled", PREEMPTIONVULNERABILITYTYPE = Value,
PREEMPTIONVULNERABILITYVALUE = "Enabled", AMBRDLTYPE = Value,
AMBRDLVALUE = "200", AMBRULTYPE = Value, AMBRULVALUE = "100";
5.31.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

94260: The ARPLevel value must between [1-15]
5.32 Modify DefaultBearerQoS Action (MOD

DEFAULTBEARERQOS)
MOD DEFAULTBEARERQOS is used to modify information about a DefaultBearerQoS
action.

Value
Range

group.
2. QCITYPE QCI Type This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
Value. Attribute
3. QCIVALUE QCI Value This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
the QoS class.
4. ARPLEVELTYPE ARP Level This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
Type the value type of ARP Object
5. ARPLEVELVALU ARP Level This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
E Value the priority of allocation
and retention.
6. PREEMPTIONCA Preemption This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
PABILITYTYPE Capability the value type of Object
Type Preemption Capability Attribute
Value.
7. PREEMPTIONCA Preemption This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
PABILITYVALUE Capability whether a service data flow
Value can get resources that were
already assigned to another

Copyright Huawei

Value
Range
8. PREEMPTIONVU Preemption This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O

LNERABILITYT Vulnerability the value type of Object
YPE Type Preemption Vulnerability Attribute
Value.
9. PREEMPTIONVU Preemption This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
LNERABILITYV Vulnerability whether a service data flow
ALUE Value can lose the resources
assigned in order to admit a
service data flow with
higher priority level.
10. AMBRDLTYPE AMBRDL This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
AMBRDL Value. Attribute
11. AMBRDLVALUE AMBRDL This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
Value the maximum downlink
bandwidth.
12. AMBRULTYPE AMBRUL This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
AMBRUL Value. Attribute
13. AMBRULVALUE AMBRUL This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
Value the maximum uplink
bandwidth.

[MOD]
DEFAULTBEARERQOS:
{QCITYPE} = <QCI Type>,
{QCIVALUE} = <QCI Value>,
{ARPLEVELTYPE} = <ARP Level Type>,
{ARPLEVELVALUE} = <ARP Level Value>,
{PREEMPTIONCAPABILITYTYPE} = <Preemption Capability Type>,
{PREEMPTIONCAPABILITYVALUE} = <Preemption Capability Value>,

Copyright Huawei

{PREEMPTIONVULNERABILITYVALUE} = <Preemption Vulnerability Value>,
{AMBRDLTYPE} = <AMBRDL Type>,
{AMBRDLVALUE} = <AMBRDL Value>,
{AMBRULTYPE} = <AMBRUL Type>,
{AMBRULVALUE} = <AMBRUL Value>;
Example:
MOD DEFAULTBEARERQOS: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc", QCITYPE = Value,
QCIVALUE = "5", ARPLEVELTYPE = Value, ARPLEVELVALUE = "1",
PREEMPTIONCAPABILITYTYPE = Value, PREEMPTIONCAPABILITYVALUE =
"Disabled", PREEMPTIONVULNERABILITYTYPE = Value,
PREEMPTIONVULNERABILITYVALUE = "Enabled", AMBRDLTYPE = Value,
AMBRDLVALUE = "200", AMBRULTYPE = Value, AMBRULVALUE = "100";
5.32.4 Result
AMBRUL, and AMBRDL
94260: The ARPLevel value must between [1-15]

Copyright Huawei
5.33 Delete DefaultBearerQoS Action (RMV

DEFAULTBEARERQOS)
RMV DEFAULTBEARERQOS is used to delete a DefaultBearerQoS action from an action
group.

Type Value
Range

Name
Action Group Name must be the sane as an existing action group name.

RMV DEFAULTBEARERQOS: {ACTIONGROUPNAME} = <Action Group Name>;
Example:
RMV DEFAULTBEARERQOS: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";
5.33.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
5.34 Add CmdChargingAction Action (ADD

CMDCHARGINGACTION)
ADD CMDCHARGINGACTION is used to add a CmdChargingAction action to an action
group.

Value Range

group.
2. OFFLINETYPE Offline Type This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
the value type of Offline Object
Value. Attribute
3. OFFLINEVALUE Offline Value This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
whether offline charging is
enabled.
4. ONLINETYPE Online Type This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O

the value type of Online Object
Value. Attribute
5. ONLINEVALUE Online Value This parameter specifies String 1-65 C

whether online charging is
enabled.
existing action name.
The element type and element value must be both specified.
The default description of CmdChargingAction is "To set the CmdChargingAction as a default
action and cannot be deleted or configured.".
Offline Value can be set to DisableOffline, EnableOffline, or Null.
Online Value can be set to DisableOnline, EnableOnline, or Null.

Copyright Huawei
action element.
value. The default value of Offline Value or Online Value is blank.

[ADD]
CMDCHARGINGACTION:
{ ACTIONGROUPNAME } = < Action Group Name>,
{ OFFLINETYPE } = <Offline Type>,
{ OFFLINEVALUE } = <Offline Value>,
{ ONLINETYPE } = <Online Type>,
{ ONLINEVALUE } = <Online Value>;
Example:
ADD CMDCHARGINGACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc", OFFLINETYPE =
Value, OFFLINEVALUE = "EnableOffline", ONLINETYPE = Value, ONLINEVALUE =
"DisableOnline";
5.34.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
5.35 Modify CmdChargingAction Action <MOD

CMDCHARGINGACTION >
MOD CMDCHARGINGACTION is used to modify information about a
CmdChargingAction action.

No ID Name Description Data Type Value or Type
. Value
Range

Name group.
2. OFFLINETYPE Offline This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
Type the value type of Offline Object
Value. Attribut
e
3. OFFLINEVALUE Offline This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
Value whether offline charging
is enabled.
4. ONLINETYPE Online This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O

Type the value type of Online Object
Value. Attribut
e
5. ONLINEVALUE Online This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
Value whether online charging
is enabled.

[MOD]
CMDCHARGINGACTION:
{ACTIONGROUPNAME } = < Action Group Name >,
{ OFFLINETYPE } = <Offline Type>,

Copyright Huawei
{ OFFLINEVALUE } = <Offline Value>,

{ ONLINETYPE } = <Online Type>,
{ ONLINEVALUE } = <Online Value>;
Example:
MOD CMDCHARGINGACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc", OFFLINETYPE =
Value, OFFLINEVALUE = "EnableOffline", ONLINETYPE = Value, ONLINEVALUE =
"DisableOnline";
5.35.4 Result
5.36 Delete CmdChargingAction Action <RMV

CMDCHARGINGACTION >
RMV CMDCHARGINGACTION is used to delete a CmdChargingAction action from an
action group.

Type Value
Range

Name

Copyright Huawei
Action Group Name must be the same as an existing action name.

RMV FBBACTION: { ACTIONGROUPNAME } = < Action Group Name >;
Example:
RMV FBBACTION:ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";
5.36.4 Result
5.37 Add FBBAction Action <ADD FBBACTION>

ADD FBBACTION is used to add an FBBAction action for an action group.

Value Range

group.
2. FBBSERVICETY FBB Service This parameter specifies Enumerated Value M
PE Type the value type of FBB Object
Service Type Value. Attribute
3. FBBSERVICETY FBB Service This parameter specifies String 1-65 M
PEVALUE Type Value the FBB service.

Copyright Huawei
4. MSGRPNAMET MSGRP This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O

YPE Name Type the value type of MSGRP Object
Name Value. Attribute
5. MSGRPNAMEV MSGRP This parameter specifies String 1-65 C

ALUE Name Value the name of an MS group.
6. ACLGRPNAMET ACLGRP This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O

YPE Name Type the value type of Object
ACLGRP Name Value. Attribute
7. ACLGRPNAMEV ACLGRP This parameter specifies String 1-65 C

ALUE Name Value the name of an ACL group.
8. INTERIMINTER Interim This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O

VALTYPE Interval Type the value type of Interim Object
Interval Value. Attribute
9. INTERIMINTER Interim This parameter specifies String 1-65 C

VALVALUE Interval Value the interim interval.
The default description of FBBAction is "To set the FBB policy as a default action and cannot be
deleted or configured."
FBB Service Type value can be set to BOD, DPI, or DAA.
The value of Interim Interval Value ranges from 0 to 3292100.
The value of MSGRP Name Value ranges from 1 to 31.
The value of ACLGRP Name Value ranges from 1 to 31.
action element.

[ADD]
FBBACTION:

Copyright Huawei
{ ACTIONGROUPNAME } = < ACTIONGROUPNAME >,

{ FBBSERVICETYPE } = < FBB Service Type>,
{ FBBSERVICETYPEVALUE } = < FBB Service Type Value>,
{ MSGRPNAMETYPE } = <MSGRP Name Type>,
{ MSGRPNAMEVALUE } = <MSGRP Name Value>,
{ ACLGRPNAMETYPE } = <ACLGRP Name Type>,
{ ACLGRPNAMEVALUE } = < ACLGRP Name Value>
{ INTERIMINTERVALTYPE } = <Interim Interval Type>,
{ INTERIMINTERVALVALUE } = < Interim Interval Value >;
Example:
ADD FBBACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME ="abc", FBBSERVICETYPE =Value,
FBBSERVICETYPEVALUE ="BOD", MSGRPNAMETYPE =Value,
MSGRPNAMEVALUE ="test";
5.37.4 Result
94325: FBB Service type must be DPI, BOD, or DAA
94326: The INTERIMINTERVALVALUE value must between 0-3932100
94327: FBB group name length is invalid

Copyright Huawei
5.38 Modify FBBAction Action <MOD FBBACTION >

MOD FBBACTION is used to modify information about an FBBAction action.

Value Range
1. ACTIONGROUPN Action Group This parameter specifies String 1-32 M

AME Name the name of an action
group.
2. FBBSERVICETYP FBB Service This parameter specifies Enumerated Value, O
E Type the value type of FBB Object
Service Type Value. Attribute
3. FBBSERVICETYP FBB Service This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
EVALUE value the FBB Service type.
4. MSGRPNAMETYP MSGRP This parameter specifies Enumerated Value, O

E Name Type the value type of Object
MSGRP Name Value. Attribute
5. MSGRPNAMEVAL MSGRP This parameter specifies String 1-65 C

UE Name Value the name of an MS
group.
6. ACLGRPNAMETY ACLGRP This parameter specifies Enumerated Value, O

PE Name Type the value type of Object
ACLGRP Name Value. Attribute
7. ACLGRPNAMEVA ACLGRP This parameter specifies String 1-65 C

LUE Name Value the name of an ACL
group.
8. INTERIMINTERV Interim This parameter specifies Enumerated Value, O

ALTYPE Interval Type the value type of Interim Object
Interval Value. Attribute
9. INTERIMINTERV Interim This parameter specifies String 1-65 C

ALVALUE Interval Value the Interim interval.

Copyright Huawei
FBB Service Type value can be set to BOD, DPI, or DAA.
The value of Interim Interval Value ranges from 0 to 3292100.
The value of MSGRP Name Value ranges from 1 to 31.
The value of ACLGRP Name Value ranges from 1 to 31.
action element.

[MOD]
FBBACTION:
{ ACTIONGROUPNAME } = < Action Group Name >,
{ FBBSERVICETYPE } = < FBB Service Type>,
{ FBBSERVICETYPEVALUE } = < FBB Service Type Value>,
{ MSGRPNAMETYPE } = <MSGRP Name Type>,
{ MSGRPNAMEVALUE } = < MSGRP Name Value>,
{ ACLGRPNAMETYPE } = <ACLGRP Name Type>,
{ ACLGRPNAMEVALUE } = <ACLGRP Name Value>
{ INTERIMINTERVALTYPE } = <Interim Interval Type>,
{ INTERIMINTERVALVALUE } = < Interim Interval Value >;
Example:
MOD FBBACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc", MSGRPNAMETYPE = Value,
MSGRPNAMEVALUE = "TEST";
5.38.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

94325: FBB Service type must be DPI, BOD, or DAA
94326: The INTERIMINTERVALVALUE value must be between 0 and 3932100
94327: FBB group name length is invalid
5.39 Delete FBBAction Action <RMV FBBACTION >

RMV FBBACTION is used to delete an FBBAction action from an action group.

No ID Name Description Data Value or Type
. Type Value
Range

Name
Action Group Name must be the same as an existing action name.

RMV FBBACTION: { ACTIONGROUPNAME } = < Action Group Name >;
Example:
RMV FBBACTION:ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";
5.39.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

5.40 Add URLFILTERING Action <ADD URLFILTERING

>
ADD URLFILTERING is used to add an URLFILTERING action for an action group.

Value Range

group.
2. URLFILTERING URL Filtering This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O
SWITCHTYPE Switch Type the value type of URL Object
Filtering Switch Value. Attribute
3. URLFILTERING URL Filtering This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
SWITCH Switch the URL Filtering Switch.
4. URLFILTERING URL Filtering This parameter specifies Enumerated Value O

NAMETYPE Name Type the value type of URL Object
Filtering Name Value. Attribute
5. URLFILTERING URL Filtering This parameter specifies String 1-31 C

NAME Name the URL Filtering name.

Copyright Huawei
The default description of URLFiltering action is "To set the URLFiltering as a default action and
cannot be deleted or configured.".
If the value of URLFILTERINGSWITCH parameters is Enabled, the URLFILTERINGNAME
cannot be configured.
URL Filtering Switch can be set to Null or Enabled.
URL Filtering Name can be set to a string of up to 31 characters.
action element.

[ADD]
URLFILTERING:
{ ACTIONGROUPNAME } = < ACTIONGROUPNAME >,
{ URLFILTERINGSWITCHTYPE } = < URL Filtering Switch Type>,
{ URLFILTERINGSWITCH } = < URL Filtering Switch>,
{ URLFILTERINGNAMETYPE } = < URL Filtering Name Type>,
{ URLFILTERINGNAME} = < URL Filtering Name>,
Example:
ADD URLFILTERING: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc", URLFILTERINGSWITCHTYPE
= value, URLFILTERINGSWITCH = " Enabled ";
ADD URLFILTERING: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc", URLFILTERINGNAMETYPE =
value, URLFILTERINGNAME = " template_1 ";
5.40.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

94551: The URLFilteringSwitch and URLFilteringName configuration conflicts
5.41 Modify URLFILTERING Action <MOD

URLFILTERING >
MOD URLFILTERING is used to modify information about an URLFILTERING action.

Value Range
1. ACTIONGROUPN Action Group This parameter specifies String 1-32 M

AME Name the name of an action
group.
2. URLFILTERINGS URL Filtering This parameter specifies Enumerated Value, O
WITCHTYPE Switch Type the value type of URL Object
Filtering Switch Value. Attribute
3. URLFILTERINGS URL Filtering This parameter specifies String 1-65 C
WITCH Switch the URL Filtering Switch.
4. URLFILTERINGN URL Filtering This parameter specifies Enumerated Value, O

AMETYPE Name Type the value type of URL Object
Filtering Name Value. Attribute
5. URLFILTERINGN URL Filtering This parameter specifies String 1-31 C

AME Name the URL Filtering name.

Copyright Huawei
If the value of URLFILTERINGSWITCH parameters is Enabled, the URLFILTERINGNAME
cannot be configured.
URL Filtering Switch can be set to Null or Enabled.
URL Filtering Name can be set to a string of up to 31 characters.
action element.

[MOD]
URLFILTERING:
{ URLFILTERINGSWITCHTYPE } = < URL Filtering Switch Type>,
{ URLFILTERINGSWITCH } = < URL Filtering Switch>,
{ URLFILTERINGNAMETYPE } = < URL Filtering Name Type>,
{ URLFILTERINGNAME} = < URL Filtering Name >,
Example:
MOD URLFILTERING: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc", URLFILTERINGNAMETYPE =
value, URLFILTERINGNAME = " template_2 ";
5.41.4 Result
94551: The URLFilteringSwitch and URLFilteringName configuration conflicts

Copyright Huawei
5.42 Delete URLFILTERING Action <RMV

URLFILTERING >
RMV URLFILTERING is used to delete an URLFILTERING action from an action group.

No ID Name Description Data Value or Type
. Type Value
Range

Name
Action wGroup Name must be the same as an existing action name.

RMV URLFILTERING: { ACTIONGROUPNAME } = < Action Group Name >;
Example:
RMV URLFILTERING:ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc";
5.42.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
5.43 Add SCE Action (ADD SCE)

ADD SCE is used to add an SCE action for an action group.

Value Range
1. ACTIONGRO Action This String 1-32 M

UPNAME Group parameter
Name specifies the
name of an
action group.
2. CISCOSCABB Cisco SCA This Enumerated Value M
PACKAGEINS BB parameter Object
TALLTYPE Package specifies the Attribute
Install value type of
Type Cisco SCA
BB Package
Install Value.
3. CISCOSCABB Cisco SCA This String 1-65 M
PACKAGEINS BB parameter
TALLVALUE Package specifies the
Install Cisco SCA
Value BB package
install value.
The element type and element value must be specified in pairs.
The default description of SCE is: "To set the predefined parameter for the Cisco SCE peer.".
If Value Type is set to Value, the value of Cisco SCA BB Package Install Value ranges from 0 to
4294967295.
action element.

[ADD]
SCE:
{ ACTIONGROUPNAME } = <Action Group Name>,

Copyright Huawei
{ CISCOSCABBPACKAGEINSTALLTYPE } = <Cisco SCA BB Package Install Type>,

{ CISCOSCABBPACKAGEINSTALLVALUE } = <Cisco SCA BB Package Install Value>;
Example:
ADD SCE: ACTIONGROUPNAME="abcd",
CISCOSCABBPACKAGEINSTALLTYPE=Value,
CISCOSCABBPACKAGEINSTALLVALUE="10";
5.43.4 Result
5.44 Modify SCE Action (MOD SCE)

MOD SCE is used to modify the information about an SCE action.

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.

Copyright Huawei
2. CISCOSCABB Cisco SCA This Enumerated Value O

PACKAGEINS BB parameter Object
TALLTYPE Package specifies the Attribute
Install value type of
Type Cisco SCA
BB Package
Install Value.
3. CISCOSCABB Cisco SCA This String 1-65 O
PACKAGEINS BB parameter
TALLVALUE Package specifies the
Install Cisco SCA
Value BB package
install value.
action name.

[MOD]
SCE:
{ CISCOSCABBPACKAGEINSTALLTYPE } = <Cisco SCA BB Package Install Type>,
{ CISCOSCABBPACKAGEINSTALLVALUE } = <Cisco SCA BB Package Install Value>;
Example:
MOD SCE: ACTIONGROUPNAME="abcd",
CISCOSCABBPACKAGEINSTALLTYPE=Value,
CISCOSCABBPACKAGEINSTALLVALUE="10";
5.44.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

5.45 Delete SCE Action (RMV SCE)

RMV SCE is used to delete the SCE action data record.

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.

RMV SCE: { ACTIONGROUPNAME } = <Action Group Name>;
Example:
RMV SCE:ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";
5.45.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

5.46 Add SCEPSINFORMATION Action (ADD

SCEPSINFORMATION)
ADD SCEPSINFORMATION is used to add an SCEPSINFORMATION action for an
action group.

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.
2. CALLEDSTAT Called This Enumerated Value O
IONIDTYPE Station ID parameter Object
Type specifies the Attribute
value type of
Called station
ID Value.
3. CALLEDSTAT Called This String 1-65 O
IONIDVALUE Station ID parameter
Value specifies the
value of the
called station
ID.
4. RATTYPETYP RAT Type This Enumerated Value O
E Type parameter Object
specifies the Attribute
value type of
RAT Type
Value.
5. RATTYPEVAL RAT Type This String 1-65 O
UE Value parameter
specifies the
value of the
RAT type.

Copyright Huawei

Value Range
6. USERLOCATI User This Enumerated Value O

ONINFOTYPE Location parameter Object
Info Type specifies the Attribute
value type of
User Location
Info Value.
7. USERLOCATI User This String 1-65 O
ONINFOVAL Location parameter
UE Info Value specifies the
value of the
user location
info.
8. IMEISVTYPE IMEISV This Enumerated Value O
Type parameter Object
value type of
IMEISV
Value.
9. IMEISVVALU IMEISV This String 1-65 O
E Value parameter
specifies the
value of the
IMEISV.
10. SGSNADDRE SGSN This Enumerated Value O
SSTYPE Address parameter Object
value type of
SGSN
Address
Value.
11. SGSNADDRE SGSN This String 1-65 O
SSVALUE Address parameter
Value specifies the
value of the
SGSN
address.

Copyright Huawei
The default description of SCEPsInformation is: "To set the PS parameter for the Cisco SCE peer
in multi-PCEF scenario.".
The value of Called Station ID Value must be a string of 1 to 64 characters.
RAT Type Value can be set to UTRAN, GERAN, WLAN, GAN, HSPAEvolution, EUTRAN,
CDMA2000_1X, or HRPD.
The value of User Location Info Value must be a string of 1 to 32 characters.
The value of IMEISV Value must be a string of 1 to 16 characters.
The value of SGSN Address Value must be an IPv4 address in dotted decimal notation as follows:
x.x.x.x (The value of x ranges from 0 to 255.), a string of 7 to 15 characters.

action element.

[ADD]
SCEPSINFORMATION:
{ CALLEDSTATIONIDTYPE } = <Called Station ID Type>,
{ CALLEDSTATIONIDVALUE } = <Called Station ID Value>,
{ RATTYPETYPE } = <RAT Type Type>,
{ RATTYPEVALUE } = <RAT Type Value>,
{ USERLOCATIONINFOTYPE } = <User Location Info Type>,
{ USERLOCATIONINFOVALUE } = <User Location Info Value>,
{ IMEISVTYPE } = <IMEISV Type>,
{ IMEISVVALUE } = <IMEISV Value>,
{ SGSNADDRESSTYPE } = <SGSN Address Type>,
{ SGSNADDRESSVALUE } = <SGSN Address Value>;
Example:
ADD SCEPSINFORMATION: ACTIONGROUPNAME="abcd",
CALLEDSTATIONIDTYPE=Object Attribute,
CALLEDSTATIONIDVALUE="IPSession.CalledStationID", RATTYPETYPE=Object
Attribute, RATTYPEVALUE="IPSession.RATType", USERLOCATIONINFOTYPE=Object
Attribute, USERLOCATIONINFOVALUE="IPSession.UserLocationInfo",
IMEISVTYPE=Object Attribute, IMEISVVALUE="IPSession.TerminalInfoValue",

Copyright Huawei
SGSNADDRESSTYPE=Object Attribute,
SGSNADDRESSVALUE="IPSession.SGSNAddress";
5.46.4 Result
5.47 Modify SCEPSINFORMATION Action (MOD

SCEPSINFORMATION)
MOD SCEPSINFORMATION is used to modify the information about an
SCEPSINFORMATION action.

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.

Copyright Huawei

Value Range
2. CALLEDSTAT Called This Enumerated Value O

IONIDTYPE Station ID parameter Object
value type of
Called Station
ID Value.
3. CALLEDSTAT Called This String 1-65 O
IONIDVALUE Station ID parameter
Value specifies the
value of the
called station
ID.
4. RATTYPETYP RAT Type This Enumerated Value O
E Type parameter Object
value type of
RAT Type
Value.
5. RATTYPEVAL RAT Type This String 1-65 O
UE Value parameter
specifies the
value of the
RAT type.
6. USERLOCATI User This Enumerated Value O
ONINFOTYPE Location parameter Object
Info Type specifies the Attribute
value type of
User Location
Info Value.
7. USERLOCATI User This String 1-65 O
ONINFOVAL Location parameter
UE Info Value specifies the
value of the
user location
info.
8. IMEISVTYPE IMEISV This Enumerated Value O
Type parameter Object
value type of
IMEISV
Value.
9. IMEISVVALU IMEISV This String 1-65 O
E Value parameter
specifies the
value of the
IMEISV.

Copyright Huawei

Value Range
10. SGSNADDRE SGSN This Enumerated Value O

SSTYPE Address parameter Object
value type of
SGSN
Address
Value.
11. SGSNADDRE SGSN This String 1-65 O
SSVALUE Address parameter
Value specifies the
value of the
SGSN
address.
action name.

[MOD]
SCEPSINFORMATION:
{ CALLEDSTATIONIDTYPE } = <Called Station ID Type>,
{ CALLEDSTATIONIDVALUE } = <Called Station ID Value>,
{ RATTYPETYPE } = <RAT Type Type>,
{ RATTYPEVALUE } = <RAT Type Value>,
{ USERLOCATIONINFOTYPE } = <User Location Info Type>,
{ USERLOCATIONINFOVALUE } = <User Location Info Value>,
{ IMEISVTYPE } = <IMEISV Type>,
{ IMEISVVALUE } = <IMEISV Value>,
{ SGSNADDRESSTYPE } = <SGSN Address Type>,
{ SGSNADDRESSVALUE } = <SGSN Address Value>;
Example:
MOD SCEPSINFORMATION: ACTIONGROUPNAME="abcd",
CALLEDSTATIONIDTYPE=Object Attribute,
CALLEDSTATIONIDVALUE="IPSession.CalledStationID", RATTYPETYPE=Object
Attribute, RATTYPEVALUE="IPSession.RATType", USERLOCATIONINFOTYPE=Object
Attribute, USERLOCATIONINFOVALUE="IPSession.UserLocationInfo",

Copyright Huawei
IMEISVTYPE=Object Attribute, IMEISVVALUE="IPSession.TerminalInfoValue",

SGSNADDRESSTYPE=Object Attribute,
SGSNADDRESSVALUE="IPSession.SGSNAddress";
5.47.4 Result
5.48 Delete SCEPSINFORMATION Action (RMV

SCEPSINFORMATION)
RMV SCEPSINFORMATION is used to delete the SCEPsInformation action data record.

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.

Copyright Huawei

RMV SCEPSINFORMATION: { ACTIONGROUPNAME } = <Action Group Name>;
Example:
RMV SCEPSINFORMATION:ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";
5.48.4 Result
5.49 Add SERVICEFLOWDETECTION Action (ADD

SERVICEFLOWDETECTION)
ADD SERVICEFLOWDETECTION is used to add an SERVICEFLOWDETECTION
action for an action group.

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.

Copyright Huawei
2. SERVICEFLO Service This Enumerated Value M

WDETECTIO flow parameter Object
NTYPE detection specifies the Attribute
Type value type of
service flow
detection.
3. SERVICEFLO Service This String 1-65 M
WDETECTIO flow parameter
NVALUE detection specifies the
Value Service flow
detection
value.
The default description of SERVICEFLOWDETECTION is: " To set the service flow detection
policy as a default action and cannot be deleted or configured.".
action element.
enabled for the PCEF that supports the SFD redirection service. The value of Service flow
detection Value only can be set to Enable.

[ADD]
SERVICEFLOWDETECTION:
{ ACTIONGROUPNAME} = <Action Group Name>,
{ SERVICEFLOWDETECTIONTYPE} = <Service Flow Detection Type>,
{ SERVICEFLOWDETECTIONVALUE} = <Service Flow Detection Value>;
Example:
ADD SERVICEFLOWDETECTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME="abcd",
SERVICEFLOWDETECTIONTYPE=Value,
SERVICEFLOWDETECTIONVALUE="Enable";
5.49.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

5.50 Modify SERVICEFLOWDETECTION Action (MOD

MOD SERVICEFLOWDETECTION is used to modify the information about an
SERVICEFLOWDETECTION action.

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.
2. SERVICEFLO Service This Enumerated Value O
WDETECTIO flow parameter Object
NTYPE detection specifies the Attribute
Type value type of
service flow
detection.
3. SERVICEFLO Service This String 1-65 O
WDETECTIO flow parameter
NVALUE detection specifies the
Value Service flow
detection
value.

Copyright Huawei
action name.
The SERVICEFLOWDETECTION specifies whether the service flow detection function is enabled
for the PCEF that supports the SFD redirection service. The value of Service flow detection Value
only can be set to Enable.

[MOD]
SERVICEFLOWDETECTION:
{ SERVICEFLOWDETECTIONTYPE} = <Service Flow Detection Type>,
{ SERVICEFLOWDETECTIONVALUE} = <Service Flow Detection Value>;
Example:
ADD SERVICEFLOWDETECTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME="abcd",
SERVICEFLOWDETECTIONTYPE=Value,
SERVICEFLOWDETECTIONVALUE="Enable";
5.50.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
5.51 Delete SERVICEFLOWDETECTION Action (RMV

RMV SERVICEFLOWDETECTION is used to delete the SERVICEFLOWDETECTION
action data record.

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.

RMV SERVICEFLOWDETECTION: {ACTIONGROUPNAME} = <Action Group Name>;
Example:
RMV SERVICEFLOWDETECTION:ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";
5.51.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
5.52 Add CMDSUBPROFILEACTION<ADD

CMDSUBPROFILEACTION>
ADD CMDSUBPROFILEACTION is used to add an CMDSUBPROFILEACTION
action for an action group.

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.
2. SUBPROFILE Sub Profile This Enumerated Value M
TYPE Type parameter Object
value type of
sub profile.
3. SUBPROFILE Sub Profile This String When M
VALUE Value parameter SUBPROFILE
specifies the TYPE is Value,
sub profile the range is 1-
value. 15.
When
SUBPROFILE
TYPE is Object
Attribute, the
range is 1-65.
The default description of CMDSUBPROFILEACTION is: " To set the CmdSubProfileAction
as a default action and cannot be deleted or configured. ".
If Value Type is set to Value,the maximum length of the value must less or equal to 15 bytes.

Copyright Huawei
action element.

[ADD]
CMDSUBPROFILEACTION:
{ SUBPROFILETYPE} = <Sub Profile Type>,
{ SUBPROFILEVALUE} = <Sub Profile Value>;
Example:
ADD CMDSUBPROFILEACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc", SUBPROFILETYPE
= Value, SUBPROFILEVALUE = "1";
5.52.4 Result
5.53 Modify CMDSUBPROFILEACTION<MOD

MOD CMDSUBPROFILEACTION is used to modify the information about an
CMDSUBPROFILEACTION action.

Copyright Huawei

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.
2. SUBPROFILE Sub Profile This Enumerated Value O
TYPE Type parameter Object
value type of
sub profile.
3. SUBPROFILE Sub Profile This String When O
VALUE Value parameter SUBPROFILE
specifies the TYPE is Value,
sub profile the range is 1-
value. 15.
When
SUBPROFILE
TYPE is Object
Attribute, the
range is 1-65.
action name.
The element type and element value must be specified in pairs..

[MOD]
CMDSUBPROFILEACTION:
{ SUBPROFILETYPE} = <Sub Profile Type>,
{ SUBPROFILEVALUE} = <Sub Profile Value>;
Example:
MOD CMDSUBPROFILEACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc", SUBPROFILETYPE
= Value, SUBPROFILEVALUE = "0";
5.53.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
5.54 Delete CMDSUBPROFILEACTION<RMV

RMV CMDSUBPROFILEACTION is used to delete the CMDSUBPROFILEACTION
action data record.

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.

RMV CMDCHARGINGACTION: {ACTIONGROUPNAME} = <Action Group Name>;
Example:
RMV CMDCHARGINGACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";
5.54.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

5.55 Add TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER<ADD

TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER>
ADD TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER is used to add an TDFApplicationIdentifier action
for an action group.

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.
2. APPIDENTIFI Applicatio This Enumerated Value M
ERTYPE n Identifier parameter Object
value type of
Application
Identifier.
3. APPIDENTIFI Applicatio This String 1-65 M
ERVALUE n Identifier parameter
Value specifies the
Application
Identifier
value.

Copyright Huawei
The default description of TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER is: " To set the
TDFApplicationIdentifier as a default action and cannot be deleted or configured. ".
If Value Type is set to Value,the maximum length of the value must less or equal to 64 bytes.
action element.

[ADD]
TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER:
{ APPIDENTIFIERTYPE } = < Application Identifier Type > ,
{ APPIDENTIFIERVALUE } = < Application Identifier Value >;
Example:
ADD TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc",
APPIDENTIFIERTYPE = Value, APPIDENTIFIERVALUE = "P2P";
5.55.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
5.56 Modify TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER <MOD

TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER >
MOD TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER is used to modify the information about an
TDFApplicationIdentifier action.

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.
2. APPIDENTIFI Applicatio This Enumerated Value O
ERTYPE n Identifier parameter Object
value type of
Application
Identifier.
3. APPIDENTIFI Applicatio This String 1-65 C
ERVALUE n Identifier parameter
Value specifies the
Application
Identifier
value.
action name.

[MOD]
TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER:
{ APPIDENTIFIERTYPE } = < Application Identifier Type > ,
{ APPIDENTIFIERVALUE } = < Application Identifier Value >;

Copyright Huawei
Example:
MOD TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc",
APPIDENTIFIERTYPE = Value, APPIDENTIFIERVALUE = "facebk";
5.56.4 Result
5.57 Delete TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER <RMV

TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER >
RMV TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER is used to delete the TDFApplicationIdentifier
action data record.

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.

Copyright Huawei

RMV TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER: {ACTIONGROUPNAME} = <Action Group
Name>;
Example:
RMV TDFAPPLICATIONIDENTIFIER: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";
5.57.4 Result
5.58 Add MUTENOTIFICATION<ADD

MUTENOTIFICATION>
ADD MUTENOTIFICATION is used to add an MuteNotification action for an action
group.

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.

Copyright Huawei
2. MUTENOTIFI Mute This Enumerated Value M

CATIONTYPE Notificatio parameter Object
n Type specifies the Attribute
value type of
Mute
Notification.
3. MUTENOTIFI Mute This String 1-65 M
CATIONVALU Notificatio parameter
E n Value specifies the
Mute
Notification
value.
The default description of MuteNotification is: " To set the MuteNotification as a default action
and cannot be deleted or configured. ".
If Value Type is set to Value, the value range of Mute Notification Value is as follows:
MUTE_REQUIRED.
action element.

[ADD]
MUTENOTIFICATION:
{ MUTENOTIFICATIONTYPE } = < Mute Notification Type > ,
{ MUTENOTIFICATIONVALUE } = < Mute Notification Value >;
Example :
ADD MUTENOTIFICATION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc",
MUTENOTIFICATIONTYPE = Value, MUTENOTIFICATIONVALUE =
"MUTE_REQUIRED";
5.58.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
5.59 Modify MUTENOTIFICATION <MOD

MUTENOTIFICATION >
MOD MUTENOTIFICATION is used to modify the information about an MuteNotification
action.

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.
2. MUTENOTIFI Mute This Enumerated Value O
CATIONTYPE Notificatio parameter Object
n Type specifies the Attribute
value type of
Mute
Notification.
3. MUTENOTIFI Mute This String 1-65 C
CATIONVALU Notificatio parameter
E n Value specifies the
Mute
Notification
value.

Copyright Huawei
action name.

[MOD]
MUTENOTIFICATION:
{ MUTENOTIFICATIONTYPE } = < Mute Notification Type > ,
{ MUTENOTIFICATIONVALUE } = < Mute Notification Value >;
Example :
MOD MUTENOTIFICATION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc",
MUTENOTIFICATIONTYPE = Value, MUTENOTIFICATIONVALUE =
"MUTE_REQUIRED";
5.59.4 Result
5.60 Delete MUTENOTIFICATION <RMV

MUTENOTIFICATION >
RMV MUTENOTIFICATION is used to delete the MuteNotification action data record.

Copyright Huawei

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.

RMV MUTENOTIFICATION: {ACTIONGROUPNAME} = <Action Group Name>;
Example:
RMV MUTENOTIFICATION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";
5.60.4 Result
5.61 Add REDIRECTINFORMATION<ADD

REDIRECTINFORMATION>
ADD REDIRECTINFORMATION is used to add an RedirectInformation action for an
action group.

Copyright Huawei

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.
2. REDIRECTSU Redirect This Enumerated Value O
PPORTTYPE support parameter Object
value type of
Redirect
support.
3. REDIRECTSU Redirect This String 1-65 C
PPORTVALUE support parameter
Value specifies the
Redirect
support value.
4. REDIRECTAD Redirect This Enumerated Value O
DRESSTYPET Address parameter Object
YPE Type Type specifies the Attribute
value type of
Redirect
Address
Type Value.
5. REDIRECTAD Redirect This String 1-65 C
DRESSTYPEV Address parameter
ALUE Type Value specifies the
type of the IP
address of the
redirected
server.
6. REDIRECTSE Redirect This Enumerated Value O
RVERADDRE Server parameter Object
SSTYPE Address specifies the Attribute
Type value type of
Redirect
Server
Address
Value.
7. REDIRECTSE Redirect This String 1-127 C
RVERADDRE Server parameter
SSVALUE Address specifies the
Value IP address of
a redirected
server.

Copyright Huawei
The default description of Redirection is"To set the redirection-related parameters as a default
action and can not be deleted or configured."
Redirect support Value can be set to REDIRECTION_ENABLED or
REDIRECTION_DISABLED.
Redirect Address Type Value can be set to IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, URL, or SIP URIS.
The value of Redirect Server Address Value is in dotted decimal format.
action element.

[ADD]
REDIRECTINFORMATION:
{ REDIRECTSUPPORTTYPE } = < Redirect support Type > ,
{ REDIRECTSUPPORTVALUE } = < Redirect support Value >;
{ REDIRECTADDRESSTYPETYPE } = < Redirect Address Type Type >,
{ REDIRECTADDRESSTYPEVALUE } = < Redirect Address Type Value >,
{ REDIRECTSERVERADDRESSTYPE } = < Redirect Server Address Type >,
{ REDIRECTSERVERADDRESSVALUE } = < Redirect Server Address Value > ;
Example :
ADD REDIRECTINFORMATION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "11",
REDIRECTSUPPORTTYPE = value, REDIRECTSUPPORTVALUE =
"REDIRECTION_ENABLED", REDIRECTADDRESSTYPETYPE = value,
REDIRECTADDRESSTYPEVALUE = "IPv4 Address",
REDIRECTSERVERADDRESSTYPE = value, REDIRECTSERVERADDRESSVALUE =
"10.85.169.12";
5.61.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

5.62 Modify REDIRECTINFORMATION <MOD

REDIRECTINFORMATION >
MOD REDIRECTINFORMATION is used to modify the information about an
RedirectInformation action.

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.
2. REDIRECTSU Redirect This Enumerated Value O
PPORTTYPE support parameter Object
value type of
Redirect
support.
3. REDIRECTSU Redirect This String 1-65 C
PPORTVALUE support parameter
Value specifies the
Redirect
support value.

Copyright Huawei
4. REDIRECTAD Redirect This Enumerated Value O

DRESSTYPET Address parameter Object
YPE Type Type specifies the Attribute
value type of
Redirect
Address
Type Value.
5. REDIRECTAD Redirect This String 1-65 C
DRESSTYPEV Address parameter
ALUE Type Value specifies the
type of the IP
address of the
redirected
server.
6. REDIRECTSE Redirect This Enumerated Value O
RVERADDRE Server parameter Object
SSTYPE Address specifies the Attribute
Type value type of
Redirect
Server
Address
Value.
7. REDIRECTSE Redirect This String 1-127 C
RVERADDRE Server parameter
SSVALUE Address specifies the
Value IP address of
a redirected
server.
action name.

[MOD]
REDIRECTINFORMATION:
{ REDIRECTSUPPORTTYPE } = < Redirect support Type > ,
{ REDIRECTSUPPORTVALUE } = < Redirect support Value >;
{ REDIRECTADDRESSTYPETYPE } = < Redirect Address Type Type >,
{ REDIRECTADDRESSTYPEVALUE } = < Redirect Address Type Value >,
{ REDIRECTSERVERADDRESSTYPE } = < Redirect Server Address Type >,
{ REDIRECTSERVERADDRESSVALUE } = < Redirect Server Address Value > ;

Copyright Huawei
Example :
MOD REDIRECTINFORMATION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "11",
REDIRECTSUPPORTTYPE = value, REDIRECTSUPPORTVALUE =
"REDIRECTION_ENABLED", REDIRECTADDRESSTYPETYPE = value,
REDIRECTADDRESSTYPEVALUE = "IPv4 Address",
REDIRECTSERVERADDRESSTYPE = value, REDIRECTSERVERADDRESSVALUE =
"10.85.169.12";
5.62.4 Result
5.63 Delete REDIRECTINFORMATION<RMV

REDIRECTINFORMATION >
RMV REDIRECTINFORMATION is used to delete the RedirectInformation action data
record.

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.

Copyright Huawei

RMV REDIRECTINFORMATION: {ACTIONGROUPNAME} = <Action Group Name>;
Example:
RMV REDIRECTINFORMATION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";
5.63.4 Result
5.64 Add PROFILEUPDATEACTION<ADD

PROFILEUPDATEACTION >
ADD PROFILEUPDATEACTION is used to add an ProfileUpdate action for an action
group.

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.

Copyright Huawei
2. SUBSCRIPTIO Service This Enumerated Value M

NUSAGESTAT Usage parameter Object
USTYPE Status specifies the Attribute
Type value type of
Service
Usage Status.
3. SUBSCRIPTIO Service This String 1-65 C
NUSAGESTAT Usage parameter
USVALUE Status specifies the
Value Mute Service
Usage Status
value.
4. SUBEXTEND Subscriber Subscriber Number 0~254 O
ATTR1VALUE extended extended
attribute 1 attribute 1








Copyright Huawei


ATTR10VALU extended extended
E attribute 10 attribute 10
14. SUBEXTEND Type of Type of Enumerated Value O

ATTR11TYPE Subscriber Subscriber Object
extended extended Attribute
15. SUBEXTEND Subscriber Subscriber String 1~64 O





20. SUBCUSTOM Subscriber Subscriber Number 0~65535 O

ATTRVALUE customer customer
attribute attribute

Copyright Huawei

For element SubExtendAttr1VALUE ~ SubExtendAttr10VALUE and SubCustomAttrVALUE, the
value type is Value as default. If the data type is assign to SUBEXTENDATTR1TYPE=Value, the
command can also succeed.
For element SubExtendAttr11VALUE ~ SubExtendAttr13VALUE, the value type can be Value or
Object Attribute. If the value type is Object Attribute, the attribute which can be related is
System.Datetime.
If Value Type is set to Value, the value range of Service Usage Status Value is as follows:
Normal, Level1, Level2, Level3, Level4, Level5, Level6, Level7, Level8, Level9, Level10 and
Exhaust .
action element.

[ADD]
PROFILEUPDATEACTION:
{ SUBSCRIPTIONUSAGESTATUSTYPE } = < Service Usage Status Type > ,
{ SUBSCRIPTIONUSAGESTATUSVALUE } = < Service Usage Status Value >,
{ SUBEXTENDATTR1VALUE}=< Subscriber extended attribute 1>;
Example :
ADD PROFILEUPDATEACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc",
SUBSCRIPTIONUSAGESTATUSTYPE = Value, SUBSCRIPTIONUSAGESTATUSVALUE
= "Exhaust", SUBEXTENDATTR1VALUE="1";
For subscriber extension attribute, if the data type is assign to
SUBEXTENDATTR1TYPE=Value, the command can also succeed.
ADD PROFILEUPDATEACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME ="abc",
SUBSCRIPTIONUSAGESTATUSTYPE=Value, SUBSCRIPTIONUSAGESTATUSVALUE
="Level2", SUBEXTENDATTR1TYPE=Value, SUBEXTENDATTR1VALUE="1";
5.64.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

94232: The right value invalid
5.65 Modify PROFILEUPDATEACTION <MOD

MOD PROFILEUPDATEACTION is used to modify the information about an
ProfileUpdate action.

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.
2. SUBSCRIPTIO Service This Enumerated Value O
NUSAGESTAT Usage parameter Object
USTYPE Status specifies the Attribute
Type value type of
Service
Usage Status.
3. SUBSCRIPTIO Service This String 1-65 C
NUSAGESTAT Usage parameter
USVALUE Status specifies the
Value Mute Service
Usage Status
value.

Copyright Huawei












Copyright Huawei




20. SUBCUSTOM Subscriber Subscriber Number 0~65535 O

ATTRVALUE customer customer
attribute attribute

[MOD]
PROFILEUPDATEACTION:
{ SUBSCRIPTIONUSAGESTATUSTYPE } = < Service Usage Status Type > ,
{ SUBSCRIPTIONUSAGESTATUSVALUE } = < Service Usage Status Value >,
{ SUBEXTENDATTR1VALUE }=< Subscriber extended attribute 1>;
Example :
MOD PROFILEUPDATEACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abc",
SUBSCRIPTIONUSAGESTATUSTYPE = Value, SUBSCRIPTIONUSAGESTATUSVALUE
= "Exhaust", SUBEXTENDATTR1VALUE="1";
For subscriber extension attribute, if the data type is assign to
SUBEXTENDATTR1TYPE=Value, the command can also succeed.
MOD PROFILEUPDATEACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME ="abc",
SUBSCRIPTIONUSAGESTATUSTYPE=Value, SUBSCRIPTIONUSAGESTATUSVALUE
="Level2", SUBEXTENDATTR1TYPE=Value, SUBEXTENDATTR1VALUE="1";

Copyright Huawei
5.65.4 Result
94232: The right value invalid
5.66 Delete PROFILEUPDATEACTION <RMV

RMV PROFILEUPDATEACTION is used to delete the ProfileUpdate action data record.

Value Range

Name specifies the
name of an
action group.

RMV PROFILEUPDATEACTION: {ACTIONGROUPNAME} = <Action Group Name>;
Example:

Copyright Huawei
RMV PROFILEUPDATEACTION: ACTIONGROUPNAME = "abcd";
5.66.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Service Flow ManagementService Flow Management
6 Service Flow Management
6.1 Add Service Flow (ADD SERVICEFLOW)

ADD SERVICEFLOW is used to add a service flow.

Type Value
Range
1. SERVICEFLOWNAME Service Flow This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

Name name of a service flow.
additional information about
the service flow.
Service Flow Name cannot be the same as an existing service flow name.
A maximum of 1,024 service flows and 1,024 flow filters can be configured in the system.
Each service flow can be configured with a maximum of two filters in different directions. Different
service flows can be configured with the same flow filters.

[ADD]
SERVICEFLOW:
{SERVICEFLOWNAME} = <Service Flow Name>,
Example:

Copyright Huawei
ADD SERVICEFLOW: SERVICEFLOWNAME = "abcd", DESCRIPTION = "abcd Service

Flow";
6.1.4 Result
12443: The service flow already exists
6.2 Modify Service Flow (MOD SERVICEFLOW)

MOD SERVICEFLOW is used to modify a service flow.

Type Value
Range
1. SERVICEFLOWNAME Service Flow This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

Name name of a service flow to be
modified.
the service flow.
Service Flow Name must be the same as an existing service flow name.
Only the description of a service flow can be modified.

[MOD]

Copyright Huawei
SERVICEFLOW:
Example:
MOD SERVICEFLOW: SERVICEFLOWNAME = "abcd", DESCRIPTION = "abcd Service
Flow";
6.2.4 Result
12444: The service flow does not exist
6.3 Delete Service Flow (RMV SERVICEFLOW)

RMV SERVICEFLOW is used to delete a service flow.

Type Value
Range
1. SERVICEFLOWNAME Service This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

Flow name of the service flow to be
Name deleted
Service Flow Name must be the same as an existing service flow name.

[RMV]

Copyright Huawei
SERVICEFLOW:
{SERVICEFLOWNAME} = <Service Flow Name>;
Example:
RMV SERVICEFLOW: SERVICEFLOWNAME = "abcd";
6.3.4 Result
12447: The service flow cannot be deleted because it is associated with a rule
6.4 Add Flow Filter (ADD FLOWFILTER)

ADD FLOWFILTER is used to add a flow filter for a service flow.

. Range
1. SERVICEFLOW Service This parameter specifies String 1-32 M

NAME Flow Name the name of a service flow.
2. FLOWFILTERN Flow Filter This parameter specifies String 1-32 M
AME Name the name of a flow filter.
3. FILTERDIRECT Filter This parameter specifies Enumerated Up(upstream) M
ION Direction the direction of a flow Down(downstr
filter. eam)
4. DESTINATIONI Destination This parameter specifies String 1-40 O
PADDRESS IP Address the destination IPv4 or
IPv6 address of a flow
filter.

Copyright Huawei

. Range
5. MASKOFDEST Mask or This parameter specifies String 1-40 O

INATIONIPAD Prefix the mask or prefix length
DRESS Length of of a destination IPv4 or
Destination IPv6 address.
IP Address
6. MINDESTINAT Min This parameter specifies Number 0-65535 O
IONPORT1 Destination the start port number of a
Port 1 destination port number
segment.
7. MAXDESTINA Max This parameter specifies Number 0-65535 O
TIONPORT1 Destination the end port number of a
segment.
segment.
segment.
10. SOURCEIPADD Source IP This parameter specifies String 1-40 O
RESS Address the source IPv4 or IPv6
address of a flow filter.
11. MASKOFSOUR Mask or This parameter specifies String 1-40 O
CEIPADDRESS Prefix the mask or prefix length
Length of of a source IPv4 or IPv6
Source IP address.
Address
12. MINSOURCEP Min Source This parameter specifies Number 0-65535 O
ORT1 Port 1 the start port number of a
source port number
segment.
13. MAXSOURCEP Max Source This parameter specifies Number 0-65535 O
ORT1 Port 1 the end port number of a
source port number
segment.
source port number
segment.

Copyright Huawei

. Range

source port number
segment.
16. PROTOCOL Protocol This parameter specifies Enumerated Any IP M
the protocol type. Protocol
ICMP
IP in IP tunnel
TCP
UDP
GRE
OSPF
about the flow filter.
Service Flow Name must be the same as an existing service flow name. The flow filter name cannot
be duplicated in a service flow.
A maximum of 1,024 service flows and 1,024 flow filters can be configured in the system.
Each service flow can be configured with a maximum of two filters in different directions. Different
service flows can be configured with the same flow filters.
The values of Max Destination Port 1, Max Destination Port 2, Max Source Port 1, and Max
Source Port 2 must be greater than or equal to the values of Min Destination Port 1, Min
Destination Port 2, Min Source Port 1, and Min Source Port 2, respectively.
Min Destination Port 1, Max Destination Port 1, Min Destination Port 2, and Max Destination
Port 2 can be configured to specify two port segments. For example, if Min Destination Port 1 is 1,
Max Destination Port 1 is 80, Min Destination Port 2 is 100, and Max Destination Port 2 is 120,
ports ranging from 1 to 80 and ports ranging from 100 to 120 are configured. This rule applies to
configuration of source ports and destination ports.

[ADD]
FLOWFILTER:
{FLOWFILTERNAME} = <Flow Filter Name>,
{FILTERDIRECTION} = <Filter Direction>,
{DESTINATIONIPADDRESS} = <Destination IP Address>,
{MASKOFDESTINATIONIPADDRESS} = <Mask or Prefix Length of Destination IP
Address>,
{MINDESTINATIONPORT1} = <Min Destination Port 1>,

Copyright Huawei
{MAXDESTINATIONPORT1} = <Max Destination Port 1>,

{SOURCEIPADDRESS} = <Source IP Address>,
{MASKOFSOURCEIPADDRESS} = <Mask or Prefix Length of Source IP Address>,
{MINSOURCEPORT1} = <Min Source Port 1>,
{MAXSOURCEPORT1} = <Max Source Port 1>,
{PROTOCOL} = <Protocol>,
Example:
ADD FLOWFILTER: SERVICEFLOWNAME = "abcd", FLOWFILTERNAME = "Flow
Filter", FILTERDIRECTION = Up, DESTINATIONIPADDRESS = "10.85.123.32",
MASKOFDESTINATIONIPADDRESS = "255.255.255.255", MINDESTINATIONPORT1 =
100, MAXDESTINATIONPORT1 = 200, MINDESTINATIONPORT2 = 300,
MAXDESTINATIONPORT2 = 400, SOURCEIPADDRESS = "10.85.123.5",
MASKOFSOURCEIPADDRESS = "255.255.255.255", MINSOURCEPORT1 = 500,
MAXSOURCEPORT1 = 600, MINSOURCEPORT2 = 700, MAXSOURCEPORT2 = 800,
PROTOCOL = Any IP Protocol, DESCRIPTION = "abcd Flow Filter.";
6.4.4 Result
12481: Invalid IP address. The value must be an IPv4 address in D.D.D.D format, an
IPv6 address in X:X:X:X:X:X:X:X format, or an IPv6 address embedded with an IPv4
address, that is, in X:X:X:X:X:X:D.D.D.D format. D is an 8-bit decimal number, X is a
16-bit hexadecimal number. If two or more consecutive Xs are 0, the 0s can be replaced
by ::. For example, X:X:X:0:0:0:X:X can be replaced by X:X:X::X:X. Only one :: is
allowed
12620: Invalid subnet mask. If the IP address is in IPv4 format, the subnet mask must be
in D.D.D.D format (where D is an 8-bit decimal number) or a decimal number ranging
from 0 to 32. If the IP address is in IPv6 format, the subnet mask must be in

Copyright Huawei
X:X:X:X:X:X:X:X format (where X is a 16-bit hexadecimal number) or a decimal

number ranging from 0 to 128
94252: The max. port number cannot be smaller than the min. port number
94265: A maximum of two flow filters can be set
94266: The directions of the flow filters cannot be the same
6.5 Modify Flow Filter (MOD FLOWFILTER)

MOD FLOWFILTER is used to modify a flow filter for a service flow.

Value
Range
1. SERVICEFLO Service Flow This parameter specifies String 1-32 M

WNAME Name the name of a service flow.
2. FLOWFILTERN Flow Filter This parameter specifies String 1-32 M
AME Name the name of a flow filter to
be modified.
3. DESTINATIONI Destination IP This parameter specifies String 1-40 O
PADDRESS Address the destination IPv4 or
IPv6 address of a flow
filter.
4. MASKOFDEST Mask or Prefix This parameter specifies String 1-40 O
INATIONIPAD Length of the mask or prefix length
DRESS Destination IP of a destination IPv4 or
Address IPv6 address.
segment.
Port 1 port number segment.
segment.

Copyright Huawei

Value
Range

segment.
9. SOURCEIPADD Source IP This parameter specifies String 1-40 O
RESS Address the source IPv4 or IPv6
address of a flow filter.
10. MASKOFSOUR Mask or Prefix This parameter specifies String 1-40 O
CEIPADDRESS Length of the mask or prefix length
Source IP of a source IPv4 or IPv6
Address address.
source port number
segment.
source port number
segment.
source port number
segment.
source port number
segment.
15. PROTOCOL Protocol This parameter specifies Enumerated Any IP O
the protocol type. Protocol
ICMP
IP in IP
tunnel
TCP
UDP
GRE
OSPF
about the flow filter.

Copyright Huawei
Service Flow Name and Flow Filter Name must be defined in the system.
The value of Filter Direction cannot be modified.

[MOD]
FLOWFILTER:
{FLOWFILTERNAME} = <Flow Filter Name>,
{FILTERDIRECTION} = <Filter Direction>,
{DESTINATIONIPADDRESS} = <Destination IP Address>,
{MASKOFDESTINATIONIPADDRESS} = <Mask or Prefix Length of Destination IP
Address>,
{SOURCEIPADDRESS} = <Source IP Address>,
{MASKOFSOURCEIPADDRESS} = <Mask or Prefix Length of Source IP Address>,
{PROTOCOL} = <Protocol>,
{DESCRIPTION} = < Description>;
Example:
MOD FLOWFILTER: SERVICEFLOWNAME = "abcd", FLOWFILTERNAME = "Flow
Filter", DESTINATIONIPADDRESS =
"10.85.123.32",MASKOFDESTINATIONIPADDRESS = "255.255.255.255",
MINDESTINATIONPORT1 = 100,MAXDESTINATIONPORT1 = 200,
MINDESTINATIONPORT2 = 300, MAXDESTINATIONPORT2 =
400,SOURCEIPADDRESS = "10.85.123.5", MASKOFSOURCEIPADDRESS =
"255.255.255.255", MINSOURCEPORT1 = 500, MAXSOURCEPORT1 = 600,
MINSOURCEPORT2 = 700, MAXSOURCEPORT2 = 800, PROTOCOL = Any IP
Protocol,DESCRIPTION = "abcd Flow Filter.";
6.5.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

12446:The flow filter does not exist
allowed
94252: The max. port number cannot be smaller than the min. port number
6.6 Delete Flow Filter (RMV FLOWFILTER)

RMV FLOWFILTER is used to delete a flow filter.

Type Value
Range
1. SERVICEFLOWNAME Service This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

Flow Name name of a service flow.
2. FLOWFILTERNAME Flow Filter This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M
Name name of flow filter to be
deleted.
Service Flow Name and Flow Filter Name must be defined in the system.

Copyright Huawei

[RMV]
FLOWFILTER:
{FLOWFILTERNAME} = <Flow Filter Name>;
Example:
RMV FLOWFILTER: SERVICEFLOWNAME = "abcd", FLOWFILTERNAME = "Flow
Filter";
6.6.4 Result
12446: The flow filter does not exist

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Notification ManagementNotification Management
7 Notification Management
7.1 Add Notification (ADD NOTIFICATION)

ADD NOTIFICATION is used to add a notification by using a short message or email.

Value
Range
1. NOTIFICATIO Notificatio This parameter specifies the name String 1-32 M

NNAME n Name of a notification
2. SMSFLAG SMS Flag This parameter specifies whether Enumerated Yes M
the short message template is to No
be added.
3. EMAILFLAG Email This parameter specifies the email Enumerated Yes M
Flag template to be added. No
4. SMSTEMPLAT SMS This parameter specifies the short String 1-32 C
ENAME Template message template used when a
Name notification is sent by using a
short message. This parameter
must be specified when SMS
Flag is set to Yes.
5. EMAILTEMPL EMAIL This parameter specifies the email String 1-32 C
ATENAME Template template used when a notification
Name is sent by using an email. This
parameter must be specified when
Email Flag is set to Yes.

Copyright Huawei

Value
Range
6. SENDINGINTE Sending This parameter specifies whether Enumerated Yes M

RVALRESTRIC Interval to stop sending the notification No
TION Restrictio to a subscriber for a period to
n prevent a large number of
repeated notifications in a short
period to the subscriber
7. SENDINGINTE Sending This parameter specifies the Enumerated Daily C
RVAL Interval interval for sending a repeated Weekly
notification to the subscriber. This
parameter must be specified when Monthly
Sending Interval Restriction is Quota
set to Yes. Cycle
Account
Cycle
8. UNIQUEKEY Unique This parameter specifies the String 1-65 C
Key object attribute based on which
the Unified Policy and Charging
Controller (UPCC) restricts the
sending of a notification. This
Sending Interval Restriction is
set to Yes.
9. OBJECTINSTA Object This parameter specifies the name string 1-32 C
NCE Instance of a quota or accumulation. This
parameter is valid only when
Sending Interval is Quota Cycle
or Unique Key is QuotaStatus,
QuotaComsumption,
QuotaBalance, or QuotaValue.
10. DESCRIPTION Descriptio This parameter provides String 1-256 O
n additional information about the
notification
11. MTRSWITCH Multi- Control if notification restrict Enumerated YesNo O
template over multiple template is allowed
Restrict or not.
Switch
12. SOAPFLAG SOAP This parameter specifies whether Enumerated Yes O
Flag the SOAP message template is to No
be added.
13. SOAPTEMPLA SOAP This parameter specifies the String 1-32 C
TENAME Template SOAP message template used
Name when a notification is sent by
using a SOAP message. This
SOAP Flag is set to Yes.

Copyright Huawei
Notification Name cannot be the same as an existing notification name.

Before adding a notification, you must add a short message template or email template.
A maximum of 2048 notifications can be configured in the system.
The change takes effect when you establish an IP-CAN session for the next time if the value of SMS
or EMAIL is changed.
SMS and EMAIL configured on the notification query page are associated with only the service. If
either SMS or EMAIL is not selected for a subscriber, the UPCC does not send any notification to
the subscriber by using a short message or email.
Attribute IPSession. TDFApplicationIdentifier cannot be selected as Unique Key.

[ADD]
NOTIFICATION:
{NOTIFICATIONNAME} = <Notification Name>,
{SMSFLAG} = <SMS Flag>,
{EMAILFLAG} = <Email Flag>,
{SMSTEMPLATENAME} = <SMS Template Name>,
{EMAILTEMPLATENAME} = <EMAIL Template Name>,
{SENDINGINTERVALRESTRICTION} = <Sending Interval Restriction>,
{SENDINGINTERVAL} = <Sending Interval>,
{UNIQUEKEY} = <Unique Key>,
{MTRSWITCH} = <Multi-template Restrict Switch>,
{SOAPFLAG} = <SOAP Flag>,
{SOAPTEMPLATENAME} = <SOAP Template Name>;
Example:
ADD NOTIFICATION: NOTIFICATIONNAME= "abcd", SMSFLAG = Yes,
SMSTEMPLATENAME= "SMS template", EMAILFLAG = No,
SENDINGINTERVALRESTRICTION= Yes, SENDINGINTERVAL= Weekly,
UNIQUEKEY= "Quota.QuotaStatus", DESCRIPTION= "abcd notification.";
7.1.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

12436: The object dictionary does not exist
90107: The Notification already exists
90121: Please choose one between SMS and EMAIL
90177: The associated short message template does not exist
90178: The associated email template does not exist
90179: The associated short message and email templates do not exist
94228: The object instance does not exist.
98334: The related template for SOAP notification does not exist
7.2 Modify Notification (MOD NOTIFICATION)

MOD NOTIFICATION is used to modify a notification by using a short message or email.

Value Range
1. NOTIFICATI Notification This parameter specifies the name String 1-32 M

ONNAME Name of a notification to be modified.
2. SMSFLAG SMS Flag This parameter specifies the short Enumerated Yes, O
message template to be added. No
3. EMAILFLA Email Flag This parameter specifies the email Enumerated Yes, O
G notification to be added. No
4. SMSTEMPL SMS This parameter specifies the short String 1-32 C
ATENAME Template message template used when a
Name notification is sent by using a
short message. This parameter
must be specified when SMS
Flag is set to Yes.

Copyright Huawei

Value Range
5. EMAILTEM EMAIL This parameter specifies the email String 1-32 C

PLATENAM Template template used when a notification
E Name is sent by using an email. This
Email Flag is set to Yes.
6. SENDINGIN Sending This parameter specifies whether Enumerated Yes O
TERVALRE Interval to stop sending the notification No
STRICTION Restriction to a subscriber for a period to
prevent a large number of
repeated notifications in a short
period
7. SENDINGIN Sending This parameter specifies the Enumerated Daily C
TERVAL Interval interval for sending a repeated Weekly
notification to the subscriber. This
parameter must be specified when Monthly
Sending Interval Restriction is Quota Cycle
set to Yes. Account
Cycle
8. UNIQUEKE Unique Key This parameter specifies the String 1-65 C
Y object attribute based on which
the UPCC restricts the sending of
a notification. This parameter
must be specified when Sending
Interval Restriction is set to Yes.
9. OBJECTINS Object This parameter specifies the name string 1-32 C
TANCE Instance of a quota or accumulation. This
Sending Interval is Quota Cycle
or Unique Key is QuotaStatus,
QuotaComsumption,
QuotaBalance, or QuotaValue.
10. DESCRIPTI Description This parameter provides String 1-256 O

ON additional information about the
notification
11. MTRSWITC Multi- Control if notification restrict Enumerated YesNo O
H template over multiple template is allowed
Restrict or not.
Switch
12. SOAPFLAG SOAP Flag This parameter specifies whether Enumerated Yes O
the SOAP message template is to No
be added.

Copyright Huawei

Value Range
13. SOAPTEMP SOAP This parameter specifies the String 1-32 C

LATENAME Template SOAP message template used
Name when a notification is sent by
using a SOAP message. This
SOAP Flag is set to Yes.
Notification Name must be the same as an existing notification name.

Before adding a notification, you must add a short message template or email
template.
A maximum of 2048 notifications can be configured in the system.
The change takes effect when you establish an IP-CAN session for the next time if
the value of SMS or EMAIL is changed.
SMS and EMAIL configured on the notification query page are associated with
only the service. If either SMS or EMAIL is not selected for a subscriber using this
service, the UPCC does not send a notification to the subscriber by using a short
message or email.
Attribute IPSession. TDFApplicationIdentifier cannot be selected as Unique Key.

[MOD]
NOTIFICATION:
{SMSFLAG} = <SMS Flag>,
{EMAILFLAG} = <Email Flag>,
{SMSTEMPLATENAME} = <SMS Template Name>,
{EMAILTEMPLATENAME} = <EMAIL Template Name>,
{SENDINGINTERVALRESTRICTION} = <Sending Interval Restriction>,
{SENDINGINTERVAL} = <Sending Interval>,
{UNIQUEKEY} = <Unique Key>,
{MTRSWITCH} = <Multi-template Restrict Switch>,
{SOAPFLAG} = <SOAP Flag>,
{SOAPTEMPLATENAME} = <SOAP Template Name>;
Example:

Copyright Huawei
MOD NOTIFICATION: NOTIFICATIONNAME= "abcd", SMSFLAG = Yes,

SMSTEMPLATENAME= "SMS template", SENDINGINTERVALRESTRICTION= Yes,
SENDINGINTERVAL= Weekly, UNIQUEKEY= "Quota.QuotaBalance", DESCRIPTION=
"abcd notification.";
7.2.4 Result
12436: The object dictionary does not exist
90108: The Notification does not exist
90121: Please choose one between SMS and EMAIL
90177: The associated short message template does not exist
90178: The associated email template does not exist
90179: The associated short message and email templates do not exist
90193: The notification has been associated with an quota item and the type of interval
cannot be updated to account cycle
90194: The notification has been associated with an account item and the type of interval
cannot be updated to quota cycle
98334: The related template for SOAP notification does not exist
7.3 Delete Notification (RMV NOTIFICATION)

RMV NOTIFICATION is used to delete a notification.

Copyright Huawei

Type Value
Range
1. NOTIFICATIONNAME Notification This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

Name name of a notification to be
deleted
Notification Name must be the same as an existing notification name.

[RMV]
NOTIFICATION:
{NOTIFICATIONNAME} = <Notification Name>;
Example:
RMV NOTIFICATION: NOTIFICATIONNAME = "abcd";
7.3.4 Result
90109: The Notification is associated with a Rule
90160: The Notification is associated with an Account
90161: The Notification is associated with a Quota
90162: The Notification is associated with a Service
90167: The notification is associated with a service package and cannot be deleted

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Rating ManagementRating Management
8 Rating Management
8.1 Add Rating (ADD RATING)

ADD RATING is used to add a rating.

Type Value Range
1. RATINGNAME Rating This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

Name name of a charging rate to be
added.
2. MONITORKEY Monitor This parameter specifies a Number 0-2147483645 M
Key monitor key carried when the
policy and charging
enforcement function (PCEF)
reports information about a
flow to the UPCC.
3. PRICE Price This parameter specifies the String 0-2147483645 M
price in the currency unit for
settlement.
4. VOLUME Volume This parameter specifies the Number 1-500000 M
(KB) volume used to calculate the
charging rate.
5. EXCHANGERATE Exchange This parameter specifies the String 1-13 M
Rate exchange rate between the
currency used for settlement
and the currency used by an
account.
the charging rate.

Copyright Huawei
Rating Name cannot be the same as an existing rating name.

The PCEF includes the monitor key when the PCEF reports the data volume of a subscriber to the
UPCC. The UPCC verifies whether the delivered monitor key matches the monitor key associated
with the rating configured in the corresponding rule. If they match, the UPCC converts the data
volume to the amount of money charged to the subscriber. If they do not match, the data volume is
free of charge.
A maximum of 256 ratings can be configured in the system.
The values of Price and Exchange Rate are floating-point numbers with a maximum of four
decimal numbers. "Invalid parameter" is displayed if the value is set to a number with more than
four decimal numbers.
Price, Exchange Rate, and Volume specify the value of the charging rate. The formula for
calculating the charging rate is as follows:
Charging rate = Price x Exchange Rate/Volume
For example, if Price is 0.5 in the unit of currency using by the account, Exchange rate is 5, and
Volume is 1000 KB, the charging rate is 0.0025/KB in the unit of currency using by the account.

[ADD]
RATING:
{RATINGNAME} = <Rating Name>,
{MONITORKEY} = <Monitor Key>,
{PRICE} = <Price>,
{VOLUME} = <Volume>,
{EXCHANGERATE}=<Exchange Rate>
Example:
ADD RATING: RATINGNAME= "abcd", MONITORKEY= 1, PRICE = "0.5", VOLUME =
1000, EXCHANGERATE = "100", DESCRIPTION= "abcd rating.";
8.1.4 Result
90110: The Rating already exists

Copyright Huawei
8.2 Modify Rating (MOD RATING)

MOD RATING is used to modify a rating.

Type Value Range
1. RATINGNAME Rating This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

Name name of a rating to be
modified
2. MONITORKEY Monitor This parameter specifies the Number 0-2147483645 O
Key monitor key carried when the
PCEF reports information
about a flow to the UPCC.
3. PRICE Price This parameter specifies String 1-15 O
specifies the price in the
currency unit for settlement
4. VOLUME Volume This parameter specifies Number 1-500000 O
(KB) volume used to calculate the
charging rate.
5. EXCHANGERATE Exchange This parameter specifies String 1-13 O
Rate specifies the exchange rate
between the currency used for
settlement and the currency
used by an account.
the charging rate.
Rating Name must be the same as an existing rating name.

[MOD]
RATING:

Copyright Huawei
{PRICE} = <Price>,
{VOLUME} = <Volume>,
{EXCHANGERATE}=<Exchange Rate>,
Example:
MOD RATING: RATINGNAME= "abcd", MONITORKEY= 1, PRICE = "0.5", VOLUME =
100, EXCHANGERATE = "100", DESCRIPTION= "abcd rating.";
8.2.4 Result
90111: The Rating does not exist
8.3 Delete Rating (RMV RATING)

RMV RATING is used to delete a rating.

Type Value Range
1. RATINGNAME Rating This parameter specifies the name String 1-32 M

Name of a rating to be deleted
Rating Name must be an existing rating name.

[RMV]

Copyright Huawei
RATING:
{RATINGNAME } = <Rating Name>;
Example:
RMV RATING: RATINGNAME = "abcd";
8.3.4 Result
90112: The Rating is associated with a Rule

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Rule ManagementRule Management
9 Rule Management
9.1 Add Rule (ADD RULE)

ADD RULE is used to add a rule.

Range
1. RULENAME Rule Name This parameter specifies String 1-32 M

the name of a rule. The
parameter must be
specified and cannot be
named in Chinese.
2. OPERATION Operation This parameter specifies Enumerated Change Rule C
the type of an operation to Install Rule
be performed. The
parameter is invalid if Remove Rule
Type is set to Default Stop Service
Bearer QoS or Non-PCC. Change
Service
Term IP-CAN
Session

Copyright Huawei

Range
3. TYPE Type This parameter specifies Enumerated Predefined O

the type of the rule. The Predefined
parameter is valid only Group
when Operation is set to
Change Rule or Install Dynamic
Rule or Remove Rule. Default
Bearer QoS
Non-PCC
Predefined
ADC
4. CONDITIONG Condition This parameter specifies String 1-32 O
ROUPNAME Group Name the conditions for a rule to
take effect.
5. ACTIONGRO Action Group This parameter specifies String 1-32 C
UPNAME Name the actions for a rule to
take effect. The parameter
is valid only when
Operation is set to
Change Rule or Install
Rule and it must be
specified if Type is set to
Dynamic or Default
Bearer QoS.
6. SERVICEFLO Service Flow This parameter specifies String 1-32 C
WNAME Name the service flows for a rule
to take effect. The
parameter is valid only
Rule.
7. PREDEFINED Predefined This parameter specifies String 1-64 C
NAME Name the name of a predefined
rule, the same as that
configured on the peer
PCEF. The parameter is
valid only when Operation
is set to Change Rule or
Install Rule or Remove
Rule and Type is set to
Predefined , Predefined
Group or Predefined
ADC.
8. NOTIFICATIO Notification This parameter specifies String 1-32 C
NNAME Name the name of a notification
associated with a rule.

Copyright Huawei

Range
9. RATINGNAM Rating Name This parameter specifies String 1-32 C

E the charging rate associated
with a rule. The parameter
is valid only when
Operation is set to
Rule.
10. PRECEDENC Precedence This parameter specifies Number 0-2147483645 C
E the priority of the rule for
enforcement. The
when Type is set to
Dynamic or Default
Bearer QoS. The default
value is 0.
11. DESTINATIO Destination This parameter specifies Number 0-16 C
NPCEF PCEF the PCEF to which the
current rules are to be
delivered. The parameter is
invalid if Operation is set
to Stop Service or Change
Service.
12. SERVICENA Service Name This parameter specifies String 1-32 C
ME the name of the service to
be switched to. The
Change Service.
13. VOLUMEUSA Volume Usage This parameter specifies Enumerated Yes C
GEROUNDIN Rounding whether to enable the No
G volume usage rounding
function. The parameter is
valid only when Operation
is set to Change Rule or
Install Rule.
14. ROUNDINGU Rounding Unit This parameter specifies Number 1-10240 C
NIT the unit for rounding of the
volume usage. The
when Volume Usage
Rounding is set to Yes.
The default value is 1.

Copyright Huawei

Range
15. ROUNDINGT Rounding This parameter specifies Number 0-1024 C

HRESHOLD Threshold(byte the threshold for volume *ROUNDINGU
s) usage rounding. The NIT - 1
when Volume Usage
Rounding is set to Yes.
The default value is 0.
16. EDR EDR This parameter specifies Enumerated OFF C
whether the UPCC delivers ON
an EDR to the PCEF when
the UPCC delivers the rule.
17. DESCRIPTIO Description This parameter provides String 1-256 O
N additional information
about the rule.
18. RELATION Relation This parameter specifies Enumerated AND O
the logic relation in OR
condition groups of the
Rule. Default value:
AND
19. DELAYTIME Delay Time This parameter specifies Number 0-1440 O
the Rule need delay and the
delay time.
20. ACTIONGRO Action Group This parameter specifies String 1-32 C
UPNAMEDUR Name During the actions for a rule to
INGDELAY Delay take effect during delay
time. The parameter is
valid only when Delay
Time is set to a valid value
and it must be specified if
Type is set to Dynamic or
Default Bearer QoS.
21. PREDEFINED Predefined This parameter specifies String 1-64 C
NAMEDURIN Name During the name of a predefined
GDELAY Delay rule during delay time, the
same as that configured on
the peer PCEF. The
when Delay Time is set to
a valid value and Type is
set to Predefined or
Predefined Group.
22. ACTIVATION Activation This parameter specifies Number 01440 O
TCYCLE Cycle the Rule need timed
activation and the timing
length

Copyright Huawei

Range
23. TRIGGER Trigger This parameter specifies String 132 C

the recalculate active time
when receive the
configuration trigger.
Supported triggers:
Redirection
ServiceFlowDetection
24. NOTIFICATIO Notification This parameter specifies Enumerated SELF O
NRECEIVER Receiver the receiver of the GROUP
notification
SELF+GROUP
Default :SELF
Rule Name cannot be the same as an existing rule name.

A maximum of 3,072 rules can be configured in the system.
The restriction on parameters is as follows:
If Operation is set to Change Rule, Install Rule, Remove Rule or Term IP-Can
Session, Destination PCEF is displayed.
If Operation is set to Change Rule or Install Rule and Type is set to Dynamic or
Default Bearer QoS, Precedence is displayed.
If Operation is set to Change Service, only Service Name (mandatory),
Condition Group, Notification Name, EDR, and Description are displayed.
If Operation is set to Stop Service, only Service Name, Condition Group,
Notification Name, EDR, and Description are displayed.
If Operation is set to Term IP-Can Session, only Condition Group, Notification
Name, Destination PCEF, EDR, and Description are displayed.
If Operation is set to Change Rule or Install Rule, the restriction on
parameters is as follows:
When Type is set to Predefined, Predefined Name (mandatory) is displayed.
When Type is set to Predefined Group, Predefined Group Name
(mandatory) is displayed.
When Type is set to Default Bearer QoS, only Name, Action Group,
Precedence, Destination PCEF, Volume Usage Rounding, EDR, and
Description are displayed.
When Type is set to Non-PCC, only Action Group, Notification, Rating,
Destination PCEF, Volume Usage Rounding, EDR, and Description are
displayed.
If Operation is set to Remove Rule, only Name, Type, Predefined Name,
Notification Name, Destination PCEF, and Description are displayed.
If Operation is set to Remove Rule, Type must be set to Predefined or
Predefined Name or Predefined ADC.

Copyright Huawei
When Type is set to Predefined or Predefined ADC, Predefined Name

In the Operation parameter, the Term IP-CAN Session value has the highest
priority and takes precedence over a mutex group. As long as a rule of the Term
IP-CAN Session type is matched among multiple services subscribed by a
subscriber, the session of the subscriber is unconditionally terminated,
regardless of whether the other rules take effect.
When Type is set to Predefined ADC, Action Group and Sevice Flow are hidden.
The Trigger is valid only if Activation cycle is set to a value ranging from 1 to 1440.
Delay Time is mutually exclusive with Activation cycle.

[ADD]
RULE:
{RULENAME} = <Rule Name>,
{OPERATION} = <Operation>,
{TYPE} = <Type>,
{PREDEFINEDNAME} = <Predefined Name>,
{PRECEDENCE} = <Precedence>,
{DESTINATIONPCEF} = <Destination PCEF>,
{SERVICENAME} = <Service Name>,
{VOLUMEUSAGEROUNDING} = <Volume Usage Rounding>,
{ROUNDINGUNIT} = <Rounding Unit>,
{ROUNDINGTHRESHOLD} = < Rounding Threshold(bytes)>,
{EDR}= <EDR>,
{RELATION} = <Relation>,
{DELAYTIME}=<Delay Time>,
{ACTIONGROUPNAMEDURINGDELAY}=<Action Group Name During Delay>,
{PREDEFINEDNAMEDURINGDELAY}=<Predefined Name During Delay>,
{ACTIVATIONTCYCLE}=<Activation Cycle>,

Copyright Huawei
{TRIGGER}=<Trigger>,
{NOTIFICATIONRECEIVER}=<Notification Receiver>;
Example:
ADD RULE:RULENAME="25611_0104_R02",OPERATION=Change
Rule,TYPE=Predefined,CONDITIONGROUPNAME="25611_0104_CG02",ACTIONGROU
PNAME="25611_0104_AG01",PREDEFINEDNAME="BBBB",VOLUMEUSAGEROUND
ING=No,EDR=OFF,RELATION=AND,DELAYTIME=300,
PREDEFINEDNAMEDURINGDELAY="BBBBDELAY";
9.1.4 Result
5002: Flow control started
12304: The service does not exist
94222: The destination PCEF does not exist
94267: The value of Rounding Threshold cannot exceed 1024*(value of Rounding Unit)-
1
94573: The parameters DELAYTIME and ACTIVATIONTCYCLE configuration
conflicts
9.2 Modify Rule (MOD RULE)

MOD RULE is used to modify the information about a rule.

Copyright Huawei

. Range
1. RULENA Rule This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

ME Name name of a rule to be modified.
The parameter must be specified
and cannot be named in
Chinese.
2. OPERATIO Operation This parameter specifies the Enumerated Change Rule M
N type of an operation to be Install Rule
performed. The parameter is
invalid if Type is set to Default Remove Rule
Bearer QoS or Non-PCC. Stop Service
Change Service
Term IP-CAN
Session
3. TYPE Type This parameter specifies the Enumerated Predefined M
type of the rule. The parameter Predefined
is valid only when Operation is Group
set to Change Rule or Install
Rule or Remove Rule. Dynamic
Default Bearer
QoS
Non-PCC
Predefined
ADC
4. ACTIONG Action This parameter specifies the String 1-32 C
ROUPNA Group actions for a rule to take effect.
ME Name The parameter is valid only
Change Rule or Install Rule
and it must be specified if Type
is set to Dynamic or Default
Bearer QoS.
5. SERVICEF Service This parameter specifies the String 1-32 C
LOWNAM Flow service flows for a rule to take
E Name effect. The parameter is valid
only when Operation is set to
Change Rule or Install Rule.

Copyright Huawei

. Range
6. PREDEFIN Predefined This parameter specifies the String 1-64 C

EDNAME Name name of a predefined rule, the
same as that configured on the
peer PCEF. The parameter is
valid only when Operation is
set to Change Rule or Install
Rule or Remove Rule and Type
is set to Predefined ,
Predefined Group or
Predefined ADC.
7. NOTIFICA Notificatio This parameter specifies the String 1-32 C
TIONNAM n Name name of a notification
E associated with a rule.
8. RATINGN RATING This parameter specifies the String 1-32 C
AME Name charging rate associated with a
rule. The parameter is valid only
Change Rule or Install Rule.
9. PRECEDE Precedenc This parameter specifies the Number 0-2147483645 C
NCE e priority of the rule for
enforcement. The parameter is
valid only when Type is set to
Dynamic or Default Bearer
QoS. The default value is 0.
10. DESTINAT Destinatio This parameter specifies the Number 0-16 C
IONPCEF n PCEF PCEF to which the current rules
are to be delivered. The
parameter is invalid if
Operation is set to Stop
Service or Change Service.
11. SERVICEN Service This parameter specifies the String 1-32 C
AME Name name of the service to be
switched to. The parameter is
valid only when Operation is
set to Change Service.
12. VOLUME Volume This parameter specifies Enumerated Yes C
USAGERO Usage whether to enable the volume No
UNDING Rounding usage rounding function. The
Operation is set to Change
Rule or Install Rule.
13. ROUNDIN Rounding This parameter specifies the unit Number 1-10240 C
GUNIT Unit for volume usage rounding. The
Volume Usage Rounding is set
to Yes. The default value is 1.

Copyright Huawei

. Range
14. ROUNDIN Rounding This parameter specifies the Number 0-1024 * C

GTHRESH Threshold threshold for volume usage ROUNDINGUNIT
OLD (bytes) rounding. The parameter is valid -1
only when Volume Usage
Rounding is set to Yes. The
default value is 0.
15. EDR EDR This parameter specifies Enumerated OFF O
whether the UPCC delivers an ON
EDR when delivering the rule.
16. DESCRIPT Descriptio This parameter provides String 1-256 O
ION n additional information about the
rule.
17. RELATION Relation This parameter specifies the Enumerated AND O
logic relation in condition OR
groups of the Rule.
Default value:
AND
18. DELAYTI Delay This parameter specifies the Number 0-1440 O
ME Time Rule need delay and the delay
time.
19. ACTIONG Action This parameter specifies the String 1-32 C
ROUPNA Group actions for a rule to take effect
MEDURIN Name during delay time. The
GDELAY During parameter is valid only when
Delay Delay Time is set to a valid
value and it must be specified if
Type is set to Dynamic or
Default Bearer QoS.
20. PREDEFIN Predefined This parameter specifies the String 1-64 C
EDNAME Name name of a predefined rule during
DURINGD During delay time, the same as that
ELAY Delay configured on the peer PCEF.
The parameter is valid only
when Delay Time is set to a
valid value and Type is set to
Predefined or Predefined
Group.
21. ACTIVATI Activation This parameter specifies the Number 01440 O
ONTCYCL Cycle Rule need timed activation and
E the timing length

Copyright Huawei

. Range
22. TRIGGER Trigger This parameter specifies the String 132 C

recalculate active time when
receive the configuration
trigger.
Supported triggers:
Redirection
ServiceFlowDetection
23. NOTIFICA Notificatio This parameter specifies the Enumerated SELF O
TIONREC n Receiver receiver of the notification GROUP
EIVER
SELF+GROUP
Default :SELF
Rule Name must be the same as an existing rule name.

A maximum of 3,072 rules can be configured in the system.
In a CCA or RAR message, a maximum of 64 rules can be delivered or deleted.
The restriction on parameters is as follows:
If Operation is set to Change Rule, Install Rule, Remove Rule or Term IP-Can
Session, Destination PCEF is displayed.
If Operation is set to Change Rule or Install Rule and Type is set to Dynamic or
Default Bearer QoS, Precedence is displayed.
If Operation is set to Change Service, only Service Name (mandatory),
Condition Group, Notification Name, EDR, and Description are displayed.
If Operation is set to Stop Service, only Service Name, Condition Group,
Notification Name, EDR, and Description are displayed.
If Operation is set to Term IP-Can Session, only Condition Group, Notification
Name, Destination PCEF, EDR, and Description are displayed.
If Operation is set to Change Rule or Install Rule, the restriction on
parameters is as follows:
When Type is set to Predefined, Predefined Name (mandatory) is displayed.
When Type is set to Default Bearer QoS, only Name, Action Group,
Precedence, Destination PCEF, Volume Usage Rounding, EDR, and
Description are displayed.
When Type is set to Non-PCC, only Action Group, Notification, Rating,
Destination PCEF, Volume Usage Rounding, EDR, and Description are
displayed.
If Operation is set to Remove Rule, only Name, Type, Predefined Name,
Notification Name, Destination PCEF, and Description are displayed.
If Operation is set to Remove Rule, Type must be set to Predefined or
Predefined Name or Predefined ADC.

Copyright Huawei
When Type is set to Predefined or Predefined ADC, Predefined Name

When Type is set to Predefined ADC, Predefined Name (mandatory) is
displayed, Action Group and Service Flow are hidden.
The Trigger is valid only if Activation cycle is set to a value ranging from 1 to
1440.
Delay Time is mutually exclusive with Activation cycle.

[MOD]
RULE:
{RULENAME} = <Rule Name>,
{OPERATION} = <Operation>,
{TYPE} =<Type>,
{PREDEFINEDNAME} = <Predefined Name>,
{VOLUMEUSAGEROUNDING} = <Volume Usage Rounding>,
{ROUNDINGUNIT} = <Rounding Unit>,
{ROUNDINGTHRESHOLD} = <Rounding Threshold(bytes)>,
{EDR}= <EDR>,
{RELATION} = <Relation>,
{DELAYTIME}=<Delay Time>,
{ACTIONGROUPNAMEDURINGDELAY}=<Action Group Name During Delay>,
{PREDEFINEDNAMEDURINGDELAY}=<Predefined Name During Delay>,
{ACTIVATIONTCYCLE}=<Activation Cycle>,
{TRIGGER}=<Trigger>,
{NOTIFICATIONRECEIVER}=<Notification Receiver>;

Copyright Huawei
Example:
MOD RULE:RULENAME="25611_0104_R02",OPERATION=Change
Rule,TYPE=Predefined,CONDITIONGROUPNAME="25611_0104_CG02",ACTIONGROU
PNAME="25611_0104_AG01",PREDEFINEDNAME="BBBB",VOLUMEUSAGEROUND
ING=No,EDR=OFF,RELATION=AND,DELAYTIME=30,
PREDEFINEDNAMEDURINGDELAY="CCCCDELAY";
9.2.4 Result
12450: The rule does not exist
94222: The destination PCEF dos not exist
94267: The value of Rounding Threshold cannot exceed 1024*(value of Rounding Unit)-
1
94573: The parameters DELAYTIME and ACTIVATIONTCYCLE configuration
conflicts
9.3 Delete Rule (RMV RULE)

RMV RULE is used to delete a rule data record.

No. ID Name Description Data Value or Value Type
Type Range
1. RULENAME Rule This parameter specifies the name of String 1-32 M

Name a rule to be deleted.

Copyright Huawei

[RMV]
RULE:
{RULENAME} = <Rule Name>;
Example:
RMV RULE: RULENAME = "abcd";
9.3.4 Result
12449: The rule is associated with a policy
9.4 ADD Rule Condition Group <ADD

RULECONDITIONGROUP>
ADD RULECONDITIONGROUP is used to add a condition group for a rule. This
command name can be ADD RULECONDITONGROUP too.

Copyright Huawei

Value
Range
1. RULENAME Rule Name This String 1-32 M

parameter
specifies the
name of a
policy. The
parameter
must be
specified and
cannot be
named in
Chinese.
2. CONDITION Condition This String 1-32 M
GROUPNAM Group parameter
E Name specifies the
conditions for
a rule to take
effect.

Each rule can be configured with a maximum of 5 condition groups.

[ADD]
RULECONDITIONGROUP:
{ RULENAME } = <Rule Name>,
{ CONDITIONGROUPNAME } =<Condition Group Name>;
Example :
ADD RULECONDITIONGROUP: RULENAME = "abcd", CONDITIONGROUPNAME=
"Congrp-1";
9.4.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

12440:The condition group already exists
12441:The condition group does not exist
12450:The rule does not exist
94508:The number of condition groups exceeds the maximum value (5)
9.5 Delete Rule Condition Group <RMV

RULECONDITIONGROUP>
RMV RULECONDITIONGROUP is used to delete a condition group for a rule. This
command name can be RMV RULECONDITONGROUP too.

Value
Range
1. RULENAME Rule Name This String 1-32 M

parameter
specifies the
name of a
policy. The
parameter
must be
specified and
cannot be
named in
Chinese.
2. CONDITION Condition This String 1-32 M
GROUPNAM Group parameter
E Name specifies the
conditions for
a rule to take
effect.

Copyright Huawei

[RMV]
RULECONDITIONGROUP:
{ RULENAME } = <Rule Name>,
{ CONDITIONGROUPNAME } =<Condition Group Name>;
Example :
RMV RULECONDITIONGROUP: RULENAME = "abcd", CONDITIONGROUPNAME=
"Congrp-1";
9.5.4 Result
12441:The condition group does not exist
12450:The rule does not exist
94520: The condition group does not exist in the rule

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Policy ManagementPolicy Management
10 Policy Management
10.1 Add Policy (ADD POLICY)

ADD POLICY is used to add a policy.

Value
Range
1. POLICYNAME Policy This parameter specifies the name String 1-32 M

Name of a policy. The parameter cannot
be named in Chinese.
2. TRIGGERNAME Trigger This parameter specifies the event String 1-32 O
Name trigger of a policy.
additional information about the
policy.
Policy Name cannot be the same as an existing policy name.

A maximum of 1,024 policies can be configured in the system. Each policy can be configured with a
maximum of 64 rules.

[ADD]
POLICY:
{POLICYNAME} = <Policy Name>,

Copyright Huawei
{TRIGGERNAME} = <Trigger Name>,

Example:
ADD POLICY: POLICYNAME = "abcd", TRIGGERNAME = "IPCANSessionEstablish",
DESCRIPTION = "abcd Policy";
10.1.4 Result
12427: The policy already exists
12429: The trigger does not exist
10.2 Modify Policy (MOD POLICY)

MOD POLICY is used to modify the information about a policy.

Value
Range
1. POLICYNAME Policy This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

Name name of a policy to be modified.
additional information about the
policy
Policy Name must be the same as an existing policy name.

Copyright Huawei

[MOD]
POLICY:
Example:
MOD POLICY: POLICYNAME = "abcd", DESCRIPTION = "abcdb Policy";
10.2.4 Result
12426: The Policy does not exist
10.3 Delete Policy (RMV POLICY)

RMV POLICY is used to delete a policy data record.

Type Value Range
1. POLICYNAME Policy This parameter specifies the name of String 1-32 M

Name a policy to be deleted.
Policy Name must be the same as an existing policy name.

Copyright Huawei

[RMV]
POLICY:
{POLICYNAME} = <Policy Name>;
Example:
RMV POLICY: POLICYNAME = "abcd";
10.3.4 Result
12456: The policy is associated with a service
10.4 Add Policy Trigger (ADD POLICYTRIGGER)

ADD POLICYTRIGGER is used to add a trigger for a policy.

Type Range

Name name of a policy. The parameter
cannot be named in Chinese.
2. TRIGGERNAME Trigger This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M
Name event trigger of a policy.

Copyright Huawei
Policy Name must be an existing policy name.

Trigger Name must be an existing trigger name.
Each policy can be configured with 10 triggers.

[ADD]
POLICYTRIGGER:
{ POLICYNAME } = < Policy Name >,
{ TRIGGERNAME } = < Trigger Name >;
Example :
ADD POLICYTRIGGER:POLICYNAME="Policy3",TRIGGERNAME="
IPCANSessionEstablish";
10.4.4 Result
90153: The trigger type does not match the rule type
94506: The trigger already exists
94507: The number of triggers exceeds the maximum value (10)
10.5 Delete Policy Trigger (RMV POLICYTRIGGER)

RMV POLICYTRIGGER is used to delete a trigger for a policy.

Copyright Huawei

Type Value Range
1. POLICYNAME Policy This parameter specifies the name of a String 1-32 M

Name policy. The parameter cannot be
named in Chinese.
2. TRIGGERNAME Trigger This parameter specifies the event String 1-32 M
Name trigger of a policy.
Policy Name must be defined in the system.

Trigger Name must be an existing trigger name.

[RMV]
POLICYTRIGGER:
{ POLICYNAME } = < Policy Name >,
{ TRIGGERNAME } = < Trigger Name >;
Example :
RMV POLICYTRIGGER:POLICYNAME="Policy3",TRIGGERNAME="
IPCANSessionEstablish";
10.5.4 Result
94521:The trigger does not exist in the policy

Copyright Huawei
10.6 Add Policy Rule (ADD POLICYRULE)

ADD POLICYRULE is used to add a rule for a policy.

Type Range

Name name of a policy.
2. RULENAME Rule This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M
Name name of a rule.
Policy Name must be an existing policy name.

A maximum of 1,024 policies and 3072 rules can be configured in the system. Each policy can be
configured with a maximum of 64 rules.
Different policies can be configured with the same rules.

[ADD]
POLICYRULE:
Example:
ADD POLICYRULE: POLICYNAME="Policy3", RULENAME= "Rule7";
10.6.4 Result
12426: The Policy does not exist.
12450: The rule does not exist.
12488: The number of rules in the policy exceeds the maximum value (64).

Copyright Huawei
90153: The trigger type does not match the rule type
94225: The rule has been associated with the policy.
10.7 Delete Policy Rule (RMV POLICYRULE)

RMV POLICYRULE is used to delete a rule data record about a policy.

Type Value Range
1. POLICYNAME Policy This parameter specifies the name of a String 1-32 M

Name policy to be modified.
2. RULENAME Rule This parameter specifies the name of a String 1-32 M
Name rule to be deleted from the policy.
Policy Name and Rule Name must be defined in the system, and rules must have been added to the
policy.

[RMV]
POLICYRULE:
Example:
RMV POLICYRULE: POLICYNAME = "abcd", RULENAME = "rule";
10.7.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

94238: The rule does not exist in the policy

Copyright Huawei
Service Provider ManagementService Provider
11 Service Provider Management
11.1 Add Service Provider (ADD SP)

ADD SP is used to add a service provider.

Type Value
Range
1. SPNAME SP Name This parameter specifies the name String 1-32 M

of a service provider.
2. DESCRIPTION SP This parameter provides additional String 1-256 O
Description information about the service
provider.
A maximum of 1024 service providers can be configured in the system.

[ADD]
SP:
{SPNAME} = <SP Name>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <SP Description>;
Example:
ADD SP: SPNAME = "abcd";

Copyright Huawei
11.1.4 Result
A code is displayed, indicating the operation result.
11.2 Modify Service Provider (MOD SP)

MOD SP is used to modify the information about a service provider.

Type Value
Range
1. SPNAME SP Name This parameter specifies the name of String 1-32 M

a service provider to be modified.
2. DESCRIPTION SP This parameter provides additional String 1-256 O
Description information about the service
provider.
The service provider named default1 cannot be modified.

[MOD]
SP:
{DESCRIPTION} = <SP Description>;

Copyright Huawei
Example:
MOD SP: SPNAME = "abcd", DESCRIPTION = "abcd";
11.2.4 Result
8217: This item cannot be configured
12308: The SP does not exist
11.3 Delete Service Provider (RMV SP)

RMV SP is used to delete a service provider.

Type Value Range
1. SPNAME SP This parameter specifies the name of a String 1-32 M

Name service provider to be deleted.
The service provider named default1 cannot be deleted.

[RMV]
SP:
{SPNAME} = <SP Name>;
Example:
RMV SP: SPNAME = "abcd";

Copyright Huawei
11.3.4 Result
8199: This item cannot be deleted
12309: The SP cannot be deleted because it is associated with a service
12381: The SP is associated with a subscriber
12400: The SP cannot be deleted because it is associated with a service package
12401: The SP cannot be deleted because it is associated with a mutex group

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Quota ManagementQuota Management
12 Quota Management
12.1 Add Quota (ADD QUOTA)

ADD QUOTA is used to add a quota.

Range
1. QUOTA Quota This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

NAME Name name of a quota.
2. QUOTA Quota This parameter specifies the Enumerated UPCC O
MANA Manager manager of a quota Pre-Sy
GER
Sy
Provisioning

Copyright Huawei

Range
3. DEFAU Default This parameter specifies the Enumerated None C

LTSTAT Status default status of a Sy quota Normal
US
Level1
Level2
Level3
Level4
Exhaust
Level5
Level6
Level7
Level8
Level9
Level10
Default value: None
4. QUOTA Quota Class This parameter specifies the Enumerated Volume C
CLASS criterion for measuring quota OnlineDuration
usage.
Duration
5. ACCUM Accumulati This parameter specifies the Enumerated Period C
ULATIO on Type range based on which the Session
NTYPE online duration is measured.
The parameter must be set to
Period if Quota Class is set
to Volume.
6. TYPE Type This parameter specifies the Enumerated Service Level C
type based on which the data Session Level
volume is reported and
measured. The parameter
must be set to Session Level
if Quota Class is set to
Online Duration.
7. MONIT Monitor This parameter specifies a Number 0-2147483645 C
ORKEY Key quota or an account. The
parameter is invalid if Quota
Class is set to Online
Duration. It is mandatory
when Quota Class is set to
Volume and TYPE is set to
Service Level. It is optional
Volume and TYPE is set to
Session Level or when
Quota Class is set to
Duration.

Copyright Huawei

Range
8. QUOTA Quota Value This parameter specifies the Number 1-2147483645 C

VALUE data volume of a quota.
9. QUOTA Quota Slice This parameter specifies the Number 1-100 C
SLICE percentage of the maximum
volume assigned each time
compared to the total volume
of a quota. The parameter is
invalid if Quota Class is set
to Online Duration.
10. DESTIN Destination This parameter specifies the Number 0-16 O
ATIONP PCEF PCEF to which the current
CEF quota is to be delivered. The
parameter is optional if
Volume or Duration, and it
cannot be specified if Quota
Duration.
11. NOTIFI Notification This parameter specifies the String 1-32 O
CATION notification to be sent when
the quota is reset.
12. RECHA Recharge This parameter specifies the String 1-32 O
RGENO Notification notification to be sent when
TIFICA the quota is Recharged.
TION
13. EDR EDR This parameter specifies Enumerated NotRecord M
whether the UPCC delivers RecordWhenVal
an EDR when the PCEF ueChange
delivers the quota usage.
RecordWhenStat
usChange
14. DESCRI Quota This parameter provides String 1-256 O
PTION Description additional information about
the quota.

Copyright Huawei

Range
15. BILLIN Billing This parameter specifies the Enumerated Calendar C

GCYCL Cycle Mode settlement mode of a quota. Customized
EMODE The parameter must be Cycle
specified if Quota
Manager is set to UPCC Subscriber
and Accumulation Type is Billing Cycle
set to Period, and it cannot Monthly Service
be specified if Quota Daily Service
Manager is set to UPCC
Provisioning
and Accumulation Type is
Assign
set to Session.
Not Reset
The parameter must be
specified too if Quota Set By Pre-Sy
Manager is set to Pre-Sy.
16. RESETT Reset Type This parameter specifies the Enumerated Day C
YPE type of reset cycle of a Week
quota. The parameter is valid
if Billing Cycle Mode is set Month
to Calendar or Provisioning
Assign, and it can be set to
Day or Month if Billing
Cycle Mode is set to
Provisioning Assign.
17. RESET Reset Day This parameter specifies the Enumerated Monday-Sunday C
DAY day on which the quota is
reset. The parameter is valid
if Billing Cycle Mode is set
to Calendar and Reset Type
is set to Week.
18. RESET Reset Date This parameter specifies the Enumerated 1-31, Effective Date C
DATE date on which the quota is
to Calendar and Reset Type
is set to Month.
19. RESETT Reset Time This parameter specifies the DateTime 8 C
IME time at which the quota is
to Calendar, or if Billing
Customized Cycle and
Reset Time Type is set to
Specific Time.

Copyright Huawei

Range
20. DAYS Days This parameter specifies the Number 1-365 C

days after which the quota is
reset. The parameter must be
specified only when Billing
Cycle Unit is set to DAY.
21. RESETT Reset Time This parameter specifies the Enumerated Start Time C
IMETY Type reset time type. The Specific Time
PE parameter is valid if Billing
Cycle Mode is set to Initial online
Customized Cycle and time
After the parameter settings,
this parameter cannot be
modified.
22. BILLIN Billing This parameter specifies the Datetime 8 C
GCYCL Cycle Time time at which the quota is
ETIME reset. The parameter is valid
to Subscriber Billing Cycle
or Monthly Service.
23. BALAN Balance This parameter specifies how Enumerated Reset C
CERES Reset to handle the unused quota at Cumulate
ETMET Method the reset time. The parameter
HOD is valid if Billing Cycle Cumulate After
Mode is set to Calendar, Recharge
Customized Cycle, Cumulate Based
Subscriber Billing Cycle, or on Remaining
Monthly Service. Quota
24. LEVEL1 Level1 This parameter specifies the Number 1-500000 O

quota usage at Level1.
25. LEVEL2 Level2 This parameter specifies the Number 1-500000 C
27. LEVEL4 Leve4 This parameter specifies the Number 1-500000 C

Copyright Huawei

Range

0 quota usage at Level10.
34. CUSTO CustomLev This parameter specifies the Number 1-500000 O
MLEVE el1 quota usage at
L1 CustomLevel1.
L2 CustomLevel2.
L3 CustomLevel3.
37. ISONEO One-Off This parameter specifies Enumerated No O
FF Quota whether the type of the Yes
Quota is one-off
Default value: No
38. SERVIC Service This parameter specifies the Number 0-2147483645 C
EIDENT Identifier service identifier
IFIER
39. CYCLE Cycle Unit This parameter specifies the Enumerated DAY C
UNIT Cycle Unit.The parameter is HOUR
optional only when Billing
Cycle Mode is set to Default value: DAY
Customized Cycle. After the
parameter settings, this
parameter cannot be
modified.
40. HOURS Hours This parameter specifies the Number 1-24 C
hours after which the quota
is reset. The parameter must
be specified only when
Billing Cycle Mode is set to
Cycle Unit is set to HOUR.
41. START Start Minue This parameter specifies the Number 0-59 O
MINUT start minute at which the Default value:0
E quota is reset. The parameter
must be specified only when
Cycle Unit is set to HOUR.

Copyright Huawei

Range
42. QUOTA Quota Slice This parameter specifies the Enumerated Percent C
SLICET Type Quota Slice Type. Value
YPE
Default value:
Percent
43. QUOTA Quota Slice This parameter specifies the Number 1-2147483645 C
SLICEV Value Quota Slice Value.
ALUE
44. CUMUL Cumulative This parameter specifies the Number 1-100 C
ATIVEP Percent percentage based on which the
ERCEN remaining quota is
T accumulated to the reset quota
when
BALANCERESETMETHO
D is set to Cumulate.
45. MAXC Max This parameter specifies the Number 0-2147483645 C

UMULA Cumulation maximum remaining quota of
TION Value the last period that can be
accumulated to the current
quota.
46. USERST User This parameter specifies Enumerated No O

ATUSA Status whether reset user status Yes
UTORE Automatic when quota resets.
SET Reset Default value: No
47. MKSTR Monitor This parameter specifies a String 1-32 C

ING Key quota or an account. The a string of 1 to 16
parameter is invalid if Quota characters which is
Class is set to Online composed of 0-9, a-
Duration. It is mandatory z and A-Z and -.
Volume and TYPE is set to Note1: The value
Service Level. It is optional 4294967295 and
when Quota Class is set to NULL are used to
Volume and TYPE is set to clear the monitor
Session Level or when key.
Quota Class is set to Note2: The specific
Duration. value 2147483647
is used as default
Monitoring-Key
when not config
MKSTRING for
the Quota of
Session Level. So,
cant config
MKSTRING to
the specific value
2147483647.

Copyright Huawei

Range
48. CUSTO Customer This Parameter specifies the String 1-32 O

MERST Attribute Quota customer attribute
RATTR
A maximum of 1024 quotas can be configured in the system.

The data volume assigned each time by the UPCC to the PCEF is determined by the quota slice and
threshold. The data volume cannot exceed the quota slice.
The settings of a quota can be updated even if it is associated with a service. The updated settings,
however, do not take effect until the current reset cycle for this associated service expires or until the
subscriber subscribes to this associated service again.
If HUAWEI GGSN or ALLOT-DPI serves as the peer PCEF, Monitor Key cannot be configured if
Type is set to Session Level.
If a subscriber who has set up a session is provided with a new service whose quota has the same
monitor key as that configured for the quota of a subscribed service, the UPCC does not deliver the
quota slice of the new service in an RAR message.
If the quotas provided to the subscriber have the same monitor key, the UPCC compares the quota
slice value with the difference between the threshold and consumption values, and delivers the
smaller value as the quota slice.
If the session quotas provided to the subscriber have different monitor keys, the UPCC uses the
quota with the smallest monitory key when delivering slices and deducting used data volumes from
the quota.
The value must increase from Level1 to Level10. The parameters Level1 to Level10 must be
configured in sequence. Level2 cannot be set if Level1 has not been set.
If the QUOTAMANAGER of the quota is Sy, Only DEFAULTSTATUS and DESCRIPTION can be
configured. If the QUOTAMANAGER of the quota is not Sy, DEFAULTSTATUS cannot be
configured.
QUOTASLICEVALUE is optional only when QUOTASLICETYPE is set to Value, and the
QUOTASLICEVALUE cant be more than QUOTAVALUE of the quota.
CUMULATIVEPERCENT and MAXCUMULATION are configurable when
BALANCERESETMETHOD is set to Cumulate.
Parameter MONITORKEY and MKSTRING cannot exist at the same time.

[ADD]
QUOTA:
{QUOTANAME} = <Quota Name>,
{QUOTAMANAGER} = <Quota Manager>,
{DEFAULTSTATUS} = <Default Status>,
{QUOTACLASS} = <Quota Class>,
{ACCUMULATIONTYPE} = <Accumulation Type>,
{TYPE} = <Type>,

Copyright Huawei
{QUOTAVALUE} = <Quota Value>,

{QUOTASLICE} = <Quota Slice>,
{NOTIFICATION} = <Notification>,
{EDR} = <EDR>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <Quota Description>,
{BILLINGCYCLEMODE} = <Billing Cycle Mode>,
{RESETTYPE} = <Reset type>,
{RESETDAY} = <Reset Day>,
{RESETDATE} = <Reset Date>,
{RESETTIME} = <Reset time>,
{DAYS} = <Days>,
{RESETTIMETYPE} = <Reset Time Type>,
{BILLINGCYCLETIME} = <Billing cycle time>,
{BALANCERESETMETHOD} =<Balance Reset Method>,
{LEVEL1} = <Level1>,
{CUSTOMLEVEL1} = <CustomLevel1>,
{CUSTOMLEVEL2} = <Customlevel2>,
{ISONEOFF}=<One-Off Quota>,
{SERVICEIDENTIFIER} = <Service Identifier>,
{CYCLEUNIT} = <Cycle Unit>,
{ HOURS} = <Hours>,
{STARTMINUTE} = <Start Minue>,

Copyright Huawei
{QUOTASLICETYPE} = <Quota Slice Type>,

{QUOTASLICEVALUE} = <Quota Slice Value>,
{CUMULATIVEPERCENT} = <Cumulative Percent>,
{MAXCUMULATION} = <Max Cumulation Value>,
{USERSTATUSAUTORESET} = <User Status Automatic Reset>,
{CUSTOMERSTRATTR} = <Customer Attribute> ;
Example:
ADD QUOTA: QUOTANAME = "abcd", QUOTAMANAGER=UPCC,QUOTACLASS =
Volume, ACCUMULATIONTYPE=Period, TYPE=Service Level, MONITORKEY = 1000,
QUOTAVALUE = 1000, QUOTASLICE = 10, EDR=NotRecord,DESCRIPTION="Quota1",
BILLINGCYCLEMODE = Calendar, RESETTYPE = Day, RESETTIME
=01&00&00,BALANCERESETMETHOD=Reset, LEVEL1=10, LEVEL2=20, LEVEL3=30,
LEVEL4=40, LEVEL5=50, LEVEL6=60, LEVEL7=70, LEVEL8=80, LEVEL9=90,
ISONEOFF=No, QUOTASLICETYPE=Percent,USERSTATUSAUTORESET=No;
12.1.4 Result
12423: Quota Service Identifier and Monitor Key already exist
90180: The interval cycle does not match the notification
94268: Threshold values cannot be duplicated
94582: The value of MONITORKEY can't set to a specific value.
12.2 Modify Quota (MOD QUOTA)

MOD QUOTA is used to modify the information about a quota.

Copyright Huawei

Range
1. QUOTANA Quota Name This parameter specifies String 1-32 M

ME the name of a quota to be
modified.
2. DEFAULTS Default This parameter specifies Enumerated None C
TATUS Status the default status of a Sy Normal
quota
Level1
Level2
Level3
Level4
Exhaust
Level5
Level6
Level7
Level8
Level9
Level10
3. QUOTAVA Quota Value This parameter specifies Number 1-2147483645 O
LUE the data volume of a
quota.
4. QUOTASLI Quota Slice This parameter specifies Number 1-100 C
CE the percentage of the
maximum volume
assigned each time
compared to the total
volume of a quota. The
parameter is invalid if
Online Duration.
5. DESTINAT Destination This parameter specifies Number 0-16 O
IONPCEF PCEF the PCEF to which the
current quota is to be
delivered. The parameter
is optional if Quota Class
is set to Volume or
Duration, and it cannot
be specified if Quota
Duration.
6. NOTIFICA Notification This parameter specifies String 1-32 O
TION the notification to be sent
when the quota is reset.

Copyright Huawei

Range
7. RECHARG Recharge This parameter specifies String 1-32 O

ENOTIFIC Notification the notification to be sent
ATION when the quota is
Recharged.
8. EDR EDR This parameter specifies Enumerated NotRecord O
whether the UPCC RecordWhenVa
delivers an EDR when the lueChange
PCEF delivers the quota RecordWhenStat
usage. usChange
9. DESCRIPT Quota This parameter provides String 1-256 O
ION Description additional information
about the quota.
10. RESETTYP Reset Type This parameter specifies Enumerated Day C
E the type of reset cycle of a Week
quota. The parameter is
valid if Billing Cycle Month
Mode is set to Calendar
or Provisioning Assign,
and it can be set to Day or
Month if Billing Cycle
Mode is set to
Provisioning Assign.
11. RESETDA Reset Day This parameter specifies Enumerated Monday-Sunday C
Y the day on which the
quota is reset. The
parameter is valid if
Billing Cycle Mode is set
to Calendar and Reset
Type is set to Week.
12. RESETDAT Reset Date This parameter specifies Enumerated 1-31, Effective Date C
E the date on which the
quota is reset. The
Type is set to Month.
13. RESETTIM Reset time This parameter specifies DateTime 8 C
E the time at which the
quota is reset. The
to Calendar, or if Billing
Reset Time Type is set to
Specific Time.

Copyright Huawei

Range
14. DAYS Days This parameter specifies Number 1-365 C

the days after which the
quota is reset. The
to Customized Cycle and
15. RESETTIM Reset Time This parameter specifies Enumerated Start Time C
ETYPE Type the reset time type. The Specific Time
parameter is mandatory if
Billing Cycle Mode is set Initial online
to Customized Cycle. time
16. BILLINGC Billing cycle This parameter specifies Datetime 8 C

YCLETIM time the time at which the
E quota is reset. The
to Subscriber Billing
Cycle or Monthly
Service.
17. BALANCE Balance This parameter specifies Enumerated Reset C
RESETME Reset how to handle the unused Cumulate
THOD Method quota at the reset time.
The parameter is valid if Cumulate After
Billing Cycle Mode is set Recharge
to Calendar, Customized Cumulate Based
Cycle, Subscriber Billing on Remaining
Cycle, or Monthly Quota
Service.
18. LEVEL1 Level1 This parameter specifies Number 1-500000 O
the quota usage at Level1.
21. LEVEL4 Leve4 This parameter specifies Number 1-500000 O

Copyright Huawei

Range

the quota usage at
Level10.
28. CUSTOML CustomLevel This parameter specifies Number 1-500000 O
EVEL1 1 the quota usage at
CustomLevel1.
CustomLevel2.
CustomLevel3.
31. SERVICEI Service This parameter specifies Number 0-2147483645 O
DENTIFIE Identifier the service identifier
R
32. TYPE Type This parameter specifies Enumerated Service Level C
the type based on which Session Level
the data volume is
reported and measured.
The parameter must be set
to Session Level if Quota
Duration.
33. MONITOR Monitor Key This parameter specifies a Number 0-2147483645, C
KEY quota or an account. The 4294967295(This
parameter is invalid if value is used to clear
Quota Class is set to the monitor key.)
Online Duration. It is
mandatory when Quota
Class is set to Volume
and TYPE is set to
Service Level. It is
optional when Quota
Class is set to Volume
and TYPE is set to
Session Level or when
Duration.

Copyright Huawei

Range
34. CYCLEUN Cycle Unit This parameter specifies Enumerated DAY C

IT the Cycle Unit.The HOUR
parameter is optional only
when Billing Cycle Mode
is set to Customized
Cycle. After the
parameter settings, this
parameter cannot be
modified.
35. HOURS Hours This parameter specifies Number 1-24 C
the hours after which the
quota is reset. The
Cycle and Cycle Unit is
set to HOUR.
36. STARTMIN Start Minue This parameter specifies Number 0-59 O
UTE the start minute at which
the quota is reset. The
Cycle and Cycle Unit is
set to HOUR.
37. QUOTASLI Quota Slice This parameter specifies Enumerated Percent C
CETYPE Type the Quota Slice Type. Value
Default value:
Percent
38. QUOTASLI Quota Slice This parameter specifies Number 1-2147483645 C
CEVALUE Value the Quota Slice Value.
39. CUMULAT Cumulative This parameter specifies Number 1-100 C
IVEPERCE Percent the percentage based on
NT which the remaining quota
is accumulated to the reset
quota when
BALANCERESETMET
HOD is set to Cumulate.
40. MAXCUM Max This parameter specifies Number 0-2147483645 C

ULATION Cumulation the maximum remaining
Value quota of the last period that
can be accumulated to the
current quota.

Copyright Huawei

Range
41. USERSTAT User Status This parameter specifies Enumerated No O

USAUTOR Automatic whether reset user Yes
ESET Reset status when quota
resets. Default value: No
42. BILLINGC Billing This parameter specifies Enumerated Calendar C

YCLEMOD Cycle Mode the settlement mode of a Customized
E quota. The parameter Cycle
cannot be specified if
Quota Manager is set to Subscriber
UPCC. Billing Cycle
The parameter may be Monthly Service
specified if Quota Daily Service
Manager is set to Pre-Sy Provisioning
and Billing Assign
Cycle Mode is set to Set Not Reset
By Pre-Sy.
Set By Pre-Sy
43. MKSTRIN Monitor Key This parameter specifies a String 1-32 C
G quota or an account. The a string of 1 to 16
parameter is invalid if characters which is
Quota Class is set to composed of 0-9, a-
Online Duration. It is z and A-Z and -.
mandatory when Quota
Class is set to Volume Note1: The value
and TYPE is set to 4294967295 and
Service Level. It is NULL are used to
optional when Quota clear the monitor
Class is set to Volume key.
and TYPE is set to Note2: The specific
Session Level or when value 2147483647
Quota Class is set to is used as default
Duration. Monitoring-Key
when not config
MKSTRING for
the Quota of
Session Level. So,
cant config
MKSTRING to
the specific value
2147483647.
44. CUSTOME Customer This Parameter specifies String 1-32 O
RSTRATTR Attribute the Quota customer
attribute

Copyright Huawei
Quota Class and Accumulation Type and Reset Time Type cannot be modified.
If the manager of the quota is Sy, Only DEFAULTSTATUS and DESCRIPTION parameters can be
modified. If the manager of the quota is not Sy, DEFAULTSTATUS parameters cannot be modified.
If the VRM_CLIMODIFYCTRL software parameter value is 0, Type and Monitor Key cannot be
modified.
If QUOTASLICETYPE is set to Percent, QUOTASLICE must be configured; if
QUOTASLICETYPE is set to Value, QUOTASLICEVALUE must be configured.
Parameter MONITORKEY and MKSTRING cannot exist at the same time.

[MOD]
{QUOTANAME} = <Quota Name>,
{DEFAULTSTATUS} = <Default Status>,
{QUOTAVALUE} = <Quota Value>,
{QUOTASLICE} = <Quota Slice>,
{EDR} = <EDR>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <Quota Description>,
{DAYS} = <Days>,
{BILLINGCYCLETIME} = <Billing Cycle Time>,
{BALANCERESETMETHOD} =<Balance Reset Method>,

Copyright Huawei
{SERVICEIDENTIFIER} = <Service Identifier>,
{ TYPE }=<Type>,
{ MONITORKEY }=<Monitor key>,
{CYCLEUNIT} = <Cycle Unit>,
{ HOURS} = <Hours>,
{STARTMINUTE} = <Start Minue>,
{QUOTASLICETYPE} = <Quota Slice Type>,
{QUOTASLICEVALUE} = <Quota Slice Value>,
{CUMULATIVEPERCENT} = <Cumulative Percent>,
{MAXCUMULATION} = <Max Cumulation Value>,
{USERSTATUSAUTORESET} = < User Status Automatic Reset >,
{CUSTOMERSTRATTR} = <Customer Attribute> ;
Example:
MOD QUOTA: QUOTANAME="abcd", QUOTAVALUE=1000, QUOTASLICE=10,
NOTIFICATION="abcd", EDR= NotRecord, DESCRIPTION="Quota1", RESETTYPE=Day,
RESETTIME=01&00&00, BALANCERESETMETHOD=Reset, LEVEL1=10, LEVEL2=20,
LEVEL3=30, LEVEL4=40, LEVEL5=50, LEVEL6=60, LEVEL7=70, LEVEL8=80,
LEVEL9=90;
12.2.4 Result
12303: The quota does not exist
12344: The attribute cannot be configured dynamically
12423: Quota Service Identifier and Monitor Key already exist
90108: The notification does not exist

Copyright Huawei

94234: If class of quota is not volume and accumulation type is Session, the parameter of
reset cycle cannot be modified
94240: The parameter RESETTIMETYPE cannot be modified
94241: If parameter BillingCycleMode is not set to Customized Cycle, the parameter
DAYS cannot be modified
94242: If parameter BillingCycleMode is set to DailyService, NotReset or Provisioning
Assign, the parameter BALANCERESETMETHOD cannot be modified
94243: If the parameter BillingCycleMode is not set to Subscriber Billing Cycle or
Monthly Service, the value of BILLINGCYCLETIME cannot be modified
94244: If the parameter BillingCycleMode is not set to Calendar, the parameters
RESETTYPE, RESETDAY, RESETDATE, and RESETTIME cannot be modified
94245: If the parameter RESETTYPE is set to Day, the parameter RESETDAY,
RESETDATE cannot be modified
94246: If the parameter RESETTYPE is set to Week, the parameter RESETDATE cannot
be modified
94247: If the RESETTYPE is set to Week from other resettype, the parameter
RESETDAY must be specified
94248: If the parameter RESETTYPE is set to Month, and the parameter RESETDAY
cannot be modified
94249: If the RESETTYPE is set to Month from other resettype, the parameter
RESETDATE must be specified
94250: Threshold value must be increased by degree
94279: Online Duration quota does not support EDR function
98308: If the parameter BILLINGCYCLEMODE is set to Customized Cycle and the
parameter RESETTIMETYPE is set to Initial online time, The parameter
BALANCERESETMETHOD cannot be modified
94562: The anti modify restriction function is not enabled, so the parameter of type
cannot be modified.
94563: The anti modify restriction function is not enabled, so the parameter of monitor
key cannot be modified.
94565: The parameter of type only can be set as session level, if the quota class is online
duration.
94566: The parameter of monitor key cannot be set, if the quota class is online duration.
94567: The parameter of billing cycle mode cannot be set, if the quota manager is UPCC
and the accumulation type is session.
94582: The value of MONITORKEY cant set to a specific value.
94585: If the parameter BillingCycleMode is not set to "Set By Pre-Sy" either before or
after modification, the parameter RESETTIMETYPE cannot be modified

Copyright Huawei
12.3 Delete Quota (RMV QUOTA)

RMV QUOTA is used to delete a quota data record.

Type Value Range
1. QUOTANAME Quota This parameter specifies the name of String 1-32 M

Name a quota to be deleted.

[RMV]
QUOTA:
{QUOTANAME} = <Quota Name>;
Example:
RMV QUOTA: QUOTANAME = "abcd";
12.3.4 Result
A code is displayed, indicating the operation result.
12424: The quota is associated with a service
90117: The Quota is associated with a Subscriber
90131: The quota has been associated with an accumulation item and cannot be deleted
90166: The quota has been associated with a condition group and cannot be deleted
94608: The quota has been referenced by notification template and cannot be deleted

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Account ManagementAccount Management
13 Account Management
13.1 Add Account (ADD ACCOUNT)

ADD ACCOUNT is used to add an account.

Range
1. ACCOUNTN Account This parameter specifies String 1-32 M

AME Name the name of an account.
2. ACCOUNTV Account This parameter specifies String 0-13 M
ALUE Value the amount of money
available for a subscriber.
3. ACCOUNTS Account This parameter specifies Number 1-100 M
LICE Slice the percentage of the
amount of money
assigned each time
amount of the account.
4. DESTINATI Destination This parameter specifies String 1-16 O
ONPCEF PCEF the PCEF to which the
current account slice is to
be delivered.
5. NOTIFICATI Notification This parameter specifies String 1-32 O
ON the notification to be sent
when the account is reset.

Copyright Huawei

Range
6. EDR EDR This parameter specifies Enumerated OFF M

whether the UPCC ON
delivers an EDR when the
PCEF delivers the
account usage.
7. DESCRIPTI Account This parameter provides String 1-256 O
ON Description additional information
about the account.
8. BILLINGCY Billing Cycle This parameter specifies Enumerated Calendar M
CLEMODE Mode the mode of resetting an Subscriber
account. Billing Cycle
Monthly
Service
Daily Service
Not Reset
9. RESETTYPE Reset Type This parameter specifies Enumerated Day C
the type of reset cycle of Week
an account. The parameter
is valid if Billing Cycle Month
Mode is set to Calendar.
10. RESETDAY Reset Day This parameter specifies Enumerated Monday-Sunday C
the day on which the
account is reset. The
11. RESETDATE Reset Date This parameter specifies Enumerated 1-31, Effective C
the date on which the Date
parameter is valid if Reset
Type is set to Month.
12. RESETTIME Reset Time This parameter specifies DateTime 8 C
the time at which the
to Calendar.

Copyright Huawei

Range
13. BILLINGCY Billing Cycle This parameter specifies DateTime 8 C

CLETIME Time the time at which the
Cycle or Monthly
Service.
14. BALANCER Balance This parameter specifies Enumerated Reset C
ESETMETH Reset how to handle the balance Cumulate
OD Method at the reset time.
The parameter is valid if
to Calendar, Subscriber
Billing Cycle, or
Monthly Service.
16. LEVEL2 Level2 This parameter specifies Number 1-500000 C
18. LEVEL4 Leve4 This parameter specifies Number 1-500000 C
the quota usage at
Level10.
25. CUSTOMLE CustomLevel This parameter specifies Number 1-500000 O
VEL1 1 the quota usage at
CustomLevel1.

Copyright Huawei

Range

CustomLevel2.
CustomLevel3.
A maximum of 256 accounts can be configured in the system.

The value must increase from Level1 to Level10.The parameters Level1 to Level10 must be
configured in sequence. For example, Level2 cannot be set if Levle1 has not been set.
The value of Account Value is floating-point numbers with a maximum of four decimal numbers.
"Invalid parameter" is displayed if the value is set to a number with more than four decimal
numbers.

[ADD]
ACCOUNT:
{ACCOUNTNAME} = <Account name>,
{ACCOUNTVALUE} = <Account Value>,
{ACCOUNTSLICE} = <Account Slice>,
{DESTINATIONPCEF} = <Destination PCEF Identity>,
{EDR} = <EDR>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <Account Description>,
{RESETTYPE} = <Reset Type>,
{RESETTIME} = <Reset Time>,
{BALANCERESETMETHOD} = <Balance Reset Method>,

Copyright Huawei
{CUSTOMLEVEL3} = <Customlevel3>;
Example:
ADD ACCOUNT: ACCOUNTNAME = "abcd", ACCOUNTVALUE = "1000.0",
ACCOUNTSLICE = 10, DESTINATIONPCEF = 1, NOTIFICATION = "abcd",
DESCRIPTION = "abcd", BILLINGCYCLEMODE = CALENDAR, RESETTYPE =
MONTH, RESETDATE = 15, RESETTIME = 01&00&00, BALANCERESETMETHOD =
Reset, LEVEL1 = 10,EDR = ON;
13.1.4 Result
94223: Account value invalid
13.2 Modify Account (MOD ACCOUNT)

MOD ACCOUNT is used to modify an account.

Copyright Huawei

Range
1. ACCOUNT Account Name This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

NAME name of an account.
2. ACCOUNT Account Value This parameter specifies the String 0-13 O
VALUE amount of money available
for a subscriber.
3. ACCOUNT Account Slice This parameter specifies the Number 1-100 O
SLICE percentage of the amount of
money assigned each time
amount of the account.
4. DESTINAT Destination This parameter specifies the String 1-16 O
IONPCEF PCEF PCEF to which the current
account slice is to be
delivered.
5. NOTIFICA Notification This parameter specifies the String 1-32 O
TION notification to be sent when
the account is reset.
6. EDR EDR This parameter specifies Enumerated OFF O
whether the UPCC delivers ON
an EDR when the PCEF
delivers the account usage.
7. DESCRIPT Account This parameter provides String 1-256 O
ION Description additional information
about the account.
8. RESETTY Reset type This parameter specifies the Enumerated Day C

PE type of reset cycle of an Week
account. The parameter is
valid if Billing Cycle Mode Month
is set to Calendar.
9. RESETDA Reset Day This parameter specifies the Enumerated Monday-Sunday C
Y day on which the account is
if Reset Type is set to
Week.
10. RESETDA Reset Date This parameter specifies the Enumerated 1-31, Effective C
TE date on which the account is Date
reset. The parameter is
mandatory if Reset Type is
set to Month.

Copyright Huawei

Range
11. RESETTIM Reset time This parameter specifies the DateTime 8 C

E time at which the account is
to Calendar.
12. BILLINGC Billing Cycle This parameter specifies the DateTime 8 C
YCLETIM Time time at which the account is
E reset. The parameter is valid
Cycle or Monthly Service.
13. BALANCE Balance Reset This parameter specifies Enumerated Reset, C
RESETME Method how to handle the balance Cumulate
THOD at the reset time.
The parameter is valid if
to Calendar, Subscriber
Billing Cycle, or Monthly
Service.
14. LEVEL1 Level1 This parameter specifies the Number 1-500000 O
17. LEVEL4 Leve4 This parameter specifies the Number 1-500000 C
24. CUSTOML CustomLevel1 This parameter specifies the Number 1-500000 O
EVEL1 quota usage at
CustomLevel1.

Copyright Huawei

Range

CustomLevel2.
CustomLevel3.
Billing Cycle Mode cannot be modified.

[MOD]
ACCOUNT:
{ACCOUNTNAME} = <Account name>,
{ACCOUNTVALUE} = <Account Value>,
{ACCOUNTSLICE} = <Account Slice>,
{DESTINATIONPCEF} = <Destination PCEF Identity>,
{EDR} = <EDR>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <Account Description>,
{BALANCERESETMETHOD} = <Balance Reset Method>,

Copyright Huawei
{CUSTOMLEVEL1} =<CustomLevel1>,
{CUSTOMLEVEL3} = <Customlevel3>;
Example:
MOD ACCOUNT: ACCOUNTNAME = "abcd", ACCOUNTVALUE = "1000.0",
ACCOUNTSLICE = 10, DESTINATIONPCEF = 1, NOTIFICATION = "abcd",
DESCRIPTION = "abcd", RESETTYPE = MONTH, RESETDATE = 15, RESETTIME =
01&00&00, BALANCERESETMETHOD = Reset, LEVEL1 = 10,EDR = ON;
13.2.4 Result
12600: The account does not exist
90108: The notification does not exist
94239: The parameter BILLINGCYCLEMODE cannot be modified
94242: If parameter BILLINGCYCLEMODE is set to DailyService, NotReset or
Provisioning Assign, the parameter BALANCERESETMETHOD cannot be modified.
94243: If the parameter BILLINGCYCLEMODE is not set to Subscriber Billing Cycle
or Monthly Service, the value of BILLINGCYCLETIME cannot be modified
94244: If the parameter BILLINGCYCLEMODE is not set to Calendar, the parameters
RESETTYPE, RESETDAY, RESETDATE, and RESETTIME cannot be modified
94245: If the parameter RESETTYPE is set to Day, the parameter RESETDAY,
RESETDATE cannot be modified
94246: If the parameter RESETTYPE is set to Week, the parameter RESETDATE cannot
be modified
94247: If the RESETTYPE is set to Week from other resettype, the parameter
RESETDAY must be specified
94248: If the parameter RESETTYPE is set to Month, and the parameter RESETDAY
cannot be modified

Copyright Huawei
94249: If the RESETTYPE is set to Month from other resettype, the parameter
RESETDATE must be specified
94250: Threshold value must be increased by degree
13.3 Delete Account (RMV ACCOUNT)

RMV ACCOUNT is used to delete an account.

Type Value Range
1. ACCOUNTNAME Account This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

Name name of an account.

[RMV]
ACCOUNT:
{ACCOUNTNAME} = <Account name>;
Example:
RMV ACCOUNT: ACCOUNTNAME = "abcd";
13.3.4 Result
12600: The account does not exist
90114: The account is associated with Service
90116: The account is associated with a Subscriber

Copyright Huawei

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Accumulation ManagementAccumulation Management
14 Accumulation Management
14.1 Add Accumulation (ADD ACCUMULATION)

ADD ACCUMULATION is used to add an accumulation.

No ID Name Description Data Type Max Size/Range Type
1. ACCUMUL Accumulate This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

ATENAME Name name of an accumulation.
2. ACCUMUL Accumulate This parameter specifies the Enumerated Volume M
ATECLASS Class criterion for accumulating the Duration
consumption of a subscriber.
3. ACCUMUL Accumulate This parameter specifies the Enumerated Period M
ATETYPE Type range based on which the Session
consumption of a subscriber is
accumulated.
4. DESCRIPTI Accumulate This parameter provides String 1-256 O
ON Description additional information about an
accumulation.
5. ACCUMUL Accumulate This parameter specifies the Enumerated Calendar C

ATECYCL Cycle Mode mode in which an accumulation Customized
EMODE is reset. The parameter is invalid
if Accumulate Type is set to
Session.
6. RESETTYP Reset Type This parameter specifies the Enumerated Day C
E type of reset cycle of an Week
accumulation. The parameter is
valid if Billing Cycle Mode is Month
set to Calendar.

Copyright Huawei

7. RESETDA Reset Day This parameter specifies the day Enumerated Monday-Sunday C
Y when an accumulation is reset.
The parameter is valid if Billing
Cycle Mode is set to Calendar
and Reset Type is set to Week.
8. RESETDAT Reset Date This parameter specifies the Number 1-28 C
E date when an accumulation is
reset. The parameter is valid if
Calendar and Reset Type is set
to Month.
9. RESETTIM Reset time This parameter specifies the DateTime 8 C
E time at which an accumulation
is reset. The parameter is invalid
if Accumulate Cycle Mode is
set to Calendar or Customized
and Reset Time Type is set to
Start Time.
number of days during which an
accumulation is reset after the
subscriber subscribes to a
service. The parameter is valid
if Accumulate Cycle Mode is
set to Customized.
11. RESETTIM Reset Time This parameter specifies the Enumerated Start Time C
ETYPE Type reset time type. The parameter is Specific Tim
valid if Billing Cycle Mode is
set to Customized.
12. WINDOWL Window This parameter specifies the Number 0-7 C
ENGTH Length number of periods contained in
a sliding window for an
accumulation. The parameter
Accumulate Type is set to
Period.
13. STEPLENG Step Length This parameter specifies the Number 1-7 C
TH number of periods that are not
overlapped between two
adjacent sliding windows. The
parameter must be specified if
Period and Window Length is
not set to 0.

Copyright Huawei

14. CHECKTY Check Type This parameter specifies the Enumerated Cycle Usage C
PE criterion for setting the Total Usage
accumulation status. The
parameter is mandatory if Both
not set to 0.
15. CHECKLE Check This parameter specifies the Number 1-7 C
NGTH Length number of periods that is used
for setting the accumulation
status. The parameter must be
specified if Accumulate Type is
set to Period and Window
Length is not set to 0, or Check
Type is set to Cycle Usage or
Both. The value of Check
Length must be smaller than or
equal to that of Window
Length.
16. HEAVYUS HeavyLevel This parameter specifies the Number 1-2147483645 C
EDVALUE Used Value data volume that must be
accumulated in a period for the
UPCC to change the
accumulation status to
HeavyLevel. The parameter
must be specified if either of the
following conditions is met:
Period, Window Length is
not set to 0 and Check Type
is set to Cycle Usage or Both.
Session and Check Interval
is not set to 0.
The value of HeavyLevel Used
Value must be smaller than or
equal to that of HeavyLevel
Total Value.

Copyright Huawei

17. HEAVYTO HeavyLevel This parameter specifies the Number 1-2147483645 C
TALVALUE Total Value total data volume that must be
accumulated in all periods for
the UPCC to change the
not set to 0 and Check Type is
set to Total Usage or Both.
is not set to 0.
18. LIGHTUSE LightLevel This parameter specifies the Number 1-2147483645 C

DVALUE Used Value data volume that must be
accumulated in a period for the
UPCC to change the
LightLevel. The parameter must
be specified if either of the
is not set to 0.
The value of LightLevel Used
Used Value or HeavyLevel
Total Value.

Copyright Huawei

19. LIGHTTOT LightLevel This parameter specifies the Number 1-2147483645 C
ALVALUE Total Value total data volume that must be
accumulated in all periods for
Period and Window Length
is not set to 0 and Check Type
is set to Total Usage or Both.
is not set to 0.
The value of LightLevel Total
Total Value.
20. CHECKINT Check This parameter specifies the Number 0-1440 C

ERVAL Interval interval between two
consecutive accumulation status
checks in a session. The
Session.
21. DEVIATIO Deviation This parameter specifies the Number 0-60 C
N deviation from Check Interval
(Minute) that is allowed for the
PCEF to report consumption.
The parameter must be specified
if Accumulate Type is set to
Session and Check Interval is
not set to 0.
22. CONTROLI Control This parameter specifies the Number 0-1440 O
NTERVAL Interval control interval if accumulation
status changes to be Heavy
Level in a session.
23. SLIDETYP Slide Type This parameter specifies the Enumerated Normal, O
E slide type of a period Heavy
accumulation. Threshold

Copyright Huawei
A maximum of 255 accumulations can be configured in the system

The value of Step must be less than or equal to the value of Window Length. If the value of Step is
the same as that of Window Length, there is no common period in two adjacent sliding windows.
Check Length is mandatory if Check Type is set to Cycle Usage or Both. The value of Check
Length must be less than or equal to the value of Window Length.
The value of Deviation must be less than or equal to the value of Check Interval. The UPCC does
not send an RAR message to instruct the PCEF to report consumption if the PCEF has reported
consumption within the deviation before the time specified by Check Interval is reached. For
example, if Deviation is set to 5, a 5-minute deviation is allowed. In this configuration, if the PCEF
has reported consumption by using a CCR message within five minutes before the time specified by
Check Interval is reached, the UPCC does not instruct the PCEF to report consumption again when
the time specified by Check Interval is reached. However, if the PCEF does not report consumption
within five minutes before the time specified by Check Interval is reached, the UPCC sends an
RAR message to instruct the PCEF to report consumption when the time specified by Check
Interval is reached.
The value of Light Level Used Value must be less than or equal to the value of Heavy Level Used
Value. The value of Light Level Total Value must be less than or equal to the value of Heavy
Level Total Value. The value of Heavy Level Used Value must be less than or equal to the value of
Heavy Level Total Value. The value of Light Level Used Value must be less than or equal to the
value of Light Level Total Value.
Only if the Accumulate Type is Session, the Control Interval can be set.
Only if the Accumulate Type is Period, the Slide Type can be set. If the Slide Type is set to Heavy
Threshold, the LightLevel Used Value or LightLevel Total Value can not be set.

[ADD]
ACCUMULATION:
{ACCUMULATENAME} = <Accumulate Name>,
{ACCUMULATECLASS} = <Accumulate Class>,
{ACCUMULATETYPE} = <Accumulate Type>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <Accumulate Description>,
{ ACCUMULATECYCLEMODE} = <Accumulate Cycle Mode>,
{DAYS} = <Days>,
{WINDOWLENGTH} = <Window length>,
{STEPLENGTH} = <Step Length>,
{CHECKTYPE} = <Check Type>,
{CHECKLENGTH} = <Check Length>,

Copyright Huawei
{HEAVYUSEDVALUE} = <HeavyLevel Used Value>,

{HEAVYTOTALVALUE} = <HeavyLevel Total Value>,
{LIGHTUSEDVALUE} = <LightLevel Used Value>,
{LIGHTTOTALVALUE} = <LightLevel Total Value>,
{CHECKINTERVAL} = <Check Interval>,
{DEVIATION}= <Deviation>,
{CONTROLINTERVAL}=<Control Interval>,
{SLIDETYPE}=<Slide Type>;
Example:
ADD ACCUMULATION: ACCUMULATENAME="Accum_1",
ACCUMULATECLASS=Volume, ACCUMULATETYPE=Period,
ACCUMULATECYCLEMODE=Calendar, RESETTYPE=Month, RESETDATE=15,
RESETTIME=07&00&00, WINDOWLENGTH=6, STEPLENGTH=2, CHECKTYPE=Cycle
Usage, CHECKLENGTH=2, HEAVYUSEDVALUE=10000, LIGHTUSEDVALUE=10000;
14.1.4 Result
90124: The accumulation item already exists
90126: The number of accumulation items reaches the maximum value (255)
14.2 Modify Accumulation (MOD ACCUMULATION)

MOD ACCUMULATION is used to modify information about an accumulation.

Copyright Huawei

Range
1. ACCUMULA Accumula This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

TENAME te Name name of an accumulation to be
modified.
2. DESCRIPTIO Accumula This parameter provides String 1-256 O
N te additional information about an
Descripti accumulation.
on
3. RESETTYPE Reset This parameter specifies the Enumerated Day O
Type type of reset cycle of an Week
must be specified if Billing Month
Cycle Mode is set to Calendar.
4. RESETDAY Reset Day This parameter specifies the day Enumerated Monday-Sunday C
when an accumulation is reset.
The parameter is valid if Reset
5. RESETDATE Reset This parameter specifies the Number 1-28 C
Date date when an accumulation is
reset. The parameter must be
specified if Reset Type is set to
Month.
6. RESETTIME Reset This parameter specifies the DateTime 8 C
Time time at which the quota is reset.
The parameter is invalid if
Reset Time Type is set to Start
Time.
number of days during which an
accumulation is reset after the
subscriber subscribes to a
service. The parameter is valid
if Billing Cycle Mode is set to
Customized.
8. WINDOWLE Window This parameter specifies the Number 0-7 O
NGTH Length number of periods contained in
a sliding window for an
Period.

Copyright Huawei

Range
9. STEPLENGT Step This parameter specifies the Number 0-7 C

H Length number of periods that are not
overlapped between two
adjacent sliding windows. The
not set to 0.
10. CHECKTYPE Check This parameter specifies the Enumerated Cycle Usage C
Type criterion for setting the Total Usage
accumulation status. The
parameter must be specified if Both
not set to 0.
11. CHECKLENG Check This parameter specifies the Number 1-7 C
TH Length number of periods that is used
for setting the accumulation
status. The parameter must be
specified if either of the
Period and Window Length
is not set to 0.
Check Type is set to Cycle
Usage or Both.
The value of Check Length
must be smaller than or equal to
that of Window Length.

Copyright Huawei

Range
12. HEAVYUSED HeavyLe This parameter specifies the Number 1-2147483645 C

VALUE vel Used data volume that must be
Value accumulated in a period for the
UPCC to change the
is not set to 0.
The value of HeavyLevel Used
Total Value.
13. HEAVYTOTA HeavyLe This parameter specifies the Number 1-2147483645 C
LVALUE vel Total total data volume that must be
Value accumulated in all periods for
is not set to 0.

Copyright Huawei

Range
14. LIGHTUSED LightLev This parameter specifies the Number 1-2147483645 C

VALUE el Used data volume that must be
Value accumulated in a period for the
UPCC to change the
is not set to 0.
The value of LightLevel Used
Used Value or HeavyLevel
Total Value.
15. LIGHTTOTA LightLev This parameter specifies the Number 1-2147483645 C
LVALUE el Total total data volume that must be
Value accumulated in all periods for
is not set to 0.
The value of LightLevel Total
Total Value.
16. CHECKINTE Check This parameter specifies the Number 0-1440 O
RVAL Interval interval between two
consecutive accumulation status
checks in a session. The
Session.

Copyright Huawei

Range
17. DEVIATION Deviation This parameter specifies the Number 0-60 C

deviation from Check Interval
(Minute) that is allowed for the
PCEF to report consumption.
The parameter must be
specified if Accumulate Type
is set to Session and Check
Interval is not set to 0.
18. CONTROLIN Control This parameter specifies the Number 0-1440 O
TERVAL Interval control interval if accumulation
status changes to be Heavy
Level in a session.
Accumulate Class, Accumulate Type, Billing Cycle Mode, Reset Time Type and Slide Type cannot
be modified.

[MOD]
ACCUMULATION:
{DESCRIPTION} = <Accumulate Description>,
{DAYS} = <Days>,
{WINDOWLENGTH} = <Window Length>,
{STEPLENGTH} = <Step Length>,
{CHECKTYPE} = <Check Type>,
{CHECKLENGTH} = <Check Length>,
{HEAVYUSEDVALUE} = <HeavyLevel Used Value>,
{HEAVYTOTALVALUE} = <HeavyLevel Total Value>,
{LIGHTUSEDVALUE} = <LightLevel Used Value>,
{LIGHTTOTALVALUE} = <LightLevel Total Value>,
{CHECKINTERVAL} = <Check Interval>,

Copyright Huawei
{DEVIATION} = <Deviation>,
{CONTROLINTERVAL}=<Control Interval>;
Example:
MOD ACCUMULATION: ACCUMULATENAME="Accum_1", RESETTIME=07&00&00,
WINDOWLENGTH=6, STEPLENGTH=3, CHECKTYPE=Total Usage,
HEAVYTOTALVALUE=10000, LIGHTTOTALVALUE=10000;
14.2.4 Result
A code is returned, indicating the operation result. If the operation is successful, the following
code is displayed:
90125: The accumulation item does not exist
14.3 Delete Accumulation (RMV ACCUMULATION)

RMV ACCUMULATION is used to modify information about an accumulation.

Type Value
Range
1. ACCUMULATENAME Accumulate This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

Name name of an accumulation.

[RMV]
ACCUMULATION:
{ACCUMULATENAME} = <Accumulation name>;
Example:

Copyright Huawei
RMV ACCUMULATION: ACCUMULATENAME="Accum_1";
14.3.4 Result
code is displayed:
90128: The accumulation item has been provided to a subscriber and cannot be deleted
14.4 Add Accumulation Quota (ADD

ACCUMULATIONQUOTA)
ADD ACCUMULATIONQUOTA is used to provide a quota for accumulation.

Type Value
Range

2. QUOTANAME Quota Name This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M
name of a quota.

Copyright Huawei
Each accumulation can be configured with a maximum of six quotas.

If Accumulation Class of an accumulation is set to Volume, the accumulation can be associated only
with the quotas whose Quota Class is set to Volume.
If Accumulation Class of an accumulation is set to Duration, the accumulation can be associated
only with the quotas whose Quota Class is set to Duration.
An accumulation can be associated with only one of the quotas that have the same monitor key.

[ADD]
ACCUMULATIONQUOTA:
Example:
ADD ACCUMULATIONQUOTA: ACCUMULATENAME="Accum_1",
QUOTANAME="Quota_1";
14.4.4 Result
code is displayed:
90127: The number of quotas associated with the accumulation item reaches the
maximum value (6)
90130: The accumulation item type does not match the quota type
90132: The accumulation item cannot be associated with multiple quotas with the same
monitor key
94272: The quota is already associated with the accumulation item
98309: The quota managed by an external entity cannot be associated with the
accumulation item

Copyright Huawei
14.5 Delete Accumulation Quota (RMV

ACCUMULATIONQUOTA)
RMV ACCUMULATIONQUOTA is used to delete quota information about an
accumulation.

Type Value
Range

2. QUOTANAME Quota Name This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M
name of a quota.

[RMV]
ACCUMULATIONQUOTA:
Example:
RMV ACCUMULATIONQUOTA: ACCUMULATENAME="Accum_1",
QUOTANAME="Quota_1";
14.5.4 Result
code is displayed:
90128: The accumulation item has been provided to a subscriber and cannot be deleted
90135: The accumulation item has been associated with a condition group and cannot be
deleted

Copyright Huawei

94273: The quota is not associated with the accumulation item

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Service ManagementService Management
15 Service Management
15.1 Add Service (ADD SERVICE)

ADD SERVICE is used to add a service.

N ID Name Description Data Value or Value Type
o. Type Range
1. SERVICENA Service This parameter specifies the name of String 1-32 M

ME Name a service.
2. SERVICETYP Service This parameter specifies the type of a Enume VALUE_ADDED M
E Type service. rated _SERVICE
BASIC_SERVICE
MULTI_SERVIC
E_APN
BOD_SERVICE
3. APN APN This parameter specifies the APN for String 1-64 O
a service. The parameter cannot be
specified if Service Type is set to
MUTI_SERVICE_APN or
BOD_SERVICE.
4. VPN VPN This parameter specifies the virtual String 1-64 O
private network (VPN) for a service.
The parameter cannot be specified if
Service Type is set to
MULTI_SERVICE_APN or
BOD_SERVICE.

Copyright Huawei

o. Type Range
5. SP Service This parameter specifies the service String 1-32 M

Provide provider that offers a service.
r
6. ACCOUNT Accoun This parameter specifies the account String 1-32 O
t that is associated with a service.
7. ISMETERTO Is Meter This parameter specifies whether to Enume Yes M
BASIC To include the data volume of the rated No
Basic service in the measurement of the
total data volume used by the
subscriber.
8. ACTIVATED Activat This parameter specifies the Enume PCEF O
BY ed By activation mode of a service. rated AF
UE_INITIATED_
RESOURCE
9. PRECEDENC Precede This parameter specifies the priority Numbe 0-2147483645 M
E nce of the service in the mutex group. r
10. QOSMODE QoS This parameter specifies the mode for Enume Replace M
Mode calculating the QoS bandwidth for a rated Additive
service.
InteriorRestrict
MaxQoSPerSrv
11. SUBSCRIPTI Subscri This parameter specifies whether Enume Yes M
ONFORCED ption subscription is required to use a rated No
Forced service.
12. ABSVALIDST Absolut This parameter specifies the time Dateti 19 O
ARTTIME e Valid when a subscriber starts to use a me
Start service.
Time
13. ABSVALIDE Absolut This parameter specifies the time Dateti 19 O
NDTIME e Valid when a subscriber stops using a me
End service.
Time
14. DISPLAYNA Display This parameter specifies the name of String 1-32 C
ME Name a service. The parameter takes
precedence over Service Name if
MULTI_SERVICE_APN.
15. DEFAULTAC Default This parameter specifies whether to Enume No C
TIVATE Activat activate a service by default upon rated Yes
e subscription. The parameter is valid
if Service Type is set to
BOD_SERVICE.

Copyright Huawei

o. Type Range
16. PATUNABLE PA This parameter specifies whether to Enume Yes C

Tunable allow subscribers to activate or rated No
deactivate the services on the Portal
(PA represents Portal). The parameter
is valid if Service Type is set to
BOD_SERVICE.
17. SERVICEUR Service This parameter specifies the URL String 1- 128 C
L URL associated with a service. The
parameter is valid if PA Tunable is
set to Yes and service type is
MULTI_SERVICE_APN.
18. NEEDADDIT Need This parameter specifies whether to Enume Yes C
IONALAUTH Additio authenticate the account name and rated No
nal password if a subscriber requests to
Auth update the service information on the
Portal. The parameter is mandatory if
PA Tunable is set to Yes and service
type is MULTI_SERVICE_APN.
19. SUBSCRIPTI Subscri This parameter specifies the string 1-32 O
ONNOTIFICA ption notification to be sent when the
TION Notifica service has been subscribed to.
tion
20. MODIFICATI Modific This parameter specifies the String 1-32 O
ONNOTIFICA ation notification to be sent when the
TION Notifica service has been modified.
tion
21. STARTNOTIF Start This parameter specifies the String 1-32 O
ICATION Notifica notification to be sent when the
tion service takes effect.
22. ENDNOTIFIC End This parameter specifies the String 1-32 O
ATION Notifica notification to be sent when the
tion service expires.
23. BEFOREEXP Before This parameter specifies the String 1-32 O
IRYNOTIFIC Expiry notification sent a few days before
ATION Notifica the service expires.
tion
24. BEFOREEXP Before This parameter specifies the number Numbe 30-43200 C
IRYINTERVA Expiry of minutes before service expiration r
L Interval that the notification is sent. The
parameter is valid only when Before
Expiry Notification is specified.
25. CALCULATE Calculat This parameter specifies the time to Enume Subscribute_Calcula O
TIME e Time start calculating the service duration. rated te

Copyright Huawei

o. Type Range
26. DURATIONT Duratio This parameter specifies how the Enume Hour C
YPE n Type duration is calculated. rated Day
27. DURATIONV Duratio This parameter specifies the service Numbe 1-8784 C
ALUE n duration. r
28. DESCRIPTIO Descrip This parameter provides additional String 1-256 O
N tion information about the service.
29. PROBILLDA Provide This Parameter specifies the service Enume Yes C
TE d till expiry on the next bill date. rated No
Bill
Date
30. ENDTIME End This Parameter specifies the service DateTi 8 C
Time expiry time. me
31. QUOTAALL Quota This Parameter specifies the quota Enume None O
OCATIONMO Allocati allocation mode when the service has rated Days Proration
DE on been subscribed to.
Mode
32. CUSTOMERA Custom This Parameter specifies the service Numbe 0-2147483645 O
TTRIBUTE er customer attribute r
Attribut
e
33. ISSETSHARE Is Set This Parameter specifies whether set Enume Yes C
DMODE Shared shared mode of the service. rated No
Mode
34. SHAREDMO Shared This Parameter specifies the shared Enume Shared C
DE Mode mode of the service. rated NotShared
35. ISGROUPSER Is This Parameter specifies the group Enume Yes O
VICE Group attribute of the service. rated No
Service
36. NOTIFYCOD Notify This Parameter specifies the notify String 120 O
E code sender code of the notification of this
service.
37. QRYNOTIFIC SMS II. This parameter specifies the String 132 O
ATION Query notification when its triggered by the
Notifica SMS query message.
tion

Copyright Huawei
A maximum of 1024 services can be configured in the system.

If Service Type is set to MULTI_SERVICE_APN, Default Activate and Need Addition Auth
cannot be set to Yes at the same time.
If Service Type is set to MULTI_SERVICE_APN, the Activated By cannot be set to AF.
The values of Absolute Valid Start Time and Absolute Valid End Time are in
YYYY&MM&DD&HH&MM&SS format. Absolute Valid Start Time must be earlier than
Absolute Valid End Time.
If Calculate Time is not specified, its default value Subscribute_Calculate is used.
Duration Type and Duration must be specified or left blank at the same time. If Duration Type is
set to Day, the value of Duration ranges from 1 to 366. If Duration Type is set to Hour, the value
of Duration ranges from 1 to 8784. For details, see the product documentation.
Provided till Bill Date cannot be set to Yes when Duration is specified.
The Shared Mode is valid when Is Set Shared Mode is set to Yes.
You cannot set the Shared Mode and Is Set Shared Mode when Is Group Service is be set to
YES.When Is Group Service is YES,the Shared Mode is Shared and Is Set Shared Mode is No.

[ADD]
SERVICE:
{SERVICETYPE} = <Service Type>,
{APN} = <APN>,
{VPN} = <VPN>,
{SP} = <Service Provider>,
{ACCOUNT} = <Account>,
{ISMETERTOBASIC} = <Is Meter To Basic>,
{ACTIVATEDBY} = <Activated By>,
{QOSMODE} = <QoS Mode>,
{SUBSCRIPTIONFORCED} = <Subscription Forced>,
{ABSVALIDSTARTTIME} = <Absolute Valid Start Period>,
{ABSVALIDENDTIME} = <Absolute Valid End Period>,
{DISPLAYNAME} = <Display Name>,
{DEFAULTACTIVATE} = <Default Activate>,
{PATUNABLE} = <Portal Tunable>,
{SERVICEURL} = <Service URL>,
{NEEDADDITIONALAUTH} = <Need Additional Auth>,
{STARTNOTIFICATION} = <Start Notification>,

Copyright Huawei
{ENDNOTIFICATION} = <End Notification>,

{SUBSCRIPTIONNOTIFICATION} = <Subscription Notification>,
{MODIFICATIONNOTIFICATION} = <Modification Notification>,
{BEFOREEXPIRYNOTIFICATION} = <Before Expiry Notification>,
{BEFOREEXPIRYINTERVAL} = <Before Expiry Interval>,
{CALCULATETIME} = <Calculate Time>,
{DURATIONTYPE} = <Duration Type>,
{DURATIONVALUE} = <Duration>,
{PROBILLDATE} = <Provided till Bill Date >,
{ENDTIME} = <End Time>,
{QUOTAALLOCATIONMODE}=<Quota Allocation Mode>,
{CUSTOMERATTRIBUTE}=<Customer Attribute>,
{ISSETSHAREDMODE}=<Is Set Shared Mode>,
{SHAREDMODE}=<Shared Mode>,
{ISGROUPSERVICE}=<Is Group Service>,
{ NOTIFYCODE}=<Notify Code>,
{ QRYNOTIFICATION}=<SMS Query Notification>;
Example:
ADD SERVICE: SRVICENAME = "abcd", SERVICETYPE = BASIC_SERVICE, SP =
"default1", ISMETERTOBASIC = Yes, ACTIVATEDBY = PCEF, PRECEDENCE = 1,
QOSMODE = Replace, SUBSCRIPTIONFORCED = Yes, DESCRIPTION = "abcd";
15.1.4 Result
12600: The Account does not exist
12628: Invalid datetime

Copyright Huawei
90168: The Start Notification does not exist

90169: The End Notification does not exist
90183: The All notifications do not exist
90184: The Subscription Notification does not exist
90185: The Mod Service Notification does not exist
90192: The expiry notification does not exist
94253: If parameter SERVICETYPE is not set to MULTI-SERVICE-APN, the
parameters of DEFAULTACTIVATE, DISPLAYNAME, PATUNABLE, SERVICEURL,
and NEEDADDITIONALAUTH cannot be specified
94254: If parameter SERVICETYPE is set to MULTI-SERVICE-APN or
BOD_SERVICE, the parameters of DEFAULTACTIVATE and PATUNABLE must be
specified, and the parameters of APN and VPN cannot be specified
94255: If parameter PATUNABLE is set to yes, the parameter
NEEDADDITIONALAUTH must be specified, and if the parameter PATUNABLE is set
to no, the parameters of NEEDADDITIONALAUTH and SERVICEURL cannot be
specified
94256: If parameter BEFOREEXPIRYNOTIFICATION is not specified, the parameter
BEFOREEXPIRYINTERVAL cannot be specified.
94263: The service that is activated by default cannot be configured with authentication
information
94264: The MULTI-SERVICE APN cannot be activated by the AF
94328: If parameter SERVICETYPE is set to BOD_SERVICE, the parameters of APN,
DISPLAYNAME, VPN, SERVICEURL, and NEEDADDITIONALAUTH cannot be
specified
94523: If parameter PROBILLDATE is set to yes, the parameter Duration cannot be
specified
94524: The parameters PROBILLDATE and ENDTIME configuration conflicts.
94583: The Service with notify code NULL is already exist
94584: SMS query notification is not allowed to use Email
94586: Restriction of query notification is not allowed
15.2 Modify Service (MOD SERVICE)

MOD SERVICE is used to modify a service.

Copyright Huawei

Value
Range
1. SERVIC Service This parameter specifies the name of a String 1-32 M

ENAME Name service.
2. APN APN This parameter specifies the APN for a String 1-64 O
service. The parameter cannot be
MUTI_SERVICE_APN or
BOD_SERVICE.
3. VPN VPN This parameter specifies the VPN for a String 1-64 O
service. The parameter cannot be
MUTI_SERVICE_APN or
BOD_SERVICE.
4. SP Service This parameter specifies the service String 1-32 O
Provider provider that offers a service.
5. ACCOU Account This parameter specifies the account that String 1-32 O
NT is associated with a service.
6. ISMETE Is meter to This parameter specifies whether to Enumerated Yes O
RTOBA basic include the data volume of the service in No
SIC the measurement of the total data
volume used by the subscriber.
7. ACTIVA Activated This parameter specifies the activation Enumerated PCEF O
TEDBY By mode of a service. AF
UE_INI
TIATED
_RESO
URCE
8. PRECE Precedenc This parameter specifies the priority of Number 0- O
DENCE e the service in the mutex group. 21474836
45
9. QOSMO QoS Mode This parameter specifies the mode for Enumerated Replace O
DE calculating the QoS bandwidth for a Additive
service.
Interior
Restrict
MaxQo
SPerSrv
10. SUBSC Subscripti This parameter specifies whether Enumerated Yes O
RIPTIO on Forced subscription is required to use a service. No
NFORC
ED

Copyright Huawei

Value
Range
11. ABSVA Absolute This parameter specifies the time when a String 19 O
LIDSTA valid start subscriber starts to use a service.
RTTIME time
12. ABSVA Absolute This parameter specifies the time when a String 19 O
LIDEN valid end subscriber stops using a service.
DTIME time
13. DISPLA Display This parameter specifies the name of a String 1-32 C
YNAME Name service. The parameter takes precedence
over Service Name if Service Type is
set to MULTI_SERVICE_APN.
14. DEFAU Default This parameter specifies whether to Enumerated No O
LTACTI Activate activate a service by default upon Yes
VATE subscription. The parameter is valid if
MULTI_SERVICE_APN.
15. PATUN Portal This parameter specifies whether to Enumerated Yes C
ABLE Tunable allow subscribers to activate or No
deactivate the services on the Portal (PA
represents Portal). The parameter is valid
if Service Type is set to
BOD_SERVICE.
16. SERVIC Service This parameter specifies the URL String 1-128 C
EURL URL associated with a service. The parameter
is valid if Portal Tunable is set to Yes.
17. NEEDA Need This parameter specifies whether to Enumerated Yes C
DDITIO Additional authenticate the account name and No
NALAU Auth password if a subscriber requests to
TH update the service information on the
Portal. The parameter is valid if Portal
Tunable is set to Yes.
18. SUBSC Subscripti This parameter specifies the notification string 1-32 O
RIPTIO on to be sent when the service has been
NNOTIF Notificatio subscribed to.
ICATIO n
N
19. MODIFI Modificati This parameter specifies the notification String 1-32 O
CATION on to be sent when the service has been
NOTIFI Notificatio modified.
CATION n
20. START Start This parameter specifies the notification String 1-32 O
NOTIFI Notificatio to be sent when the service takes effect.
CATION n

Copyright Huawei

Value
Range
21. ENDNO End This parameter specifies the notification String 1-32 O
TIFICA Notificatio to be sent when the service expires.
TION n
22. Before This parameter specifies the notification String 1-32 O
BEFOR Expiry sent before the service expires.
EEXPIR Notificatio
YNOTIF n
ICATIO
N
23. BEFOR BeforeExp This parameter specifies the number of Number 30-43200 C
EEXPIR iry minutes before a service expiration
YINTER Interval notification is sent. The parameter is
VAL valid only when Before Expiry
Notification is specified.
24. CALCU Calculate This parameter specifies the time to start Enumerated Subscribut O
LATETI Time calculating the service validation e_Calculat
ME duration. e
25. DURATI Duration This parameter specifies the unit used to Enumerated Hour C
ONTYP Type measure the service validation duration. Day
E
26. DURATI Duration This parameter specifies the service Number 1-8784 C
ONVAL validation duration.
UE
27. DESCRI Descriptio This parameter provides additional String 1-256 O
PTION n information about the service.
28. PROBIL Provided This Parameter specifies the service Enumerated Yes C
LDATE till Bill expiry on the next bill date. No
Date
29. ENDTI End Time This Parameter specifies the service DateTime 8 C
ME expiry time.
30. QUOTA Quota This Parameter specifies the quota Enumerated None O
ALLOC Allocation allocation mode when the service has Days
ATION Mode been subscribed to. Proration
MODE
31. CUSTO Customer This Parameter specifies the service Number 0- O
MERAT Attribute customer attribute 21474836
TRIBUT 45
E
32. ISSETS Is Set This Parameter specifies whether set Enumerated Yes C
HARED Shared shared mode of the service. No
MODE Mode

Copyright Huawei

Value
Range
33. SHARE Shared This Parameter specifies the shared Enumerated Share C
DMODE Mode mode of the service. d
NotS
hared
34. ISGRO Is Group This Parameter specifies the group Enumerated Yes O
UPSER Service attribute of the service. No
VICE
35. NOTIFY Notify This Parameter specifies the notify String 120 O
CODE code sender code of the notification of this
service.
36. QRYNO SMS This parameter specifies the notification String 132 O
TIFICA Query when its triggered by the SMS query
TION Notificatio message.
n
Duration Type and Duration must be specified or left blank at the same time. If Duration Type is
set to Day, the value of Duration ranges from 1 to 366. If Duration Type is set to Hour, the value
of Duration ranges from 1 to 8784. For details, see the product documentation.
Provided till Bill Date cannot be set to Yes when Duration is specified.
Cannot set the Shared Mode and Is Set Shared Mode when Is Group Service is be set to
YES.When Is Group Service is YES,the Shared Mode is Shared and Is Set Shared Mode is No.

[MOD]
SERVICE:
{SERVICETYPE} = <Service Type>,
{APN} = <Access Point Name>,
{VPN} = <Virtual Private Network>,
{SP}=<Service Provider>,
{ACCOUNT} = <Account>,
{ISMETERTOBASIC} = <Is Meter To Basic>,
{ACTIVATEDBY} = <Activated By>,
{QOSMODE} = <QoS Mode>,
{SUBSCRIPTIONFORCED} = <Subscription Forced>,

Copyright Huawei
{ABSVALIDSTARTTIME} = <Absolute Valid Start Period>,

{ABSVALIDENDTIME} = <Absolute Valid End Period>,
{DISPLAYNAME} = <Display Name>,
{DEFAULTACTIVATE} = <Default Activate>,
{PATUNABLE} = <Portal Tunable>,
{SERVICEURL} = <Service URL>,
{NEEDADDITIONALAUTH} = <Need Additional Auth>,
{SUBSCRIPTIONNOTIFICATION} = <Subscription Notification>,
{MODIFICATIONNOTIFICATION} = <Modification Notification>,
{BEFOREEXPIRYNOTIFICATION} = <Before Expiry Notification>,
{BEFOREEXPIRYINTERVAL} = <Before Expiry Interval>,
{CALCULATETIME} = <Calculate Time>,
{DURATIONTYPE} = <Duration Type>,
{DURATIONVALUE} = <Duration>,
{PROBILLDATE} = <Provided till Bill Date>,
{ENDTIME} = <End Time>,
{QUOTAALLOCATIONMODE}=<Quota Allocation Mode>,
{CUSTOMERATTRIBUTE}=<Customer Attribute>,
{ISSETSHAREDMODE}=<Is Set Shared Mode>,
{SHAREDMODE}=<Shared Mode>,
{ISGROUPSERVICE}=<Is Group Service>,
{ NOTIFYCODE}=<Notify Code>,
{ QRYNOTIFICATION}=<SMS Query Notification>;
Example:
MOD SERVICE: SRVICENAME = "abcd", ISMETERTOBASIC = Yes, ACTIVATEDBY =
PCEF, PRECEDENCE = 1, QOSMODE = Replace, SUBSCRIPTIONFORCED = Yes,
DESCRIPTION = "abcd";
15.2.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
12525: The service has been subscribed by subscriber group, sp, account,quota and
IsGroupService cannot be modified
12600: The Account does not exist
12628: Invalid datetime
94253: If parameter SERVICETYPE is not set to MULTI-SERVICE-APN, the
parameters of DEFAULTACTIVATE, DISPLAYNAME, PATUNABLE, SERVICEURL,
and NEEDADDITIONALAUTH cannot be specified
94254: If parameter SERVICETYPE is set to MULTI-SERVICE-APN or
BOD_SERVICE, the parameters of DEFAULTACTIVATE and PATUNABLE must be
specified, and the parameters of APN and VPN cannot be specified
94255: If parameter PATUNABLE is set to yes, the
parameterNEEDADDITIONALAUTH must be specified, and if the parameter
PATUNABLE is set to no, the parameters of NEEDADDITIONALAUTH and
SERVICEURL cannot be specified
94256: If parameter BEFOREEXPIRYNOTIFICATION is not specified, the parameter
BEFOREEXPIRYINTERVAL cannot be specified
94263: The service that is activated by default cannot be configured with authentication
information
94264: The MULTI-SERVICE APN cannot be activated by the AF
94328: If parameter SERVICETYPE is set to BOD_SERVICE, the parameters of APN,
DISPLAYNAME, VPN, SERVICEURL, and NEEDADDITIONALAUTH
94332: The Default Activate mode of BOD service can not be modified
94523: If parameter PROBILLDATE is set to yes, the parameter Duration cannot be
specified
94524: The parameters PROBILLDATE and ENDTIME configuration conflicts
12609: The service has been subscribed by subscriber, sp, account,quota and
94581: Mismatched service type
94583: The Service with notify code NULL is already exist

Copyright Huawei
94584: SMS query notification is not allowed to use Email

94586: Restriction of query notification is not allowed
98402: Shared service and not-shared service can not exist in the same mutex group
which type is subscribe
15.3 Delete Service (RMV SERVICE)

RMV SERVICE is used to delete a service.

Type Range
1. SERVICENAME Service This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

Name name of a service.

[RMV]
SERVICE:
{SERVICENAME} = <Service Name>;
Example:
RMV SERVICE: SERVICENAME = "abcd";
15.3.4 Result
12299: The service has been ordered
12383: The service cannot be deleted because it is associated with an application service
mapping
12384: The service cannot be deleted because it is associated with a service package
12385: The service cannot be deleted because it is associated with a mutex group

Copyright Huawei
12483: The service cannot be deleted because it is associated with a rule

15.4 Add Service Policy (ADD SERVICEPOLICY)

ADD SERVICEPOLICY is used to provide a policy for service.

Type Range

Each service can be configured with a maximum of 32 policies.

[ADD]
SERVICEPOLICY:
Example:
ADD SERVICEPOLICY: SERVICENAME = "abcd", POLICYNAME = "abcd";
15.4.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

12489: The number of policies of the service exceeds the maximum value (32)
94219: The policy already exists in service
15.5 Delete Service Policy (RMV SERVICEPOLICY)

RMV SERVICEPOLICY is used to delete a policy associated with a service.

Type Range


[RMV]
SERVICEPOLICY:
Example:
RMV SERVICEPOLICY: SERVICENAME = "abcd", POLICYNAME = "abcd";
15.5.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

94218: The policy dos not exist in service
15.6 Add Service Quota (ADD SERVICEQUOTA)

ADD SERVICEQUOTA is used to provide a quota for a service.

Type Range

2. QUOTANAME Quota This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M
Name name of a quota.
Each service can be configured with a maximum of 3 quotas.

[ADD]
SERVICEQUOTA:
Example:
ADD SERVICEQUOTA: SERVICENAME = "abcd", QUOTANAME = "abcd";
15.6.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

12513: The number of quotas in the service exceeds the maximum value (3)
94221: The quota already exists in service
94270: Quotas in a service which associated with a mutex group cannot been modified
94607: Group service cannot related with one-off quota
94609: One quota cannot belong to group service and non-group service at the sametime
15.7 Delete Service Quota (RMV SERVICEQUOTA)

RMV SERVICEQUOTA is used to delete quota information about a service.

Type Range

2. QUOTANAME Quota This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M
Name name of a quota.

[RMV]
SERVICEQUOTA:
{QUOTANAME} = <Quota name>;
Example:
RMV SERVICEQUOTA: SERVICENAME = "abcd", QUOTANAME = "abcd";

Copyright Huawei
15.7.4 Result
12304: The service does not exist.
94220: The quota does not exist in service

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Package ManagementPackage Management
16 Package Management
16.1 Add Package (ADD PACKAGE)

ADD PACKAGE is used to add a service package.

No. ID Name Description Data Value Type
Type or
Value
Range
1. PACKAGENAME Package This parameter String 1-32 M

Name specifies the name of
a service package.
2. SPNAME SP Name This parameter String 1-32 M
specifies the service
provider that offers
the service package.
3. STARTNOTIFICATION Start This parameter String 1-32 O
Notification specifies the
notification to be sent
to a subscriber when
the service package
takes effect.
4. ENDNOTIFICATION End This parameter String 1-32 O
to a subscriber when
the service package
expires.

Copyright Huawei
5. SUBSCRIPTIONNOTIFICATION Subscription This parameter string 1-32 O

when the service has
been subscribed to.
6. MODIFICATIONNOTIFICATION Modification This parameter String 1-32 O
when the service has
been modified.
7. BEFOREEXPIRYNOTIFICATION Before This parameter String 1-32 O
Expiry specifies the
Notification notification sent a few
days before the
service expires.
8. BEFOREEXPIRYINTERVAL Before This parameter Number 30-43200 C
Expiry specifies the number
Interval of minutes before
service package
expiration that the
notification is sent.
The parameter is valid
only when Before
Expiry Notification
is specified.
9. DESCRIPTION Package This parameter String 1-256 O
Description provides additional
service package.
A maximum of 1024 service packages can be configured in the system. Each service package can be
configured with a maximum of 32 services.

[ADD]
PACKAGE:
{PACKAGENAME} = <Package Name>,
{ SUBSCRIPTIONNOTIFICATION } =<Subscription Notification>,
{ MODIFICATIONNOTIFICATION }=<Modification Notification>,

Copyright Huawei
{ BEFOREEXPIRYNOTIFICATION }=<Before Expiry Notification>,

{ BEFOREEXPIRYINTERVAL } = < Before Expiry Interval >,
{DESCRIPTION} = <Package Decription>;
Example:
ADD PACKAGE: PACKAGENAME = "SrvPkg", SPNAME = "default1";
16.1.4 Result
12361: The service package already exists
94256: If parameter BEFOREEXPIRYNOTIFICATION is not be specified, the
parameter BEFOREEXPIRYINTERVAL cannot be specified
16.2 Modify Package (MOD PACKAGE)

MOD PACKAGE is used to modify a service package.

Copyright Huawei

Type or
Value
Range
1. PACKAGENAME Package Name This parameter String 1-32 M

specifies the name
of a service
package.
2. STARTNOTIFICATION Start This parameter String 1-32 O
notification to be
sent to a subscriber
when the service
package takes
effect.
3. ENDNOTIFICATION EndNotification This parameter String 1-32 O
specifies the
notification to be
sent to a subscriber
when the service
package expires.
4. SUBSCRIPTIONNOTIFICATION Subscription This parameter string 1-32 O
notification to be
sent when the
service has been
subscribed to.
5. MODIFICATIONNOTIFICATION Modification This parameter String 1-32 O
notification to be
sent when the
service has been
modified.
6. BEFOREEXPIRYNOTIFICATION Before Expiry This parameter String 1-32 O
notification sent a
few days before the
service expires.

Copyright Huawei
7. BEFOREEXPIRYINTERVAL Before Expiry This parameter Number 30-43200 C

Interval specifies the
number of minutes
before service
package expiration
that the notification
is sent. The
parameter is valid
only when Before
Expiry
Notification is
specified.
8. DESCRIPTION Package This parameter String 1-256 O
information about
the service
package.
The value of SP Name cannot be modified.

[MOD]
PACKAGE:
{ENDNOTIFICATIO} = <End Notification>,
{ SUBSCRIPTIONNOTIFICATION } =<Subscription Notification>,
{ MODIFICATIONNOTIFICATION }=<Modification Notification>,
{ BEFOREEXPIRYNOTIFICATION }=<Before Expiry Notification>,
{ BEFOREEXPIRYINTERVAL } = < Before Expiry Interval >,
{DESCRIPTION} = <Package Description>;
Example:
MOD PACKAGE: PACKAGENAME = "SrvPkg", DESCRIPTION = "Description";
16.2.4 Result
code is displayed:

Copyright Huawei

12362: The service package cannot be found
12512: The service package is associated with a subscriber
90176: The Start Notification and End Notification do not exist
94256: If parameter BEFOREEXPIRYNOTIFICATION is not be specified, the
parameter BEFOREEXPIRYINTERVAL cannot be specified
16.3 Delete Package (RMV PACKAGE)

RMV PACKAGE is used to delete a service package.

Type Value Range
1. PACKAGENAME Package This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

Name name of a service package.

[RMV]
PACKAGE:
{PACKAGENAME} = <Package Name>;
Example:
RMV PACKAGE: PACKAGENAME = "abcd";
16.3.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

12363: The service package is associated with a domain or subscriber
16.4 Add Package Service (ADD PACKAGESERVICE)

ADD PACKAGESERVICE is used to provide a service for a service package.

Type Value Range


[ADD]
PACKAGESERVICE:
Example:
ADD PACKAGESERVICE: PACKAGENAME = "abcd", SERVICENAME = "abcd";
16.4.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

12367: The services in the service package belong to a mutex group
12490: The number of services in the service package exceeds the maximum value (32)
94215: The service already exists in service package
98325: Service package can't subscribe the service with Provisioning managed quota
16.5 Delete Package Service (RMV PACKAGESERVICE)

RMV PACKAGESERVICE is used to delete a service of a service package.

Type Value Range


[RMV]
PACKAGESERVICE:
Example:
RMV PACKAGESERVICE: PACKAGENAME = "abcd", SERVICENAME = "abcd";

Copyright Huawei
16.5.4 Result
94214: The service does not exist in service package

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Mutex Group ManagementMutex Group Management
17 Mutex Group Management
17.1 Add Mutex Group (ADD MUTEXGROUP)

ADD MUTEXGROUP is used to add a mutex group.

Range
1. MUTEXGROUPNAME Mutex This parameter String 1-32 M

Group specifies the
Name name of a
mutex group.
2. SPNAME SP Name This parameter String 1-32 M
specifies the
SP that offers
the mutex
group.
3. MUTEXTYPE Mutex Type This parameter Enumerated Subscribe M
specifies the Activate
conditions for
determining
whether a
service
conflicts with
the services in
the mutex
group.

Copyright Huawei
4. MUTEXOPERATION Mutex This parameter Enumerated Reject M

Operation specifies the Replace,
operation that
the system
Overwrite
performs for Extend Validity
the services in Accumulate
a mutex group. Quota
Extend Validity
and Accumulate
Quota
Overwrite when
delay delete
Overwrite when
quota exhaust
5. ACCUMULATEATTRIBUTE Accumulate This parameter Enumerated Balance, C
Attribute specifies the Consumption
accumulate
attribute for
the quota in a
mutex group
6. DESCRIPTION Mutex This parameter String 1-256 O
Group provides
Description additional
information
about the
mutex group.
A maximum of 128 mutex groups can be configured in the system. Each mutex group can be configured
with a maximum of 512 services.

[ADD]
MUTEXGROUP:
{MUTEXGROUPNAME} = <Mutex Group Name>,
{SPNAME} = <Service Provider Name>,
{MUTEXTYPE} = <Mutex Type>,
{MUTEXOPERATION} = <Mutex Operation>,
{ACCUMULATEATTRIBUTE}=<Accumulate Attribute>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <Mutex Group Description>;
Example:

Copyright Huawei
ADD MUTEXGROUP: MUTEXGROUPNAME = "MutexGrp", SPNAME = "default1",

MUTEXTYPE = ACTIVATE, MUTEXOPERATION = REPLACE, DESCRIPTION =
"Description";
17.1.4 Result
12364: The mutex group already exists
17.2 Modify Mutex Group (MOD MUTEXGROUP)

MOD MUTEXGROUP is used to modify a mutex group.

Type Value
Range
1. MUTEXGROUPNAME Mutex Group This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

Name name of a mutex group.
2. DESCRIPTION Mutex Group This parameter provides String 1-256 O
Description additional information about
the mutex group.

[MOD]
MUTEXGROUP:

Copyright Huawei
{DESCRIPTION} = <Mutex Group Description>;

Example:
MOD MUTEXGROUP: MUTEXGROUPNAME = "abcd", DESCRIPTION = "abcdef";
17.2.4 Result
12365: The mutex group cannot be found
17.3 Delete Mutex Group (RMV MUTEXGROUP)

RMV MUTEXGROUP is used to delete a mutex group.

Type Value
Range
1. MUTEXGROUPNAME Mutex This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

Group name of a mutex group.
Name

[RMV]
MUTEXGROUP:
{MUTEXGROUPNAME} = <Mutex Group Name> ;
Example:
RMV MUTEXGROUP: MUTEXGROUPNAME = "abcd";

Copyright Huawei
17.3.4 Result
17.4 Add Mutex Service (ADD MUTEXSERVICE)

ADD MUTEXSERVICE is used to provide a service for a mutex group.

Type Value
Range

Name

[ADD]
MUTEXSERVICE:
Example:
ADD MUTEXSERVICE: MUTEXGROUPNAME = "abcd", SERVICENAME = "abcd";

Copyright Huawei
17.4.4 Result
12366: The services of mutually exclusive groups belong to the same service package
12491: The number of services in the mutex group exceeds the maximum value (512)
12526: The mutex groups of same types but different operation attributes can have only
one identical service
12527: If Type is set to Subscribe and Operation is set to any value of Overwrite, Extend
Validity, Accumulate Quota, Extend Validity and Accumulate Quota for a mutex group,
this mutex group cannot use any identical service with the mutex group of other
subscribe types
90149: The services subscribed by the same subscriber group cannot be added into the
same mutex
94217: The service already exists in mutex group
94269: Services in the same mutex group must associated with quotas of same class and
same number
98310: The quota managed by an external entity cannot be associated with a mutex
group with Operation set to Accumulate Quota or Extend Validity and Accumulate Quota
98402: Shared service and not-shared service can not exist in the same mutex group
which type is subscribe
17.5 Delete Mutex Service (RMV MUTEXSERVICE)

RMV MUTEXSERVICE is used to delete service information about a mutex group.

Copyright Huawei

Type Value
Range

Name

[RMV]
MUTEXSERVICE:
Example:
RMV MUTEXSERVICE: MUTEXGROUPNAME = "abcd", SERVICENAME = "abcd";
17.5.4 Result
94216: The service does not exist in mutex group

Copyright Huawei
Application Service Mapping ManagementApplication
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Service Mapping Management
18 Application Service Mapping

Management
18.1 Add Application Service Mapping (ADD

APPLICATIONSERVICEMAPPING)
ADD APPLICATIONSERVICEMAPPING is used to add an application service mapping.

Type Value
Range
1. APPID Application This parameter specifies the String 1-40 M

Identifier application identifier to which a
service maps.
2. SERVICECLASS Service Class This parameter specifies the service String 1-40 M
class to which a service maps.
3. SERVICENAME Service Name This parameter specifies the service String 1-32 M
that maps to a combination of
application identifier and service
class.
The combination of Application Identifier and Service Class is unique. It maps to only one service.
A maximum of 100 application service mapping records can be configured in the system.

[ADD]

Copyright Huawei
APPLICATIONSERVICEMAPPING:
{APPID} = <Application Identifier>,
{SERVICECLASS} = <Service Class>,
Example:
ADD APPLICATIONSERVICEMAPPING: APPID = "abcd", SERVICECLASS = "1",
SERVICENAME = "abcd";
18.1.4 Result
12358: The mapping to the application service already exists
18.2 Modify Application Service Mapping (MOD

MOD APPLICATIONSERVICEMAPPING is used to modify a service mapping.

Type Value
Range

service maps.
2. SERVICECLASS Service Class This parameter specifies the service String 1-40 M
class to which a service maps.

Copyright Huawei
3. SERVICENAME Service Name This parameter specifies the service String 1-32 O
that maps to a combination of
application identifier and service
class.
MOD APPLICATIONSERVICEMAPPING identifies a record by APPID and SERVICECLASS

collectively. In this command, only SERVICENAME can be modified.

[MOD]
{SERVICECLASS} = <Service Class>,
{SERVICENAME}=<Service Name>;
Example:
MOD APPLICATIONSERVICEMAPPING: APPID = "abcd", SERVICECLASS = "1",
SERVICENAME = " Test_service ";
18.2.4 Result
12357: The mapping to the application service cannot be found

Copyright Huawei
18.3 Delete Application Service Mapping (RMV

RMV APPLICATIONSERVICEMAPPING is used to delete an application service
mapping.

Type Value
Range

service maps.
2. SERVICECLASS Service Class This parameter specifies the String 1-40 M
service class to which a service
maps.

[RMV]
{SERVICECLASS} = <Service Class>;
Example:
RMV APPLICATIONSERVICEMAPPING: APPID = "abcd", SERVICECLASS = "2";
18.3.4 Result
12357: The mapping to the application service cannot be found

Copyright Huawei

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Domain ManagementDomain Management
19 Domain Management
19.1 Add Domain (ADD DOMAIN)

ADD DOMAIN is used to add a domain.

Type Value
Range
1. DOMAINNAME Domain Name This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

name of a domain.
2. DESCRIPTION Domain This parameter provides String 1-256 O
Description additional information about the
domain.
A maximum of 1,024 domains can be configured in the system. Each domain can be configured with a
maximum of 512 services and a maximum of 512 service packages.

[ADD]
DOMAIN:
{DOMAINNAME} = <Domain Name>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <Domain Description>;
Example:
ADD DOMAIN: DOMAINNAME = "abcd", DESCRIPTION = "abcd";

Copyright Huawei
19.1.4 Result
19.2 Modify Domain (MOD DOMAIN)

MOD DOMAIN is used to modify a domain.

Type Value
Range
1. DOMAINNAME Domain Name This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

name of a domain.
2. DESCRIPTION Domain This parameter provides String 1-256 O
domain.
The domain that has Domain Name set to default1 cannot be modified.

[MOD]
DOMAIN:
{DESCRIPTION} = <Domain Description>;

Copyright Huawei
Example:
MOD DOMAIN: DOMAINNAME = "abcd", DESCRIPTION = "abcdef";
19.2.4 Result
12306: The domain does not exist
19.3 Delete Domain (RMV DOMAIN)

RMV DOMAIN is used to delete a domain.

Type Range
1. DOMAINNAME Domain This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

Name name of a domain.
The domain that has Domain Name set to default1 cannot be deleted.

[RMV]
DOMAIN:
{DOMAINNAME} = <Domain Name>;
Example:
RMV DOMAIN: DOMAINNAME = "abcd";

Copyright Huawei
19.3.4 Result
12386: The domain is associated with a subscriber, a subscriber group, or a device
19.4 Add Domain Service (ADD DOMAINSERVICE)

ADD DOMAINSERVICE is used to provide a service for a domain.

Type Range

Each domain can be configured with a maximum of 512 services.

This command cannot be used to add a service for the domain that has Domain Name set to
default1.

[ADD]
DOMAINSERVICE:

Copyright Huawei
{ SERVICENAME} = <Service Name>;

Example:
ADD DOMAINSERVICE: DOMAINNAME = "abcd", SERVICENAME = "abcd";
19.4.4 Result
12492: The number of services of the domain exceeds the maximum value (512)
94274: The service already exists in the domain
19.5 Delete Domain Service (RMV DOMAINSERVICE)

RMV DOMAINSERVICE is used to delete a service associated with a domain.

Type Range

This command cannot be used to delete a service for the domain that has Domain Name set to default1.

Copyright Huawei

[RMV]
DOMAINSERVICE:
Example:
RMV DOMAINSERVICE: DOMAINNAME = "abcd", SERVICENAME = "abcd";
19.5.4 Result
94275: The service does not exist in the domain
19.6 Add Domain Package (ADD DOMAINPACKAGE)

ADD DOMAINPACKAGE is used to provide a service package for a domain.

Type Value Range

Name name of a package.

Copyright Huawei
Each domain can be configured with a maximum of 512 packages.

This command can not be used to add a service package for the domain that has Domain Name set to
default1.

[ADD]
DOMAINPACKAGE:
Example:
ADD DOMAINPACKAGE: DOMAINNAME = "abcd", PACKAGENAME = "abcd";
19.6.4 Result
12493: The number of service packages of the domain exceeds the maximum value (512)
94276: The service package already exists in the domain
19.7 Delete Domain Package (RMV DOMAINPACKAGE)

RMV DOMAINPACKAGE is used to delete a service package associated with a domain.

Copyright Huawei

Type Value Range

Name name of a package.
This command cannot be used to delete a service package associated with the domain that has Domain
Name set to default1.

[RMV]
DOMAINPACKAGE:
Example:
RMV DOMAINPACKAGE: DOMAINNAME = "abcd", PACKAGENAME = "abcd";
19.7.4 Result
94277: The service package does not exist in the domain

Copyright Huawei
Charging Server Group ManagementCharging Server
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Group Management
20 Charging Server Group Management
20.1 Add Charging Server Group(ADD

CHARGINGSERVERGROUP)
ADD CHARGINGSERVERGROUP is used to add a charging server group.

Type Value Range
1. CHARGIN Charging This String 1-32 M

GSERVER Server parameter
GROUPN Group Name specifies the
AME name of a
charging
server group.
2. DESTINA Destination This Number 0-16 O
TIONPCE PCEF parameter
F specifies the
PCEF to
which the
current
charging
server is to be
delivered.

Copyright Huawei
3. DESCRIP Charging This String 1-256 O

TION Server parameter
Group provides
information
about the
charging
server group.
Charging Server Group Name cannot be the same as an existing charging server group name.
A maximum of 1,024 charging server groups can be configured in the system.

[ADD]
CHARGINGSERVERGROUP:
{CHARGINGSERVERGROUPNAME} = < Charging Server Group Name >,
{DESTINATIONPCEF} = < Destination PCEF >,
{DESCRIPTION} = < Charging Server Group Description >;
Example:
ADD CHARGINGSERVERGROUP: CHARGINGSERVERGROUPNAME = "abcd",
DESTINATIONPCEF = 1, DESCRIPTION = " CHARGINGSERVERGROUPNAME
description";
20.1.4 Result
94500: The charging server group already exists
94502: The number of charging server group exceeds the maximum value.(1024)

Copyright Huawei
20.2 Modify Charging Server Group(MOD

MOD CHARGINGSERVERGROUP is used to modify a charging server group.

Type Value Range

AME name of a
charging
server group.
2. DESTINA Destination This Number 0-16 O
TIONPCE PCEF parameter
F specifies the
PCEF to
which the
current
charging
server is to be
delivered.
3. DESCRIP Charging This String 1-256 O
TION Server parameter
Group provides
information
about the
charging
server group.

[MOD]
{CHARGINGSERVERGROUPNAME} = < Charging Server Group Name >,
{DESTINATIONPCEF} = < Destination PCEF >,
{DESCRIPTION} = < Charging Server Group Description >;
Example:

Copyright Huawei
MOD CHARGINGSERVERGROUP: CHARGINGSERVERGROUPNAME = "abcd",

DESTINATIONPCEF = 1, DESCRIPTION = " CHARGINGSERVERGROUPNAME
description";
20.2.4 Result
94501: The charging server group does not exist
20.3 Delete Charging Server Group(RMV

RMV CHARGINGSERVERGROUP is used to delete a charging server group.

Type Value Range

AME name of a
charging
server group.

[RMV]
{CHARGINGSERVERGROUPNAME} = < Charging Server Group Name >;
Example:

Copyright Huawei
RMV CHARGINGSERVERGROUP: CHARGINGSERVERGROUPNAME = "abcd";
20.3.4 Result
94503: The charging server group cannot be deleted because it is associated with
subscriber group
20.4 Add Charging Server (ADD CHARGINGSERVER)

ADD CHARGINGSERVER is used to add a charging server.

Type or
Value
Range
1. CHARGINGSERVERNAME Charging This parameter String 1-32 M

Server specifies the name of a
Name charging server.
2. PRIMARYONLINEURI Primary This parameter String 1-64 O
Online URI specifies the URI of
the primary online
server.
3. SECONDONLINEURI Second This parameter String 1-64 C
the secondary online
server.
4. PRIMARYOFFLINEURI Primary This parameter String 1-64 O
Offline URI specifies the URI of
the primary offline
server.

Copyright Huawei
5. SECONDOFFLINEURI Second This parameter String 1-64 C

the secondary offline
server.
6. DESCRIPTION Charging This parameter String 1-256 O
Server provides additional
Description information about the
charging server.
7. CHARGINGSERVERGROUPNAME Charging This parameter String 1-32 M
Group charging server group.
Name
Charging Server Name cannot be the same as an existing charging server name. A maximum of
1,024 charging servers can be configured in the system.
Before setting the parameters of the charging servers, you must configure the primary online server
or primary offline server. The secondary server can be configured only after the primary server is
configured. At least one of the Primary Online URI and Primary Offline URI parameters must be
specified.
The format of the URI can be:
aaa://host.example.com:1813;transport=udp;protocol=radius or
aaas://host.example.com:1813;transport=udp;protocol=radius

[ADD]
CHARGINGSERVER:
{CHARGINGSERVERNAME} = <Charging Server Name >,
{PRIMARYONLINEURI} = <Primary Online URI>,
{SECONDONLINEURI} = <Secondary Online URI>,
{PRIMARYOFFLINEURI} = <Primary Offline URI>,
{SECONDOFFLINEURI} = <Secondary Offline URI>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <Charging Server Description>,
Example:
ADD CHARGINGSERVER: CHARGINGSERVERNAME = "abcd",
PRIMARYONLINEURI =
"aaa://host1.example1.com:1813\;transport=udp\;protocol=radius", SECONDONLINEURI =
"aaa://host2.example2.com:1813\;transport=udp\;protocol=radius", PRIMARYOFFLINEURI
= "aaa://host3.example3.com:1813\;transport=udp\;protocol=radius", SECONDOFFLINEURI
= "aaa://host4.example4.com:1813\;transport=udp\;protocol=radius", DESCRIPTION =
"abcd", CHARGINGSERVERGROUPNAME = "group1";

Copyright Huawei
20.4.4 Result
12463: The charging server already exists
12464: You cannot configure the secondary URI because the primary URI is empty
12465: You must configure at least one primary URI
94504: The number of charging server exceeds the maximum value.(1024)
94505: The format is incorrect. The value must be in the format of [aaa|
aaas]://hostname[:port][;transport=tcp|sctp|udp][;protocol=diameter|radius|tacacs+]. If
transport is not specified, the default value sctp is used. If protocol is not specified, the
default value diameter is used. When protocol is set to diameter, transport cannot be set
to udp. When protocol is set to radius, transport can only be set to udp
20.5 Modify Charging Server (MOD

CHARGINGSERVER)
MOD CHARGINGSERVER is used to modify a charging server.

Type or
Value
Range

Server Name specifies the name
of a charging server.

Copyright Huawei
2. PRIMARYONLINEURI Primary This parameter String 1-64 O

the primary online
server.
3. SECONDONLINEURI Second This parameter String 1-64 C
the secondary online
server.
4. PRIMARYOFFLINEURI Primary This parameter String 1-64 O
the primary offline
server.
5. SECONDOFFLINEURI Second This parameter String 1-64 C
the secondary
offline server.
6. DESCRIPTION Charging This parameter String 1-256 O
Server provides additional
Description information about
the charging server.
7. CHARGINGSERVERGROUPNAME Charging This parameter String 1-32 M
Server Group specifies the name
Name of a charging server
group.
A maximum of 1,024 charging servers can be configured in the system.

Before setting the parameters of the charging servers, you must configure the primary online server
or primary offline server. The secondary server can be configured only after the primary server is
configured.
The format of the URI can be:
aaa://host.example.com:1813;transport=udp;protocol=radius or
aaas://host.example.com:1813;transport=udp;protocol=radius

[MOD]
CHARGINGSERVER:
{CHARGINGSERVERNAME} = <Charging server Name>,
{PRIMARYONLINEURI} = <Primary Online URI>,
{SECONDONLINEURI} = <Secondary Online URI>,
{PRIMARYOFFLINEURI} = <Primary Offline URI>,
{SECONDOFFLINEURI} = <Secondary Offline URI>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <Charging Server Description>,

Copyright Huawei

Example:
MOD CHARGINGSERVER: CHARGINGSERVERNAME = "abcd",
PRIMARYONLINEURI =
"aaa://host1.example1.com:1813\;transport=udp\;protocol=radius", SECONDONLINEURI =
"aaa://host2.example2.com:1813\;transport=udp\;protocol=radius",
PRIMARYOFFLINEURI =
"aaa://host3.example3.com:1813\;transport=udp\;protocol=radius", SECONDOFFLINEURI =
"aaa://host4.example4.com:1813\;transport=udp\;protocol=radius", DESCRIPTION = "abcd",
CHARGINGSERVERGROUPNAME = "group1";
20.5.4 Result
12461: The charging server does not exist
12464: You cannot configure the secondary URI because the primary URI is empty
94505: The format is incorrect. The value must be in the format of [aaa|
aaas]://hostname[:port][;transport=tcp|sctp|udp][;protocol=diameter|radius|tacacs+]. If
transport is not specified, the default value sctp is used. If protocol is not specified, the
default value diameter is used. When protocol is set to diameter, transport cannot be set
to udp. When protocol is set to radius, transport can only be set to udp
20.6 Delete Charging Server (RMV CHARGINGSERVER)

RMV CHARGINGSERVER is used to delete a charging server.

Copyright Huawei

Type Value
Range

Name charging server.
2 CHARGINGSERVERGROUPNAME Charging This parameter String 1-32 M
Group charging server group.
Name

[RMV]
CHARGINGSERVER:
{CHARGINGSERVERNAME} = <Charging Server Name>
Example:
RMV CHARGINGSERVER: CHARGINGSERVERNAME = "abcd",
CHARGINGSERVERGROUPNAME="group1";
20.6.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
Subscriber Group ManagementSubscriber Group
21 Subscriber Group Management
21.1 Add Subscriber Group (ADD SUBSCRIBERGROUP)

ADD SUBSCRIBERGROUP is used to add a dynamic subscriber group.

Value
Range
1. SUBSCRIBER Subscriber This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

GROUPNAME Group Name name of a subscriber group.
2. SUBSCRIBER Subscriber This parameter specifies the Enumerated Dynamic O
GROUPTYPE Group Type type of a subscriber group.
3. PRECEDENC Precedence This parameter specifies the Number 0-128 O
E priority of a subscriber
group.
4. CHARGINGS Charging This parameter specifies the String 1-32 O
ERVER Server Group charging server group that is
associated with a subscriber
group.
5. ACCESSMCC Access MCC This parameter specifies the String 1-6 O
MNC MNC MCC MNC that a
subscriber group uses to
access the network. The
value of this parameter must
be digits.
6. IMSIPREFIX IMSI Prefix This parameter specifies the String 1-16 O
IMSI prefix of a subscriber
group.

Copyright Huawei

Value
Range
7. MSISDNPREF MSISDN This parameter specifies the String 1-16 O

IX Prefix MSISDN prefix of a
subscriber group. The value
of this parameter must be
digits.
8. IPADDRESS IPv4 Address This parameter specifies the String 1-40 O
IPv4 address of a subscriber
group.
9. MASK IPv4 Mask or This parameter specifies the String 1-40 O
Prefix Length IPv4 mask of a subscriber
group or prefix length of the
mask.
10. PCEFHOSTN PCEF Host This parameter specifies the String 1-64 O
AME Name PCEF host name that is
group.
11. PCEFDOMAI PCEF Domain This parameter specifies the String 1-64 O
NNAME Name PCEF domain name that is
group.
12. APN APN This parameter specifies the String 1-64 O
APN that a subscriber group
uses to access the network.
13. PAIDTYPE Paid Type This parameter specifies the Enumerated NULL O
paid type of a subscriber Prepaid
group.
Postpaid
14. CATEGORY Category This parameter specifies the String 1-12 O
category of a subscriber
group.
15. ROAMINGST Roaming This parameter specifies Enumerated Roaming O
ATUS Status whether local subscribers or Friend
roaming subscribers are
added to a subscriber group. Local
NULL

Copyright Huawei

Value
Range
16. APPLYTYPE Apply Type This parameter specifies the Enumerated Default O
application type of a For-
subscriber group. Existent-
Subscrib
er
For-Non-
existent-
Subscrib
er
For-Non-
Subscrip
tion
For-DB-
Error
IMS_Eme
rgency
17. DYNSUBMA DynSubMaxO This parameter specifies the Number 0-30 C
XOFFLINEDA fflineDays data storage duration for a
YS dynamically generated
subscriber who is in an
offline mode. The parameter
is valid if Apply Type is set
to For-Non-existent-
Subscriber.
18. DESCRIPTIO Subscriber This parameter provides String 1-256 O
N Group additional information
Description about the subscriber group.
19. IPv6ADDRES IPv6 Address This parameter specifies the String 1-40 O
S IPv6 address of a subscriber
group.
20. IPv6PREFIXL IPv6 Mask or This parameter specifies the String 1-40 O
ENGTH Prefix Length IPv6 mask of a subscriber
group or prefix length of the
mask.
21. CUSTOMERA Subscriber This parameter specifies the O
TTR customized customized subscriber Number 0-65535
attributes attribute.

Copyright Huawei
A maximum of 128 dynamic subscriber groups can be configured in the system. Each group is
configured with a maximum of 10 services.
The values of Access MCC MNC and MSISDN Prefix must be digits. The values of IP Address
and Mask must be in IPv4 format.

[ADD]
SUBSCRIBERGROUP:
{SUBSCRIBERGROUPNAME} = <Subscriber Group Name>,
{SUBSCRIBERGROUPTYPE} = <Subscriber Group Type>,
{CHARGINGSERVER} = <Charging Server Group >,
{ACCESSMCCMNC} = <SGSNMCCMNC>,
{IMSIPREFIX} = <IMSI Prefix>,
{MSISDNPREFIX} = <MSISDN Prefix>,
{IPADDRESS} = <IPv4 address>,
{MASK} = <IPv4 Mask or Prefix Length>,
{PCEFHOSTNAME} = <PCEF Host Name>,
{PCEFDOMAINNAME} =<PCEF Domain Name>,
{APN} = <APN>,
{PAIDTYPE} = <Paid Type>,
{CATEGORY} = <Category>,
{ROAMINGSTATUS} = <Roaming Status>,
{APPLYTYPE} = <Application Type>,
{DYNSUBMAXOFFLINEDAYS}=<DynSubMaxOfflineDays>,
{DESCRIPTION}=<Subscriber Group Description>,
{IPv6ADDRESS} = <IPv6 Address>,
{IPv6PREFIXLENGTH} = < IPv6 Mask or Prefix Length>,
{CUSTOMERATTR}=<Subscriber customized attributes>;
Example:
ADD SUBSCRIBERGROUP: SUBSCRIBERGROUPNAME = "SUBSCRIBERGRP3",
PRECEDENCE = 8, ACCESSMCCMNC = "123", IMSIPREFIX = "123", MSISDNPREFIX
= "123", IPADDRESS = "1.2.3.4", MASK = "255.0.0.0", PCEFHOSTNAME = "pcef.com",
PCEFDOMAINNAME = "pcef.huawei.com", APN = "huawei", PAIDTYPE = NULL,
CATEGORY = "3", ROAMINGSTATUS = NULL, APPLYTYPE = For-Non-Subscription,
DESCRIPTION = "subscriber3", IPv6ADDRESS = "1:2:3:4::", IPv6PREFIXLENGTH =
"64", CUSTOMERATTR = 1;

Copyright Huawei
21.1.4 Result
12359: The Subscriber Group already exists
12360: The subscriber group cannot be found
12459: The number of dynamic subscriber groups reaches the upper limit (128)
allowed
90150: The priority of dynamic subscriber group already exists
94509: The number of condition groups exceeds the maximum value (1)
21.2 Modify Subscriber Group (MOD

SUBSCRIBERGROUP)
MOD SUBSCRIBERGROUP is used to modify a dynamic subscriber group.

Copyright Huawei

Value
Range
1. SUBSCRIBERGRO Subscriber This parameter String 1-32 M

UPNAME Group Name specifies the name of a
subscriber group.
2. PRECEDENCE Precedence This parameter Number 0-128 O
specifies the priority of
a subscriber group.
3. CHARGINGSERV Charging Server This parameter String 1-32 O
ER Group specifies the charging
server group that is
associated with a
subscriber group.
4. ACCESSMCCMNC Access MCC This parameter String 1-6 O
MNC specifies the MCC
MNC that a subscriber
group uses to access the
network.
5. IMSIPREFIX IMSI Prefix This parameter String 1-16 O
specifies the IMSI
prefix of a subscriber
group.
6. MSISDNPREFIX MSISDN Prefix This parameter String 1-16 O
specifies the MSISDN
prefix of a subscriber
group.
7. IPADDRESS IPv4 Address This parameter String 1-40 O
specifies the IPv4
address of a subscriber
group.
8. MASK IPv4 Mask or This parameter String 1-40 O
Prefix Length specifies the IPv4 mask
of a subscriber group or
prefix length of the
mask.
9. PCEFHOSTNAME PCEF Host This parameter String 1-64 O
Name specifies the PCEF host
name of a subscriber
group.
10. PCEFDOMAINNA PCEF Domain This parameter String 1-64 O
ME Name specifies the PCEF
domain name that is
associated with a
subscriber group.

Copyright Huawei
11. APN APN This parameter String 1-64 O

specifies the APN that a
subscriber group uses to
access the network.
12. PAIDTYPE Paid Type This parameter Enumerated NULL O
specifies the paid type Prepaid
of a subscriber group.
Postpaid
13. CATEGORY Category This parameter String 1-12 O
specifies the category
of a subscriber group.
14. ROAMINGSTATU Roaming Status This parameter Enumerated Roaming O
S specifies whether local Friend
subscribers or roaming
subscribers are added to
Local
a subscriber group. NULL
15. DYNSUBMAXOFF DynSubMaxOffli This parameter Number 0-30 C
LINEDAYS neDays specifies the data
storage duration for a
dynamically generated
subscriber who is in an
offline mode. The
Apply Type is set to
For-Non-existent-
Subscribe.
16. DESCRIPTION Subscriber This parameter String 1-256 O
Group provides additional
Description information about the
subscriber group.
17. IPv6ADDRESS IPv6 Address This parameter String 1-40 O
specifies the IPv6
address of a subscriber
group.
18. IPv6PREFIXLENG IPv6 Mask or This parameter String 1-40 O
TH Prefix Length specifies the IPv6 mask
of a subscriber group or
prefix length of the
mask.
19. CUSTOMERATTR This parameter O
Subscriber
specifies the
customized Number 0-65535
customized subscriber
attributes
attribute.

[MOD]

Copyright Huawei
SUBSCRIBERGROUP:
{CHARGINGSERVER} = <Charging Server Group >,
{ACCESSMCCMNC} = <Access MCC MNC>,
{IMSIPREFIX} = <IMSI Prefix>,
{MSISDNPREFIX} = <MSISDN Prefix>,
{IPADDRESS} = <IPv4 Address>,
{MASK} = <IPv4 Mask or Prefix Length>,
{PCEFHOSTNAME} = <PCEF Host Name>,
{PCEFDOMAINNAME} = <PCEF Domain Name>,
{APN} = <APN>,
{PAIDTYPE} = <Paid Type>,
{CATEGORY} = < Category>,
{ROAMINGSTATUS} = <Roaming Status>,
{DYNSUBMAXOFFLINEDAYS} = <DynSubMaxOfflineDays>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <Subscriber Group Description>,
{IPv6ADDRESS} = <IPv6 Address>,
{IPv6PREFIXLENGTH} = < IPv6 Mask or Prefix Length>,
{CUSTOMERATTR}=<Subscriber customized attributes>;
Example:
MOD SUBSCRIBERGROUP: SUBSCRIBERGROUPNAME="SUBSCRIBERGRP3",
PRECEDENCE = 8, ACCESSMCCMNC="123", IMSIPREFIX="123",
MSISDNPREFIX="123", IPADDRESS="1.2.3.4", MASK="255.0.0.0",
PCEFHOSTNAME="pcef.com", PCEFDOMAINNAME="pcef.huawei.com",
APN="huawei", PAIDTYPE = NULL, CATEGORY = "3", ROAMINGSTATUS=NULL,
DESCRIPTION="subscriber3", IPv6ADDRESS = "1:2:3:4::", IPv6PREFIXLENGTH = "64",
CUSTOMERATTR = 1;
21.2.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

12306: The domain does not exist.
allowed
90150: The priority of dynamic subscriber group already exists
94227: Not allowed to modify the Apply Type
94251: If parameter APPLYTYPE is set to For-Non-Existent-Subscriber or For-DB-
Error, the parameter PAIDTYPE.CATEGORY cannot be specified. If parameter
APPLYTYPE is not set to For-Non-Existent-Subscriber, the parameter
DYNSUBMAXOFFLINEDAYS cannot be specified
21.3 Delete Subscriber Group (RMV

SUBSCRIBERGROUP)
RMV SUBSCRIBERGROUP is used to delete a dynamic subscriber group.

Type Value
Range
1. SUBSCRIBERGROUPNAME Subscriber This parameter String 1-32 M

Group Name specifies the name of a
subscriber group.

[RMV]

Copyright Huawei
SUBSCRIBERGROUP:
{SUBSCRIBERGROUPNAME} = <Subscriber Group Name>;
Example:
RMV SUBSCRIBERGROUP: SUBSCRIBERGROUPNAME = "UserGrp1";
21.3.4 Result
21.4 Add Condition Group for a Subscriber Group (ADD

SUBGRPCONGRP)
ADD SUBGRPCONGRP is used to provide a condition group for a subscriber group.

Type Value
Range

subscriber group.
Group Name specifies the conditions
for a subscriber group
to take effect.

Copyright Huawei

[ADD]
SUBGRPCONGRP:
{ SUBSCRIBERGROUPNAME }=< Subscriber Group Name >,
{ CONDITIONGROUPNAME } =< Condition Group Name >;
Example:
ADD SUBGRPCONGRP: SUBSCRIBERGROUPNAME = "UserGrp1",
CONDITIONGROUPNAME="ConGrp1";
21.4.4 Result
12440: The condition group already exists
94509: The number of condition groups exceeds the maximum value (1)
94510: The element of the condition group does not match the subscriber group
21.5 Delete Condition Group for a Subscriber Group

(RMV SUBGRPCONGRP)
RMV SUBGRPCONGRP is used to delete a condition group for a subscriber group.

Copyright Huawei

Type Value
Range

subscriber group.
Group Name specifies the conditions
for a subscriber group
to take effect.

[RMV]
SUBGRPCONGRP:
{ SUBSCRIBERGROUPNAME }=< Subscriber Group Name >,
{ CONDITIONGROUPNAME } =< Condition Group Name >;
Example:
RMV SUBGRPCONGRP: SUBSCRIBERGROUPNAME = "UserGrp1",
CONDITIONGROUPNAME="ConGrp1";
21.5.4 Result
94522: The condition group does not exist in the subscriber group

Copyright Huawei
21.6 Add Subscriber Group Service (ADD

SUBSCRIBERGROUPSERVICE)
ADD SUBSCRIBERGROUPSERVICE is used to provide a service for a subscriber group.

Type Value
Range

subscriber group.
4. SERVICENAME Service Name This parameter String 1-32 M
specifies the name of a
service.
Each dynamic subscriber group is configured with a maximum of five services.

[ADD]
SUBSCRIBERGROUPSERVICE:
{SERVICENAME} = <Service name>;
Example:
ADD SUBSCRIBERGROUPSERVICE: SUBSCRIBERGROUPNAME = "abcd",
21.6.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

12466: The number of services associated with this subscriber group reaches the upper
limit (5)
12352: The services conflict
12521: Service with account cannot be subscribed by dynamic subscriber group
12520: Service with quota cannot be subscribed by dynamic subscriber group
90151: The Account of the subscriber group exceed
90152: The Quota of the subscriber group exceed
94236: The service already exists in subscriber group
94278: If Apply Type is set to Default or For-DB-Error for a dynamic subscriber group,
this group cannot be associated with trigger UsageStatusChange, AccountStatusChange,
UsageReport, or UsageThresholdReached
94330: Subscriber group can't subscribe BOD service
94606: Subscriber group can't subscribe the service with Provisioning managed quota
21.7 Delete Subscriber Group Service (RMV

SUBSCRIBERGROUPSERVICE)
RMV SUBSCRIBERGROUPSERVICE is used to delete a service associated with a
subscriber group.

Type Value
Range

subscriber group.
4. SERVICENAME Service Name This parameter String 1-32 M
specifies the name of a
service.

[RMV]
SUBSCRIBERGROUPSERVICE:

Copyright Huawei

{SERVICENAME} = <Service name>;
Example:
RMV SUBSCRIBERGROUPSERVICE: SUBSCRIBERGROUPNAME = "abcd",
21.7.4 Result
94235: The service is not associated with the subscriber group, and therefore it cannot be
deleted

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Terminal Type ManagementTerminal Type Management
22 Terminal Type Management
22.1 Add Terminal Type (ADD TERMINALTYPE)

ADD TERMINALTYPE is used to add a terminal type.

Type Value
Range
1. TERMINALTYPENAME Terminal Type This parameter specifies String 1-32 M

Name the name of a terminal
type.
2. DESCRIPTION Terminal Type This parameter provides String 1-256 O
Description additional information
about the terminal type.
A maximum of 128 terminal types can be configured in the system.

[ADD]
TERMINALTYPE:
{TERMINALTYPENAME} = <Terminal Type Name>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <Terminal Type Description>;
Example:
ADD TERMINALTYPE: TERMINALTYPENAME = "abcd", DESCRIPTION = "aaaa";

Copyright Huawei
22.1.4 Result
90136: The terminal type already exists
90146: The number of the terminal type cannot exceed max (128)
22.2 Modify Terminal Type (MOD TERMINALTYPE)

MOD TERMINALTYPE is used to modify a terminal type.

Type Value
Range
1. TERMINALTYPENAME Terminal Type This parameter identifies a String 1-32 M

Name terminal type.
2. DESCRIPTION Terminal Type This parameter provides String 1-256 O
about the terminal type.

[MOD]
TERMINALTYPE:
{DESCRIPTION} = <Terminal Type Description>;
Example:
MOD TERMINALTYPE: TERMINALTYPENAME = "abcd", DESCRIPTION = "bbbb";

Copyright Huawei
22.2.4 Result
90137: The terminal type does not exist
22.3 Delete Terminal Type (RMV TERMINALTYPE)

RMV TERMINALTYPE is used to delete a terminal type.

Type Value Range
1. TERMINALTYPENAME Terminal This parameter identifies String 1-32 M

Type Name a terminal type.

[RMV]
TERMINALTYPE:
{TERMINALTYPENAME} = <Terminal Type Name>;
Example:
RMV TERMINALTYPE: TERMINALTYPENAME = "abcd";
22.3.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
22.4 Add Terminal (ADD TERMINAL)

ADD TERMINAL is used to provide a terminal for a terminal type.

Type Value
Range
1. TERMINALTYPENAME Terminal This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

Type Name name of a terminal type.
2. IMEIPREFIX IMEI Prefix This parameter specifies the String 1-16 M
IMEI prefix. The value of
IMEI Prefix must be digits.
3. TERMINALNAME Terminal This parameter specifies the String 1-32 O
Name name of a terminal.
A maximum of 2,048 terminals can be configured in the system.

[ADD]
TERMINAL:
{IMEIPREFIX} = <IMEI Prefix>,
{TERMINALNAME} = <Terminal Name>;
Example:
ADD TERMINAL: TERMINALTYPENAME = "abcd", IMEIPREFIX = "456",
TERMINALNAME = "abcd";

Copyright Huawei
22.4.4 Result
90144: The IMEI prefix already exist
90147: The number of the terminal cannot exceed max (2048)
22.5 Modify Terminal (MOD TERMINAL)

MOD TERMINAL is used to modify a terminal associated with a terminal type.

Type Value
Range
1. TERMINALTYPENAME Terminal This parameter specifies String 1-32 M

Type Name the name of a terminal
type.
2. IMEIPREFIX IMEI Prefix This parameter specifies String 1-16 O
the IMEI prefix.
3. TERMINALNAME Terminal This parameter specifies String 1-32 O
Name the name of a terminal.

[MOD]
TERMINAL:

Copyright Huawei
{IMEIPREFIX} = <IMEI Prefix>,

{TERMINALNAME} = <Terminal Name >;
Example:
MOD TERMINAL: TERMINALTYPENAME = "abcd", IMEIPREFIX = "456",
TERMINALNAME = "eeee";
22.5.4 Result
90145: The IMEI prefix does not exist
22.6 Delete Terminal (RMV TERMINAL)

RMV TERMINAL is used to delete a terminal associated with a terminal type.

Type Value
Range
1. TERMINALTYPENAME Terminal This parameter specifies String 1-32 M

Type Name the name of a terminal
type.
2. IMEIPREFIX IMEI Prefix This parameter specifies String 1-16 O
the IMEI prefix.

[RMV]

Copyright Huawei
TERMINAL:
{IMEIPREFIX} = <IMEI Prefix>;
Example:
RMV TERMINAL: TERMINALTYPENAME = "abcd", IMEIPREFIX= "456";
22.6.4 Result
90145: The IMEI prefix does not exist

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Roam Region ManagementRoam Region Management
23 Roam Region Management
23.1 Add Roam Region (ADD ROAMREGION)

ADD ROAMREGION is used to add a roaming region.

Type Value
Range
1. ROAMREGIONIDENTITY Roam Region This parameter identifies String 1-32 M

Identity a roaming region.
2. DESCRIPTION Roam Region This parameter provides String 1-256 O
about the roaming region.
Roam Region Identity cannot be the same as an existing roaming region identity.
A maximum of 128 roaming regions can be configured in the system

[ADD]
ROAMREGION:
{ROAMREGIONIDENTITY} = <Roam Region Identity>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <Roam Region Description>;
Example:
ADD ROAMREGION: ROAMREGIONIDENTITY = "ROAM1", DESCRIPTION = "abcd";

Copyright Huawei
23.1.4 Result
12498: The number of PLMNs in the roaming region exceeds the maximum value (512)
12610: The RoamRegion already exists
23.2 Modify Roam Region (MOD ROAMREGION)

MOD ROAMREGION is used to modify a roaming region.

Type Value
Range
1. ROAMREGIONIDENTITY Roam Region This parameter identifies String 1-32 M

Identity a roaming region.
2. DESCRIPTION Roam Region This parameter provides String 1-256 O
about the roaming region.

[MOD]
ROAMREGION:
{DESCRIPTION} = <Roam Region Description>;
Example:

Copyright Huawei
MOD ROAMREGION: ROAMREGIONIDENTITY = "ROAM1", DESCRIPTION = "jjjj";
23.2.4 Result
12611: The RoamRegion cannot be found
23.3 Delete Roam Region (RMV ROAMREGION)

RMV ROAMREGION is used to delete a roaming region.

Type Value
Range
1. ROAMREGIONIDENTITY Roam This parameter String 1-32 M

Region identifies a roaming
Identity region.

[RMV]
ROAMREGION:
{ROAMREGIONIDENTITY} = <Roam Region Identity>;
Example:
RMV ROAMREGION: ROAMREGIONIDENTITY = "ROAM1";
23.3.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

23.4 Add Roam Region PLMN (ADD

ROAMREGIONPLMN)
ADD ROAMREGIONPLMN is used to provide a PLMN for a roaming region.

Type Value
Range

Identity region.
2. PLMNIDENTITY PLMN This parameter String 1-32 M
Identity identifies a PLMN.
The PLMN to be associated with the roaming region must already exists in the system.
A PLMN can be homed to a maximum of 10 roaming regions.

[ADD]
ROAMREGIONPLMN:
{ROAMREGIONIDENTITY} = <Roam Region Identity >,
{PLMNIDENTITY} = <PLMN Identity>;
Example:

Copyright Huawei
ADD ROAMREGIONPLMN: ROAMREGIONIDENTITY = "ROAM1", PLMNIDENTITY

= "PLMN1";
23.4.4 Result
12355: The PLMN cannot be found
12498: The number of PLMNs in the roaming region exceeds the maximum value (512)
12625: The PLMN already exists in roaming region
94576: One of the PLMNs has already been joined in ten Roam Region
23.5 Delete Roam Region PLMN (RMV

ROAMREGIONPLMN)
RMV ROAMREGIONPLMN is used to delete a PLMN associated with a roaming region.

Type Value
Range

Identity region.
2. PLMNIDENTITY PLMN This parameter String 1-32 M
Identity identifies a PLMN.

[RMV]

Copyright Huawei
ROAMREGIONPLMN:
Example:
RMV ROAMREGIONPLMN: ROAMREGIONIDENTITY = "ROAM1", PLMNIDENTITY
= "PLMN1";
23.5.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction PLMN ManagementPLMN Management
24 PLMN Management
24.1 Add PLMN (ADD PLMN)

ADD PLMN is used to add a PLMN.

Value Range
1. PLMNIDENTITY PLMN This parameter identifies a String 1-32 M

Identity PLMN.
2. PLMNTYPE PLMN This parameter specifies the Enumerated Local M
Type type of a PLMN. Friend
Outer
Forbidden
3. MCC MCC This parameter specifies the String 3 O
mobile country code
mapping the PLMN. The
value of MCC must be
digits.
4. MNC MNC This parameter identifies the String 2-3 O
mobile network mapping the
PLMN. The value of MNC
must be digits. Both MNC
and MCC must be specified
simultaneously.
5. DESCRIPTION PLMN This parameter provides String 1-256 O
Description additional information about
the PLMN.

Copyright Huawei
The PLMN identity must be unique in the system.

A maximum of 1,024 PLMNs can be configured in the system.
The MNC is a number of two or three digits, and the MCC is a number of three digits. Pad left with
zeros to three digits if required.

[ADD]
PLMN:
{PLMNIDENTITY} = <PLMN Identity>,
{PLMNTYPE} = <PLMN Type>,
{MCC} = <MCC>,
{MNC} = <MNC>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <PLMN Description>;
Example:
ADD PLMN: PLMNIDENTITY = "PLMN_1", PLMNTYPE = Local, MCC = "024", MNC =
"111", DESCRIPTION = "PLMN_1";
24.1.4 Result
12356: The PLMN already exists
12497: The MCC and MNC must both exist or both not exist

Copyright Huawei
24.2 Modify PLMN (MOD PLMN)

MOD PLMN is used to modify a PLMN.

Value Range

Identity PLMN.
2. PLMNTYPE PLMN This parameter specifies the Enumerated Local O
Type type of a PLMN. Friend
Outer
Forbidden
3. MCC MCC This parameter specifies the String 3 O
mobile country code
value of MCC must be
digits.
4. MNC MNC This parameter identifies String 2-3 O
the mobile network
value of MNC must be
digits. Both MNC and
MCC must be specified
simultaneously.
5. DESCRIPTION PLMN This parameter String 1-256 O
information about a PLMN.

[MOD]
PLMN:
{PLMNTYPE} = <PLMN Type>,
{MCC} = <MCC>,
{MNC}= <MNC>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <PLMN Description> ;
Example:

Copyright Huawei
MOD PLMN: PLMNIDENTITY = "PLMN_1", PLMNTYPE = Outer, MCC = "132", MNC =

"369", DESCRIPTION = " PLMN_1";
24.2.4 Result
12356: The PLMN already exists
12497: The MCC and MNC must both exist or both not exist
24.3 Delete PLMN (RMV PLMN)

RMV PLMN is used to delete a PLMN.

Type Range

Identity PLMN.

[RMV]
PLMN:
Example:
RMV PLMN: PLMNIDENTITY = "PLMN_1";

Copyright Huawei
24.3.4 Result
12614: The PLMN has been referenced
24.4 Add PLMN SGSN (ADD PLMNSGSN)

ADD PLMNSGSN is used to add an SGSN for a PLMN.

Range
1. SGSNIDENTITY SGSN This parameter identifies String 1-32 M

Identity an SGSN.
2. PLMNIDENTITY PLMN This parameter identifies String 1-32 M
Identity a PLMN.
3. SGSNTYPE SGSN Type This parameter indicate Enumerated IP Address O
the type of an SGSN. Global Title
4. SGSNNUMBER SGSN This parameter specifies String 1-15 C
Number the number of an SGSN.
5. IPADDRESS IP Address This parameter specifies String 1-40 C
the IP address of an
SGSN.
The IP address can be in
IPv4 or IPv6 format.

Copyright Huawei
6. IPMASK IP Mask or This parameter specifies String 1-40 C

Prefix Length the mask of an SGSN IP
address or prefix length
of the mask.
7. DESCRIPTION SGSN This parameter provides String 1-256 O
about the SGSN.
SGSN Identity cannot be the same as an existing SGSN identity.

A maximum of 4,096 SGSNs can be configured in the system.
The network address of an SGSN belongs to only one PLMN. The network addresses of SGSNs are
different no matter whether the SGSNs are in the same or different PLMNs.
The network address of an SGSN is obtained by performing an AND operation between the IP
Address and the IP Mask.
SGSN Type can be set to IP Address or Global Title. If SGSN Type is set to Global Title, provide
the SGSN number. Otherwise, provide the network address of the SGSN.

[ADD]
PLMNSGSN:
{SGSNIDENTITY} = <SGSN Identity>,
{IPADDRESS} = <IP Address>,
{ SGSNTYPE } = <SGSN Type>,
{ SGSNNUMBER } = <SGSN Number>,
{IPMASK} = <IP Mask or Prefix Length>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <SGSN Description>;
Example:
ADD PLMNSGSN: PLMNIDENTITY = "PLMN_1", SGSNIDENTITY = "SGSN1",
SGSNTYPE =IP Address,IPADDRESS = "1.1.1.1",IPMASK =
"255.255.0.0",DESCRIPTION = " PLMN_1";
ADD PLMNSGSN: PLMNIDENTITY = "PLMN_2", SGSNIDENTITY = "SGSN2",
SGSNTYPE =Global Title,SGSNNUMBER = "46013801",DESCRIPTION = " PLMN_2";
24.4.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

allowed
12499: The number of SGSNs in the PLMN exceeds the maximum value
12612: The SGSN already exists
12629: The IP address and mask configured for an SGSN must be unique
12630: The subnet addresses configured for an SGSN must be unique
24.5 Modify PLMN SGSN (MOD PLMNSGSN)

MOD PLMNSGSN is used to modify an SGSN of a PLMN.

Type Value
Range
1. SGSNIDENTITY SGSN This parameter identifies an SGSN. String 1-32 M

Identity
2. PLMNIDENTITY PLMN This parameter identifies a PLMN. String 1-32 M
Identity
3. SGSNNUMBER SGSN This parameter specifies the number of String 1-15 C
Number an SGSN.

Copyright Huawei
4. IPADDRESS IP Address This parameter specifies an IP address String 1-40 O

of the SGSN. The IP address can be in
IPv4 or IPv6 format. The combination
of IP address and IP Mask must be
unique.
5. IPMASK IP Mask or This parameter specifies the mask of an String 1-40 C
Prefix SGSN IP address or prefix length of the
Length mask. The IP address can be in IPv4 or
IPv6 format. Each SGSN must be in
different network segments.
6. DESCRIPTION SGSN This parameter provides additional String 1-256 O
Description information about the SGSN.

[MOD]
PLMNSGSN:
{ SGSNNUMBER } = <SGSN Number>,
{IPMASK} = <IP Mask or Prefix Length>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <SGSN Description>;
Example:
MOD PLMNSGSN: PLMNIDENTITY = "PLMN_1", SGSNIDENTITY = "SGSN1",
IPADDRESS = "10.85.1.1",IPMASK = "255.255.0.0",DESCRIPTION = "PLMN_1";
MOD PLMNSGSN: PLMNIDENTITY = "PLMN_2", SGSNIDENTITY = "SGSN2",
SGSNNUMBER = "46013801",DESCRIPTION = "PLMN_2";
24.5.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
allowed
12613: The SGSN does not exist
12629: The IP address and mask configured for an SGSN must be unique
12630: The subnet addresses configured for an SGSN must be unique
98307: The SGSN number (or SGSN number prefix) already exists
24.6 Delete PLMN SGSN (RMV PLMNSGSN)

RMV PLMNSGSN is used to delete an SGSN of a PLMN.

Type Range

Identity PLMN.
2. SGSNIDENTITY SGSN This parameter identifies an String 1-32 M
Identity SGSN.

[RMV]
PLMNSGSN:
Example:

Copyright Huawei
RMV PLMNSGSN: PLMNIDENTITY = "PLMN_1", SGSNIDENTITY = "SGSN1";
24.6.4 Result
If the operation fails, one of the following error codes may be displayed:
24.7 Add PLMN ANGW (ADD PLMNANGW)

ADD PLMNANGW is used to add an access network gateway (ANGW) for a PLMN.

Type Value
Range
1. ANGWIDENTITY ANGW This parameter identifies an String 1-32 M

Identity ANGW.
2. PLMNIDENTITY PLMN Identity This parameter identifies a String 1-32 M
PLMN.
3. IPADDRESS IP Address This parameter specifies the IP String 1-40 M
address of an ANGW.
The IP address can be in IPv4 or
IPv6 format.
4. IPMASK IP Mask or This parameter specifies the String 1-40 M
Prefix Length mask or prefix length of an
ANGW IP address.

Copyright Huawei
5. DESCRIPTION ANGW This parameter provides String 1-256 O

ANGW.
ANGW Identity cannot be the same as an existing ANGW identity.

A maximum of 4,096 ANGWs can be configured in the system.
The network address of an ANGW belongs to only one PLMN. The network addresses of ANGWs
are different no matter whether the ANGWs are in the same or different PLMNs.
The network address of an ANGW is obtained by performing an AND operation between the IP
Address and the IP Mask.

[ADD]
PLMNANGW:
{ANGWIDENTITY} = <ANGW Identity>,
{IPMASK} = <IP Mask or Prefix Length >,
{DESCRIPTION} = <ANGW Description>;
Example:
ADD PLMNANGW: PLMNIDENTITY = "PLMN_1", ANGWIDENTITY =
"ANGW1",IPADDRESS = "1.1.1.1",IPMASK = "255.255.0.0",DESCRIPTION = "
PLMN_1";
24.7.4 Result
allowed

Copyright Huawei
94271 Operator not logged in
94320: The number of ANGWs exceeds the maximum value
94321: The number of ANGWs in the PLMN exceeds the maximum value.(512)
94322: The IP address and mask configured for an ANGW must be unique
94324: The ANGW Identify must be unique
94331: The subnet addresses configured for an ANGW must be unique
24.8 Modify PLMN ANGW (MOD PLMNANGW)

MOD PLMNANGW is used to modify an ANGW of a PLMN.

Type or
Value
Range
1. ANGWIDENTITY ANGW This parameter identifies an ANGW. String 1-32 M

Identity
2. PLMNIDENTITY PLMN This parameter identifies a PLMN. String 1-32 M
Identity
3. IPADDRESS IP Address This parameter specifies an IP address String 1-40 O
of the ANGW. The IP address can be
in IPv4 or IPv6 format. The
combination of IP address and IP
Mask must be unique.
4. IPMASK IP Mask or This parameter specifies the mask of String 1-40 C
Prefix an ANGW IP address or prefix length
Length of the mask. The mask or prefix length
can be in IPv4 or IPv6 format. Each
ANGW must be in different network
segments.
5. DESCRIPTION ANGW This parameter provides additional String 1-256 O
Description information about an ANGW.

Copyright Huawei

[MOD]
PLMNANGW:
{IPMASK} = <IP Mask or Prefix Length >,
{DESCRIPTION} = <ANGW Description>;
Example:
MOD PLMNANGW: PLMNIDENTITY = "PLMN_1", ANGWIDENTITY =
"ANGW1",IPADDRESS = "10.85.1.1",IPMASK = "255.255.0.0",DESCRIPTION =
"PLMN_1";
24.8.4 Result
allowed
94322: The IP address and mask configured for an ANGW must be unique
94323: The ANGW does not exist
94331: The subnet addresses configured for an ANGW must be unique

Copyright Huawei
24.9 Delete PLMN ANGW (RMV PLMNANGW)

RMV PLMNANGW is used to delete an ANGW of a PLMN.

Type Range

Identity PLMN.
2. ANGWIDENTITY ANGW This parameter identifies an String 1-32 M
Identity ANGW.

[RMV]
PLMNANGW:
Example:
RMV PLMNANGW: PLMNIDENTITY = "PLMN_1", ANGWIDENTITY = "ANGW1";
24.9.4 Result
94323: The ANGW does not exist

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Service Zone ManagementService Zone Management
25 Service Zone Management
25.1 Add Service Zone (ADD SERVICEZONE)

ADD SERVICEZONE is used to add a service zone.

Type Value
Range
1. SERVICEZONEIDENTITY Service Zone This parameter identifies a String 1-64 M

Identity service zone.
2. DESCRIPTION Service Zone This parameter provides String 1-256 O
about the service zone.
Service Zone Identity cannot be the same as an existing service zone identity.
A maximum of 1,024 service zones can be configured in the system.

[ADD]
SERVICEZONE:
{SERVICEZONEIDENTITY} = <Service Zone Identity>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <Service Zone Description>;
Example:

Copyright Huawei
ADD SERVICEZONE: SERVICEZONEIDENTITY = "abcd", DESCRIPTION =

"SERVICEZONE description";
25.1.4 Result
12475: The service zone already exists
25.2 Modify Service Zone (MOD SERVICEZONE)

MOD SERVICEZONE is used to modify a service zone.

Type Value
Range
1. SERVICEZONEIDENTITY Service Zone This parameter identifies String 1-64 M

Identity a service zone.
2. DESCRIPTION Service Zone This parameter provides String 1-256 O
about the service zone.

[MOD]
SERVICEZONE:
{DESCRIPTION} = <Service Zone Description>;

Copyright Huawei
Example:
MOD SERVICEZONE: SERVICEZONEIDENTITY = "abcd", DESCRIPTION =
"SERVICEZONE description";
25.2.4 Result
12474: The service zone does not exist
25.3 Delete Service Zone (RMV SERVICEZONE)

RMV SERVICEZONE is used to delete a service zone.

Type Value
Range
1. SERVICEZONEIDENTITY Service Zone This parameter String 1-64 M

Identity identifies a service
zone.

[RMV]
SERVICEZONE:
{SERVICEZONEIDENTITY} = <Service Zone Identity>;
Example:
RMV SERVICEZONE: SERVICEZONEIDENTITY = "abcd";

Copyright Huawei
25.3.4 Result
25.4 Add Service Zone Area (ADD SERVICEZONEAREA)

ADD SERVICEZONEAREA is used to provide an area for a service zone.

Range
1. AREATYPE Area Type This parameter Enumerated CGI M

specifies the type SAI
of an area.
RAI
SGSNAddress
TAI
ECGI
BSID
ANGWAddress
LAI
2. AREAIDENTITY Area This parameter String 1-64 M
Identity identifies an
area. The IP
address is in
IPv4 or IPv6
format if Area
Type is set to
SGSNAddress
or
ANGWAddress.

Copyright Huawei

Range
3. SERVICEZONEIDENTITY Service This parameter String 1-64 M

Zone identifies a
Identity service zone.
4. DESCRIPTION Area This parameter String 1-256 O
Description provides
additional
information
about the service
zone.
Each service zone can be configured with a maximum of 3072 areas.

Area Identity identifies an area. The value of this parameter varies according to the area type:
If Area Type is set to CGI, the value is a decimal number of 15 or 16 digits.
If Area Type is set to SAI, the value is a decimal number of 15 or 16 digits.
If Area Type is set to RAI, the value is a decimal number of 15 or 16 digits.
If Area Type is set to SGSNAddress or ANGWAddress, the value of Area Identity is an IP address. If
the IP address is in IPv4 format, its format is D.D.D.D. If the IP address is in IPv6 format, its format is
X:X:X:X:X:X:X:X. If the IP address is in IPv6 format with an IPv4 address inserted, its format is
X:X:X:X:X:X:D.D.D.D. (D is an 8-digit decimal number, and X is a 16-digit hexadecimal number.) One
or any number of consecutive groups of 0 value may be replaced with two colons (::). Therefore, the
address X:X:X:0:0:0:X:X can be further simplified and expressed as X:X:X::X:X.
If Area Type is set to TAI, the value is a decimal number of 10 or 11 digits.
If Area Type is set to ECGI, the value is a decimal number of 14 or 15 digits.
If Area Type is set to BSID, the value is a hexadecimal number of 12 digits.
If Area Type is set to LAI, the value is a decimal number of 10 to 11 digits. The value of LAC Value
ranges from 0 to 65535.

[ADD]
SERVICEZONEAREA:
{AREATYPE} = <Area Type>,
{AREAIDENTITY} = <Area Identity>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <Area Description>;
Example:
ADD SERVICEZONEAREA: AREATYPE = CGI, AREAIDENTITY =
"1112223333344444", SERVICEZONEIDENTITY = "abcd", DESCRIPTION = "AREA
description";

Copyright Huawei
25.4.4 Result
12477: The area already exists
12479: A maximum of 3072 areas can be set for a service zone
12508: The number of areas exceeds the maximum value
94553: A maximum of five service zones per area can be joined in
94554: The area has been joined in this service zone
25.5 Modify Service Zone Area (MOD

SERVICEZONEAREA)
MOD SERVICEZONEAREA is used to modify an area of a service zone.

Range

specifies the type of SAI
an area.
RAI
SGSNAddress
TAI
ECGI
BSID
ANGWAddress
LAI

Copyright Huawei

Range
2. AREAIDENTITY Area Identify This parameter String 1-64 M

identifies an area. The
IP address is in IPv4
or IPv6 format if Area
Type is set to
SGSNAddress or
ANGWAddress.
3. SERVICEZONEID Service Zone This parameter String 1-64 M
ENTITY Identity identifies a service
zone.
4. DESCRIPTION Area This parameter String 1-256 O
service zone.
MOD SERVICEZONEAREA identifies a record by AREATYPE, AREAIDENTIRY, and

SERVICEZONEIDENTITY collectively. In this command,only DESCRIPTION can be modified.

[MOD]
SERVICEZONEAREA:
{DESCRIPTION} = <Area Description>;
Example:
MOD SERVICEZONEAREA: AREATYPE = CGI, AREAIDENTITY =
"1112223333344444", SERVICEZONEIDENTITY = "abcd", DESCRIPTION = "abcd ";
25.5.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

12476: The area does not exist

Copyright Huawei
25.6 Delete Service Zone Area (RMV

SERVICEZONEAREA)
RMV SERVICEZONEAREA is used to delete an area of a service zone.

Range

an area.
RAI
SGSNAddress
TAI
ECGI
BSID
ANGWAddress
LAI
identifies an area.
3. SERVICEZONEI Service Zone This parameter String 1-64 M
DENTITY Identity identifies a service
zone.

[RMV]
SERVICEZONEAREA:
Example:
RMV SERVICEZONEAREA: AREATYPE = CGI, AREAIDENTITY =
"1112223333344444", SERVICEZONEIDENTITY = "abcd";

Copyright Huawei
25.6.4 Result
12476: The area does not exist
25.7 Add Auxiliary Area (ADD AUXILIARYAREA)

ADD AUXILIARYAREA is used to provide an auxiliary area of a service zone.

Range

an area.
RAI
SGSNAddress
TAI
ECGI
BSID
ANGWAddress
LAI
identifies an area.
zone.

Copyright Huawei
Each service zone can be configured with a maximum of 200 auxiliary areas.
A maximum of 8,192 auxiliary areas can be configured in the system.
A maximum of 200,000 associations between auxiliary areas and service zones can be configured in
the system.
Area Identity identifies an area. The value of this parameter varies according to the area type:
If Area Type is set to CGI, the value is a decimal number of 15 or 16 digits.
If Area Type is set to SAI, the value is a decimal number of 15 or 16 digits.
If Area Type is set to RAI, the value is a decimal number of 15 or 16 digits.
If Area Type is set to SGSNAddress or ANGWAddress, the value of Area Identity is an IP address. If
the IP address is in IPv4 format, its format is D.D.D.D. If the IP address is in IPv6 format, its format is
X:X:X:X:X:X:X:X. If the IP address is in IPv6 format with an IPv4 address inserted, its format is
X:X:X:X:X:X:D.D.D.D. (D is an 8-digit decimal number, and X is a 16-digit hexadecimal number.) One
or any number of consecutive groups of 0 value may be replaced with two colons (::). Therefore, the
address X:X:X:0:0:0:X:X can be further simplified and expressed as X:X:X::X:X.
If Area Type is set to TAI, the value is a decimal number of 10 or 11 digits.
If Area Type is set to ECGI, the value is a decimal number of 14 or 15 digits.
If Area Type is set to BSID, the value is a hexadecimal number of 12 digits.
If Area Type is set to LAI, the value is a decimal number of 10 to 11 digits. The value of LAC Value
ranges from 0 to 65535.

[ADD]
AUXILIARYAREA:
Example:
ADD AUXILIARYAREA: AREATYPE = CGI, AREAIDENTITY = "1112223333344444",
SERVICEZONEIDENTITY = "abcd";
25.7.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

98324:The number of auxiliary areas has reached the limit
98326:The auxiliary area already exists
98328:The relationship of service zones and auxiliary areas has reached the limit
98333:The number of auxiliary areas per service zone has reached the limit
25.8 Delete Auxiliary Area (RMV AUXILIARYAREA)

RMV AUXILIARYAREA is used to delete an auxiliary area of a service zone.

Range

an area.
RAI
SGSNAddress
TAI
ECGI
BSID
ANGWAddress
LAI
identifies an area.
zone.

[RMV]
AUXILIARYAREA:
Example:

Copyright Huawei
RMV AUXILIARYAREA: AREATYPE = CGI, AREAIDENTITY = "1112223333344444",

SERVICEZONEIDENTITY = "abcd";
25.8.4 Result
98327:The auxiliary area does not exists

Copyright Huawei
Message/Email Template ManagementMessage/Email
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Template Management
26 Message/Email Template Management
26.1 Add Template (ADD MESSAGETEMPLATE)

ADD MESSAGETEMPLATE is used to add a message template.

Range
1. MESSAGETEMPL Message This parameter String 1-32 M

ATENAME Template Name identifies a message
template.
2. MESSAGETITLE Message Title This parameter String 1-96 M
specifies the title of a
message template.
3. MESSAGETYPE Message Type This parameter Enumerated SMS/EMAIL M
specifies the type of a JMS
message.
SOAP
4. MESSAGECONTE Message This parameter String 1-3072 O
NT Content specifies the content
of a message.
NT2 Content specifies the content
of a message in the
second language.
of a message in the
third language.

Copyright Huawei

of a message in the
fourth language.
8. STARTTIME Start Time This parameter String 8 O
specifies the start
time of a message
that can be sent out.
9. DURATION Duration This parameter Number 0-1439 O
specifies the duration
since start time of a
message that can be
sent out.
10. DESCRIPTION Message This parameter String 1-256 O
message template.
Message Template Name cannot be the same as an existing message template name.
If you need to add an attribute to the content of a template, the message content is in
{OBJ.object.attribute} format. For example, if the MSISDN of the subscriber needs to be contained in a
message, enter {OBJ.Subscriber.MSISDN} for the Content.
If the Message Type is set to JMS, the valid message content can be selected only from the following
message contents:
{OBJ.IPSession.IMSI}
{OBJ.Subscriber.MSISDN}
{OBJ.Subscriber.Status}
{OBJ.Subscriber.HomeServiceZone}
{OBJ.Subscriber.PaidType}
{OBJ.Subscriber.Category}
{OBJ.Subscriber.Station}
{OBJ.Subscriber.MasterIdentifier}
{OBJ.Subscriber.EmailAddress}
{OBJ.Subscriber.ContactMethod}
{OBJ.Subscriber.BillCycleDate}
{OBJ.System.EventDate}
{OBJ.Quota.QuotaName}
{OBJ.Quota.QuotaValue}
{OBJ.Quota.QuotaBalance}
{OBJ.Quota.QuotaConsumption}
{OBJ.Subscription.ServiceName}
{OBJ.Subscription.UsageStatus}
{OBJ.Subscription.SrvStartDateTime}
{OBJ.Subscription.SrvEndDateTime}
{OBJ.Subscription.SrvRoamingType}

Copyright Huawei
{OBJ.Subscription.SrvPkgName}
{OBJ.Subscription.SrvPkgStartDateTime}
{OBJ.Subscription.SrvPkgEndDateTime}
{OBJ.Subscription.SrvPkgRoamingType}
{OBJ.Subscription.LimitType}
{OBJ.Subscription.LimitId}
A maximum of 512 templates can be configured in the system.

[ADD]
MESSAGETEMPLATE:
{MESSAGETEMPLATENAME} = <Message Template Name>,
{MESSAGETITLE} = <Message Title>,
{MESSAGETYPE} = <Message Type>,
{MESSAGECONTENT} = <Message Content>,
{MESSAGECONTENT2} = <Message Content>,
{MESSAGECONTENT4}= <Message Content>,
{STARTTIME}=<Start Time>,
{ DURATION }=<Duration>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <Message Description>;
Example:
ADD MESSAGETEMPLATE: MESSAGETEMPLATENAME = "abcd", MESSAGETITLE
= "abcd", MESSAGETYPE = SMS/EMAIL, MESSAGECONTENT = "hello",
STARTTIME="09&00&00", DURATION=60, DESCRIPTION = "TEMPLATE description";
26.1.4 Result
16442: The message template already exists

Copyright Huawei
94233: Only six attributes are allowed in content of a template

26.2 Modify Template (MOD MESSAGETEMPLATE)

MOD MESSAGETEMPLATE is used to modify a message template.

Range
1. MESSAGETEMPL Message This parameter String 1-32 M

ATENAME Template Name specifies the name of
a message template.
2. MESSAGETITLE Message Title This parameter String 1-96 O
specifies the title of
a message template.
3. MESSAGETYPE Message Type This parameter Enumerated SMS/EMAIL O
specifies the type of JMS
a message.
SOAP
NT Content specifies the content
of a message.
of a message in the
second language.
of a message in the
third language.
of a message in the
fourth language.
8. STARTTIME Start Time This parameter String 8 O
specifies the start
time of a message

Copyright Huawei

Range
9. DURATION Duration This parameter Number 0-1439 O

specifies the
duration since start
time of a message
10. DESCRIPTION Message This parameter String 1-256 O
information about
the message
template.

[MOD]
MESSAGETEMPLATE:
{MESSAGETEMPLATENAME} = <Message Template Name>,
{MESSAGETITLE} = <Message Title>,
{MESSAGETYPE} = <Message Type>,
{MESSAGECONTENT} = <Message Content>,
{MESSAGECONTENT4}= <Message Content>,
{STARTTIME}=<Start Time>,
{DURATION}=<Duration>,
{DESCRIPTION}=<Message description>;
Example:
MOD MESSAGETEMPLATE: MESSAGETEMPLATENAME = "abcd", MESSAGETITLE
= "abcd", MESSAGETYPE = SMS/EMAIL, MESSAGECONTENT = "hello world",
STARTTIME="09&00&00", DURATION=60, DESCRIPTION = "TEMPLATE description";
26.2.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

16440: The message template does not exist
94233: Only six attributes are allowed in content of a template
98335: The nofication and tempalte type are not match
26.3 Delete Template (RMV MESSAGETEMPLATE)

RMV MESSAGETEMPLATE is used to delete a message template.

Type Value
Range
1. MESSAGETEMPLATENAME Message This parameter String 1-32 M

Template specifies the name of a
Name message template.

[RMV]
MESSAGETEMPLATE:
{MESSAGETEMPLATENAME}=<Message Template Name>;
Example:
RMV MESSAGETEMPLATE: MESSAGETEMPLATENAME = "abcd";
26.3.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

16440: The message template does not exist
16445: The message template is associated with a notification

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Login ManagementLogin Management
27 Login Management
27.1 User Login (LGI)

LGI is used for a system user to log in to the CLI.

Value Range
1. OPNAME System This parameter specifies the name String 1-96 M

User of a system user.
Name
2. PWD Password This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M
password of a system user.
3. DECODEMODE Decode This parameter describe which Enumerated UTF-8 O
Mode decode mode to use for the GB2312
message.
Use GB2312
as default if
parameter is
not carried.

[LGI]:
{OPNAME} = <System User Name>,
{ PWD } = <Password>,
{ DECODEMODE }= <Decode Mode>;
Example:

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Login ManagementLogin Management
LGI: OPNAME = "abcd", PWD = "abcdefgh123", DECODEMODE="GB2312";
27.1.4 Result
20485: Incorrect user name or password
20487: The system user does not exist
27.2 User Logout (LGO)

LGO is used for a user to log out from the CLI.

Value Range

[LGO]:;
Example:
LGO:;
27.2.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction APN List ManagementAPN List Management
28 APN List Management
28.1 Add APN List (ADD APNLIST)

ADD APNLIST is used to add an APN list.

Type Value
Range
1. APNLISTNAME APN List This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

Name name of an APN list.
2. DESCRIPTION APN List This parameter provides String 1-256 O
APN list.
APN List Name cannot be the same as an existing APN list name.
A maximum of 32 APN lists can be configured in the system.

[ADD]
APNLIST:
{APNLISTNAME} = <APN List Name>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <APN List Description>;
Example:

Copyright Huawei
ADD APNLIST: APNLISTNAME = "abcd", DESCRIPTION = " APNLISTNAME

description";
28.1.4 Result
94512: The APN list already exists
94514: The number of APN list exceeds the maximum value (32)
28.2 Modify APN List (MOD APNLIST)

MOD APNLIST is used to modify an APN list.

Type Value
Range
1. APNLISTNAME APN List This parameter specifies String 1-32 M

Name the name of an APN list.
2. DESCRIPTION APN List This parameter provides String 1-256 O
about the APN list.

[MOD]
APNLIST:
{DESCRIPTION} = <APN List Description>;

Copyright Huawei
Example:
MOD APNLIST: APNLISTNAME = "abcd", DESCRIPTION = " APNLISTNAME
description";
28.2.4 Result
94513: The APN list does not exist
28.3 Delete APN List (RMV APNLIST)

RMV APNLIST is used to delete an APN list.

Type Value
Range
1. APNLISTNAME APN List This parameter String 1-32 M

Name specifies the name of
an APN list.

[RMV]
APNLIST:
{APNLISTNAME} = <APN List Name>;
Example:
RMV APNLIST: APNLISTNAME = "abcd";

Copyright Huawei
28.3.4 Result
28.4 Add APN (ADD APN)

ADD APN is used to add an APN for an APN list.

Range
1. APNNAME APN Name This parameter String 1-64 M

specifies the
name of an APN.
2. APNLISTNAME APN List This parameter String 1-32 M
Name specifies the
name of an APN
list.
3. DESCRIPTION APN This parameter String 1-256 O
Description provides
additional
information
about the APN.

Copyright Huawei
APN Name cannot be the same as an existing APN name. An APN name belongs to only one APN
list. The APN names are different no matter whether the APN names are in the same or different
APN lists.
Each APN list can be configured with a maximum of 256 APNs.
A maximum of 1,024 APNs can be configured in the system.

[ADD]
APN:
{APNNAME} = <APN Name>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <APN Description>;
Example:
ADD APN: APNNAME = "internet ", APNLISTNAME= "abcd", DESCRIPTION = " APN
description";
28.4.4 Result
94515: The APN already exists
94517: The number of APN in the APN list exceeds the maximum value (256)
94518: The number of APN exceeds the maximum value (1024)
28.5 Modify APN (MOD APN)

MOD APN is used to modify an APN.

Copyright Huawei

Range

specifies the name of
an APN.
2. DESCRIPTION APN This parameter String 1-256 O
APN.

[MOD]
APN:
{APNNAME} = <APN Name>,
{DESCRIPTION} = <APN Description>;
Example:
MOD APN: APNNAME = "internet", DESCRIPTION = " APN description";
28.5.4 Result
94516: The APN does not exist
28.6 Delete APN (RMV APN)

RMV APN is used to delete an APN.

Copyright Huawei

Range

specifies the name of
an APN.

[RMV]
APN:
{APNNAME} = <APN Name>;
Example:
RMV APN: APNNAME = "internet";
28.6.4 Result
94516: The APN does not exist

Copyright Huawei
Message Language ManagementMessage Language
29 Message Language Management
29.1 Add Message Language (ADD

MESSAGELANGUAGE)
ADD MESSAGELANGUAGE is used to add a Message Language for notification.

Range
1. LANGUAGEID Language This parameter specifies the Enumerated 1 M

ID language ID 2
3
4
2. DISPLAYNAME Display This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M
Name display name of the language
3. ENCODEMODE Encode This parameter set the encode Enumerated ASCII M
Mode mode of the language ISO8859-1
UCS2
GBK
GSM7

Copyright Huawei
Language ID cannot be the same as an existing Language ID.

A maximum of 4 Language can be configured in the system.

[ADD]
MESSAGELANGUAGE:
{ LANGUAGEID } = < Language ID >,
{ DISPLAYNAME } = < Display Name >,
{ ENCODEMODE } = < Encode Mode >;
Example :
ADD MESSAGELANGUAGE: LANGUAGEID = 1, DISPLAYNAME = " ENGLISH",
ENCODEMODE = ASCII;
29.1.4 Result
94526: The language ID already exists
29.2 Modify Message Language (MOD

MESSAGELANGUAGE)
MOD MESSAGELANGUAGE is used to modify a Message Language.

Copyright Huawei

Value
Range
1. LANGUAGEID Language ID This parameter specifies Enumerated 1 M

the language ID 2
3
4
2. DISPLAYNAME Display This parameter specifies String 1-32 O
Name the display name of the
language
3. ENCODEMODE Encode This parameter set the Enumerated ASCII O
Mode encode mode of the ISO8859-1
language
UCS2
GBK
GSM7

[MOD]
MESSAGELANGUAGE:
{ LANGUAGEID } = < Language ID >,
{ DISPLAYNAME } = < Display Name >,
{ ENCODEMODE } = < Encode Mode >;
Example :
MOD MESSAGELANGUAGE: LANGUAGEID = 1, DISPLAYNAME = " CHINESE",
ENCODEMODE = GSM7;
29.2.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

94527: The language ID does not exist
29.3 Delete Message Language (RMV

MESSAGELANGUAGE)
RMV MESSAGELANGUAGE is used to delete a Message Language.

Value
Range
1. LANGUAGEID Language This parameter Enumerated 1 M

ID specifies the language 2
ID
3
4

[RMV]
MESSAGELANGUAGE:
{ LANGUAGEID } = < Language ID >;
Example :
RMV MESSAGELANGUAGE: LANGUAGEID = 2;
29.3.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
94525: The default language cannot be deleted

94527: The language ID does not exist
94528: The language is being used by the message template

Copyright Huawei
Redirection URL ManagementRedirection URL
30 Redirection URL Management
30.1 Add Redirection URL (ADD REDIRECTIONURL)

ADD REDIRECTIONURL is used to add a Redirection URL.

Type Range
1. URLADDRESS URL URL Address for Redirection String 1-255 M

Address Service
2. DESCRIPTION Description Description String 1-256 O
URL Address cannot be the same as an existing URL Address.

A maximum of 1024 URL Address can be configured in the system.

[ADD]
REDIRECTIONURL:
{ URLADDRESS } = <URL Address>,
{ DESCRIPTION } = <Description>;
Example :
ADD REDIRECTIONURL: URLADDRESS = "http://www.huawei.com", DESCRIPTION =
"Huawei Company";

Copyright Huawei
30.1.4 Result
94544: The redirection URL already exists
94546: The number of redirection URLs exceeds the maximum value(1024)
30.2 Delete Redirection URL (RMV REDIRECTIONURL)

RMV REDIRECTIONURL is used to delete a Redirection URL.

Value
Range
1. URLADDRESS URL URL Address for String 1-255 M

Address Redirection Service

[RMV]
REDIRECTIONURL:
{ URLADDRESS } = <URL Address>;
Example :
RMV REDIRECTIONURL: URLADDRESS = "http://www.huawei.com";
30.2.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
94545: The redirection URL does not exist
94547: The redirection URL has been referenced

Copyright Huawei
Holiday Define ManagementHoliday Define
31 Holiday Define Management
31.1 Add Holiday Define (ADD HOLIDAY)

ADD HOLIDAY is used to add a holiday definition.

Value
Range
1 HOLIDAYNA Holiday This String 1-32 M

ME Name parameter
specifies the
name of the
holiday
2 DATETYPE DateType This Enumerated Holiday M
parameter Exception
specifies the
date type of
the holiday.
3 DATE Date This DateTime 1-256 M
parameter
specifies the
date of the
holiday.
4 DESCRIPTIO Holiday This String 1-256 O
N Description parameter
provides
additional
information
about the
holiday.

Copyright Huawei
A maximum of 100 holiday definition can be configured in the system.

Date can be absolute date period or relative date period. The Date period format is the same as the
Right Value Stipulation of System.DateTime, and the hh:mm:ss in the start date of absolute date
period must be set to 00:00:00, the hh:mm:ss in the end date of absolute date period must be set to
23:59:59, the starttime of relative date period must be set to 00:00:00, the last of relative date period
must be set to 24 or 24:00.
Example:
abs|2011-06-15 00:00:00#2011-06-22 23:59:59,
or
rel|year(*) mon(1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9:10:11:12)
date(1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9:10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17:18:19:20:21:22:23:24:25:26:27:28:29
:30:31) week(1:2:3:4:5:6:7) starttime(00:00:00) last(24)
or
rel|year(*) mon(1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9:10:11:12)
date(1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9:10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17:18:19:20:21:22:23:24:25:26:27:28:29
:30:31) week(1:2:3:4:5:6:7) starttime(00:00:00) last(24:00).

[ADD]
HOLIDAY:
{ HOLIDAYNAME} = <Holiday Name>,
{ DATETYPE} = <DateType>,
{ DATE} = <Date>,
{ DESCRIPTION} = <Holiday Description>;
Example:
ADD HOLIDAY: HOLIDAYNAME = "newyearholiday", DATETYPE = Holiday, DATE =
"abs|2012-01-01 00:00:00#2012-01-01 23:59:59", DESCRIPTION = "new year holiday of
china";
31.1.4 Result
16448:The holiday define already exists

Copyright Huawei

16449: The number of holiday define reaches the upper limit (100)
31.2 Modify Holiday Define (MOD HOLIDAY)

MOD HOLIDAY is used to modify a holiday definition.

Value
Range
1 HOLIDAYNA Holiday This String 1-32 M

ME Name parameter
specifies the
name of the
holiday
2 DATETYPE DateType This Enumerated Holiday O
parameter Exception
specifies the
date type of
the holiday.
3 DATE Date This DateTime 1-256 O
parameter
specifies the
date of the
holiday.
4 DESCRIPTIO Holiday This String 1-256 O
N Description parameter
provides
additional
information
about the
holiday.
A maximum of 100 holiday definition can be configured in the system.

Date can be absolute date period or relative date period. The Date period format is the same as the
Right Value Stipulation of System.DateTime, and the hh:mm:ss in the start date of absolute date
period must be set to 00:00:00, the hh:mm:ss in the end date of absolute date period must be set to
23:59:59, the starttime of relative date period must be set to 00:00:00, the last of relative date period
must be set to 24 or 24:00.
Example:
abs|2011-06-15 00:00:00#2011-06-22 23:59:59,

Copyright Huawei
or
rel|year(*) mon(1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9:10:11:12)
date(1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9:10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17:18:19:20:21:22:23:24:25:26:27:28:29
:30:31) week(1:2:3:4:5:6:7) starttime(00:00:00) last(24)
or
rel|year(*) mon(1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9:10:11:12)
date(1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8:9:10:11:12:13:14:15:16:17:18:19:20:21:22:23:24:25:26:27:28:29
:30:31) week(1:2:3:4:5:6:7) starttime(00:00:00) last(24:00).

[MOD]
HOLIDAY:
{ HOLIDAYNAME} = <Holiday Name>,
{ DATETYPE} = <DateType>,
{ DATE} = <Date>,
{ DESCRIPTION} = <Holiday Description>;
Example:
MOD HOLIDAY: HOLIDAYNAME = "newyearholiday", DATETYPE = Holiday, DATE =
"abs|2012-01-01 00:00:00#2012-01-03 23:59:59", DESCRIPTION = "new year holiday of
china";
31.2.4 Result
16450:The holiday define does not exist
31.3 Delete Holiday Define (RMV HOLIDAY)

RMV HOLIDAY is used to delete a holiday definition.

Copyright Huawei

Value
Range
1 HOLIDAYN Holiday This String 1-32 M

AME Name parameter
specifies the
name of the
holiday

[RMV]
HOLIDAY:
{ HOLIDAYNAME} = <Holiday Name>;
Example:
RMV HOLIDAY: HOLIDAYNAME = "newyearholiday";
31.3.4 Result
16450:The holiday define does not exist

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Service Map ManagementService Map Management
32 Service Map Management
32.1 Add Service Map (ADD SRVMAP)

ADD SRVMAP is used to add a Service Map record.

Range
1. MAPID Map ID Service Map ID String 1-8 M

2. SRVNAME Service Name Service Name String 1-32 M
MAPID and SRVNAME cannot be the same as an existing record.

A maximum of 2048 records can be configured in the system.
This is a customized command, please refer to the relative interface document when using this
command.

[ADD]
SRVMAP:
{ MAPID } = <Map ID>,
{ SRVNAME } = <Service Name>;
Example:
ADD SRVMAP: MAPID = "WEL04", SRVNAME = "WelcomePage";

Copyright Huawei
32.1.4 Result
94548: The service map already exists
94550: The number of service map exceeds the maximum value(2048)
32.2 Delete Service Map (RMV SRVMAP)

RMV SRVMAP is used to delete a Service Map record.

Value
Range
1. MAPID Map ID Service Map ID String 1-8 M

[RMV]
SRVMAP:
{ MAPID } = <Map ID>;
Example :
RMV SRVMAP: MAPID = "wel04";
32.2.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
94549: The service map does not exist

Copyright Huawei
ReservationPriority Map ManagementReservationPriorit
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction y Map Management
33 ReservationPriority Map Management
33.1 Add ReservationPriority Map (ADD RPMAP)

ADD RPMAP is used to add a ReservationPriority Map record.

Range
1. ReservationPriority ReservationPriority ReservationPriority Enumerated Default,

Priority-One,
Priority-Two,
Priority-Three,
M
Priority-Four,
Priority-Five,
Priority-Six,
Priority-Seven
2. ARP ARP ARP Number 0~15 M

ReservationPriority cannot be the same as an existing record.

[ADD]
RPMAP:
{ RESERVATIONPRIORITY } = <ReservationPriority>,

Copyright Huawei
{ ARP } = <ARP>;
Example:
ADD RPMAP: RESERVATIONPRIORITY = Default, ARP = 15;
33.1.4 Result
94580: The Reservation-Priority mapping already exists
33.2 Modify ReservationPriority Map (MOD RPMAP)

MOD RPMAP is used to modify a ReservationPriority Map record.

Range

Priority-One,
Priority-Two,
Priority-Three,
M
Priority-Four,
Priority-Five,
Priority-Six,
Priority-Seven
2. ARP ARP ARP Number 0~15 M
The ReservationPriority record must be an existing record.

Copyright Huawei

[MOD]
RPMAP:
{ RESERVATIONPRIORITY } = <ReservationPriority>,
{ ARP } = <ARP>;
Example:
MOD RPMAP: RESERVATIONPRIORITY = Default, ARP = 13;
33.2.4 Result
94588: Reservation priority is not exist
33.3 Delete ReservationPriority Map (RMV RPMAP)

RMV RPMAP is used to delete a ReservationPriority Map record.

Copyright Huawei

Value Range

Priority-One,
Priority-Two,
Priority-Three,
M
Priority-Four,
Priority-Five,
Priority-Six,
Priority-Seven
The ReservationPriority record must be an existing record.

[RMV]
RPMAP:
{ RESERVATIONPRIORITY } = <ReservationPriority>;
Example :
RMV RPMAP: RESERVATIONPRIORITY = Default;
33.3.4 Result
94588: Reservation priority is not exist

Copyright Huawei
Quota Status Map ManagementQuota Status Map
34 Quota Status Map Management
34.1 Add Quota Status Map (ADD QUOTASTATUSMAP)

ADD QUOTASTATUSMAP is used to add a quota status map record.

Value
Range
1. COUNTERSTATUS Policy Counter This parameter String 132

Status specifies Policy-
M
Counter-Status AVP in
Sy interface protocol.
2. QUOTASTATUS Quota Status This parameter Enumerated Normal,
specifies quota status. Level1,
Level2,
Level3,
Level4,
Exhaust,
M
Level5,
Level6,
Level7,
Level8,
Level9,
Level10

Copyright Huawei

COUNTERSTATUS cannot be the same as an existing record.

[ADD]
QUOTASTATUSMAP:
{ COUNTERSTATUS } = <Policy Counter Status>,
{ QUOTASTATUS } = <Quota Status>;
Example:
ADD QUOTASTATUSMAP: COUNTERSTATUS = "101", QUOTASTATUS = Level1;
34.1.4 Result
98329: The policy counter status already exists
34.2 Modify Quota Status Map (MOD

QUOTASTATUSMAP)
MOD QUOTASTATUSMAP is used to modify a quota status map record.

Copyright Huawei

Value
Range
1. COUNTERSTATUS Policy Counter This parameter specifies String 132

Status Policy-Counter-Status
M
AVP in Sy interface
protocol.
2. QUOTASTATUS Quota Status This parameter specifies Enumerated Normal,
quota status. Level1,
Level2,
Level3,
Level4,
Exhaust,
M
Level5,
Level6,
Level7,
Level8,
Level9,
Level10
The COUNTERSTATUS record must be an existing record.

[MOD]
QUOTASTATUSMAP:
{ COUNTERSTATUS } = <Policy Counter Status>,
{ QUOTASTATUS } = <Quota Status>;
Example:
MOD QUOTASTATUSMAP: COUNTERSTATUS = "101", QUOTASTATUS = Level1;
34.2.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

98330: The policy counter status does not exist
34.3 Delete Quota Status Map (RMV

QUOTASTATUSMAP)
RMV QUOTASTATUSMAP is used to delete a quota status map record.

Type Value
Range
1. COUNTERSTATUS Policy Counter This parameter String 132

Status specifies Policy-
Counter-Status AVP M
in Sy interface
protocol.
The COUNTERSTATUS record must be an existing record.

[RMV]
QUOTASTATUSMAP:
{ COUNTERSTATUS } = <Policy Counter Status>;
Example :
RMV QUOTASTATUSMAP: COUNTERSTATUS = "101";
34.3.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

98330: The policy counter status does not exist

Copyright Huawei
Subscriber Segment ManagementSubscriber Segment
35 Subscriber Segment Management
35.1 Add Subscriber Segment (ADD SUBSEGMENT)

ADD SUBSEGMENT is used to add a subscriber segment.

Type Value
Range
1. NAME Subscriber This parameter specifies String 1-32 M

Segment Name the name of a subscriber
segment.
2. NOTIFICATIONINFO Notification This parameter provides String 1-256 O
Information notification information
about the subscriber
segment.
3. DESCRIPTION Subscriber This parameter provides String 1-256 O
Segment additional information
Description about the subscriber
segment.
A maximum of 512 subscriber segments can be configured in the system.

[ADD]
SUBSEGMENT:
{ NAME} = <Subscriber Segment Name>,

Copyright Huawei
{ NOTIFICATIONINFO } = <Notification Information >,

{ DESCRIPTION} = <Subscriber Segment Description >;
Example:
ADD SUBSEGMENT: NAME = "SP1", NOTIFICATIONINFO = "Notification Contact
Information For SP1";
35.1.4 Result
98331: The Subscriber Segment already exists
98332: The number of Subscriber Segment reaches the upper limit (512)
35.2 Modify Subscriber Segment (MOD SUBSEGMENT)

MOD SUBSEGMENT is used to modify a subscriber segment.

Type Value
Range

Segment Name the name of a subscriber
segment.
2. NOTIFICATIONINFO Notification This parameter provides String 1-256 O
Information notification information
about the subscriber
segment.

Copyright Huawei
3. DESCRIPTION Subscriber This parameter provides String 1-256 O

Segment additional information
Description about the subscriber
segment.

[MOD]
SUBSEGMENT:
{ NAME} = <Subscriber Segment Name>,
{ NOTIFICATIONINFO } = <Notification Information >,
{ DESCRIPTION} = <Subscriber Segment Description >;
Example:
MOD SUBSEGMENT: NAME = "SP1", NOTIFICATIONINFO = " Notification Contact
Information-new For SP1";
35.2.4 Result
98320: The Subscriber Segment does not exist
35.3 Delete Subscriber Segment (RMV SUBSEGMENT)

RMV SUBSEGMENT is used to delete a subscriber segment.

Copyright Huawei

Type Value Range
1. NAME Subscriber This parameter specifies the name of String 1-32 M

Segment Name a subscriber segment.

[RMV]
SUBSEGMENT:
{NAME} = <Subscriber Segment Name>;
Example:
RMV SUBSEGMENT: NAME = "SP1";
35.3.4 Result
35.4 Add Number Prefix (ADD NUMBERPREFIX)

ADD NUMBERPREFIX is used to add a number prefix for a subscriber segment.

Copyright Huawei

Type Value
Range
1. NAME Subscriber This parameter specifies the String 1-32 M

Segment name of a subscriber segment.
Name
2. NUMBERPREFIX Number This parameter specifies the String 1-16 M
Prefix number prefix. The value of
Number Prefix must be
digits.
A maximum of 2,048 number prefixes can be configured in the system.

Only support config IMSI Prefix for the parameter NUMBERPREFIX.

[ADD]
NUMBERPREFIX:
{ NAME } = <Subscriber Segment Name>,
{ NUMBERPREFIX } = <Number Prefix>;
Example:
ADD NUMBERPREFIX: NAME = "SP1", NUMBERPREFIX = "4501111";
35.4.4 Result
98321: The Number Prefix already exists
98322: The number of Number Prefix reaches the upper limit (2048)

Copyright Huawei
35.5 Delete Number Prefix (RMV NUMBERPREFIX)

RMV NUMBERPREFIX is used to delete a number prefix associated with a subscriber
segment.

Type Value
Range

Segment the name of a subscriber
Name segment.
2. NUMBERPREFIX Number This parameter specifies String 1-16 M
Prefix the number prefix. The
value of Number Prefix
must be digits.

[RMV]
NUMBERPREFIX:
{ NAME } = <Subscriber Segment Name>,
{ NUMBERPREFIX } = <Number Prefix>;
Example:
RMV NUMBERPREFIX: NAME = "SP1", NUMBERPREFIX = "4501111";
35.5.4 Result
98323: The Number Prefix does not exist

Copyright Huawei

Copyright Huawei

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Pray Time ManagementPray Time Management
36 Pray Time Management
36.1 Add Pray Time (ADD PRAYTIME)

ADD PRAYTIME is used to add information about pray time.

Order ID Name Description Data Type Max Type
Size/Range
1 PRAYTIME Pray Time This String 1-200 M

parameter
specifies the
name of the
subscriber
number
segment.
Pray time indicates the time period during which people in Muslim countries pray. A day is divided into
five pray periods with each period lasing 15 to 40 minutes. People in Muslim countries pray every day in
a year.
Pray time is divided into 12 segments. The requirements fort the first three segments is as follows:
Segment 1: Indicates a city name.
Segment 2: Indicates a city code defined in the carrier's system.
Segment 3: Indicates the start pray time and end pray time. The format of the time is
YYYYMMDDhhmmss. The back flash (\) muse be added in front of a comma (,).

[ADD]
PRAYTIME:
{PRAYTIME} = <Pray Time>;

Copyright Huawei
For example:
ADD
PRAYTIME:PRAYTIME="Riyadh\,RUH\,20130101051500\,20130101055500\,2013010111
5700\,20130101122200\,20130101145700\,20130101152200\,20130101171700\,2013010117
3200\,20130101184700\,20130101191700";
36.1.4 Result
94610: [PrayTime]The record is invalid.
94611: [PrayTime]The city code is invalid.
94612: [PrayTime]The datetime is invalid.
94613: [PrayTime]The year record exists, please delete that record firstly.
94614: [PrayTime]The YYYYMMDD record exists, please delete that record firstly.
36.2 Delete Pray Time <RMV PRAYTIME>

RMV PRAYTIME is used to delete the configured pray time information.

None.

[RMV]
PRAYTIME :;
Example:
RMV PRAYTIME :;
36.2.4 Result

Copyright Huawei


Copyright Huawei
Customized Action ManagementCustomized Action
37 Customized Action Management
37.1 Add Enumeration (ADD CUSTOMENUM)

ADD CUSTOMENUM is used to add an enumeration.

Size/Range
This parameter
Enumeration specifies the
1 ENUMNAME String 1-32 M
Name name of an
enumeration.
The system can have a maximum of 1024 enumerations.

[ADD]
CUSTOMENUM:
{ENUMNAME} = <Enumeration Name> ;
Example:
ADD CUSTOMENUM: ENUMNAME="status";
37.1.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

98368: The enumeration already exists
37.2 Delete Enumeraton (RMV CUSTOMENUM)

RMV CUSTOMENUM is used to delete an enumeration.

Size/Range
This parameter
Name name of an
enumeration.

[RMV]
CUSTOMENUM:
Example:
RMV CUSTOMENUM: ENUMNAME="status";
37.2.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
98369: The enumeration does not exist
98372: The enumeration cannot be deleted beause it is not custom
98358: The enumeration cannot be deleted beause it is associated with a enumeration
member
98374: The enumeration cannot be deleted because it is associated with a action
37.3 Add Enumeration Member (ADD

CUSTOMENUMELEM)
ADD CUSTOMENUMELEM is used to add an enumeration member.

Size/Range
This parameter
Name name of an
enumeration.
2 ENUMELEMNAME Enumeration This parameter String 1-256 M
Member specifies the
Name name of an
enumeration
member.
3 VALUE Enumeration This parameter Number 0-4294967295 M
Value value of an
enumeration
member.
A maximum of 1024 enumeration members can be configured in the system.

Copyright Huawei

[ADD]
CUSTOMENUMELEM:
{ENUMNAME} = <Enumeration Name>,
{ENUMELEMNAME} = <Enumeration Member Name>,
{VALUE} = <Enumeration Member Value>;
Example:
ADD CUSTOMENUMELEM: ENUMNAME="status", ENUMELEMNAME="online",
VALUE=1;
37.3.4 Result
98370: The enumeration member already exists
98376: The enumeration member cannot be added because the enumeration is not
custom
98377: Invalid enumeration member name
98384: Invalid enumeration member value
37.4 Delete Enumeration Member (RMV

CUSTOMENUMELEM )
RMV CUSTOMENUMELEM is used to delete an enumeration member.

Copyright Huawei

Size/Range
This parameter
Name name of an
enumeration.
2 ENUMELEMNAME Enumeration This parameter String 1-256 M
Name name of an
enumeration
member.

[RMV]
CUSTOMENUMELEM:
{ENUMNAME} = <Enumeration Name>,
{ENUMELEMNAME} = <Enumeration Member Name> ;
Example:
RMV CUSTOMENUMELEM: ENUMNAME="status", ENUMELEMNAME="online";
37.4.4 Result
98371: The enumeration member does not exist
98373: The enumeration member cannot be deleted beause it is not custom
98375: The enumeration member cannot be deleted because it is associated with a action

Copyright Huawei
37.5 Add Action Dictionary (ADD CUSTOMACTIONDICT)

ADD CUSTOMACTIONDICT is used to add an action dictionary.

Size/Range
1 ACTIONNAME Action Name This parameter String 1-32 M

specifies the
name of an
action.
2 MAPPEDGRPAVP MAP Group This parameter Number 0-4294967295 O
AVP specifies the
mapped group
AVP of an
action.
3 DESCRIPTION Desctiption This parameter String 1-256 O
specifies the
description
about the
enumeration
dictionary.
A maximum of 1024 action dictionaries can be configured in the system.

[ADD]
CUSTOMACTIONDICT:
{ACTIONNAME} = <Action Name> ,
{MAPPEDGRPAVP} = <Map Group AVP > ,
{DESCRIPTION} = <Description> ;
Example:
ADD CUSTOMACTIONDICT: ACTIONNAME="customaction", MAPPEDGRPAVP=114,
DESCRIPTION="my custom action";
37.5.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
98385: Invalid group AVP mapped action
37.6 Delete Action Dictionary (RMV

CUSTOMACTIONDICT)
RMV CUSTOMACTIONDICT is used to delete an action dictionary.

Size/Range

specifies the
name of an
action.

[RMV]
CUSTOMACTIONDICT:
{ACTIONNAME } = <Action Name> ;
Example
RMV CUSTOMACTIONDICT: ACTIONNAME="customaction";
37.6.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
98391: The action cannot be deleted beause it is not custom
98394: The action cannot be deleted because it is associated with a action group
98397: The action cannot be deleted because it is associated with a action element
37.7 Add Action Element Dictionary (ADD

CUSTOMACTIONELEMDICT)
ADD CUSTOMACTIONDICT is used to add an action element dictionary.

Size/Range
1 ACTIONNAME Action This parameter String 1-32 M

Name specifies the
name of an
action.
2 ACTIONELEMNAME Element This parameter String 1-32 M
Name specifies the
name of an
element.

Copyright Huawei

Size/Range
3 DATATYPE Element This parameter Enumerated Integer32:1 M

Data Type specifies the Unsigned32:2
type of element
data. Unsigned64:3
Float32:4
Float64:5
OctetString:6
UTF8String:7
IPv4Address:8
IPv6Prefix:9
IPv6Address:10
Time:11
Enumerated:12
Integer16:13
Unsigned16:14
Char:15
UnsignedChar:16
DateType:17
DateTime:18
Integer64:19
DiameterURI:20
4 MAPPEDAVP Element This parameter Number 0-4294967295 M
Map AVP specifies the
mapped AVP of
an element.
5 ISOPTIONAL Is Optional This parameter Enumerated Yes:1 (default O
specifies value)
whether an No :2
element is
optional.
6 ENUMNAME Enumeration This parameter String O
Name specifies the
name of an
element
enumeration.
A maximum of 1024 action element dictionaries can be configured in the system.

[ADD]

Copyright Huawei
CUSTOMACTIONELEMDICT:
{ACTIONNAME} = <Action Name>,
{ACTIONELEMNAME} = <Element Name>,
{DATATYPE} = <Element Data Type>,
{MAPPEDAVP} = <Element MAP AVP >,
{ISOPTIONAL} = <Is Optional>,
Example:
ADD CUSTOMACTIONELEMDICT:
ACTIONNAME="customaction",ACTIONELEMNAME="elemname",DATATYPE=Integer3
2,MAPPEDAVP=100,ISOPTIONAL=Yes;
37.7.4 Result
98385: Invalid group AVP mapped action
98386: Invalid AVP mapped action element
98389: The action element already exists
98393: The action element cannot be added because the action is not custom
37.8 Delete Action Element Dictionary (RMV

CUSTOMACTIONELEMDICT)
RMV CUSTOMACTIONELEMDICT is used to delete an action element dictionary.

Copyright Huawei

Size/Range

specifies the
name of an
action.
2 ACTIONELEMNAME Element This parameter String 1-32 M
Name specifies the
name of an
element.

[RMV]
CUSTOMACTIONELEMDICT:
{ACTIONNAME} = <Action Name>,
{ACTIONELEMNAME} = <Element Name> ;
Example:
RMV CUSTOMACTIONELEMDICT:
ACTIONNAME="customaction",ACTIONELEMNAME="elemname";
37.8.4 Result
98390: The action element does not exist
98392: The action element cannot be deleted beause it is not custom
98395: The action element cannot be deleted because it is associated with a action group

Copyright Huawei
37.9 Add Action (ADD CUSTOMACTION)

ADD CUSTOMACTION is used to add an action.

Size/Range
1 ACTIONGROUPNAME Action This parameter String 1-32 M

Group Name specifies the
name of an
action group.
Name specifies the
name of an
action.
A maximum of 3072 actions can be configured in the system.

[ADD]
CUSTOMACTION:
{ACTIONNAME} = <Action Name> ;
Example:
ADD CUSTOMACTION:
ACTIONGROUPNAME="actiongroup",ACTIONNAME="actionname";
37.9.4 Result

Copyright Huawei

98399: Invalid action
98356: The action cannot be added because it is not custom
98396: The action cannot be added because the action already exists in action group
37.10 Delete Action (RMV CUSTOMACTION)

RMV CUSTOMACTION is used to delete an action.

Size/Range
1 ACTIONGROUPNAME Action This parameter String 132 M

name of an
action group.
2 ACTIONNAME Action This parameter String 132 M
Name specifies the
name of an
action.

[RMV]
CUSTOMACTION:
{ACTIONNAME} = <Action Name> ;
Example:
RMV CUSTOMACTION:
ACTIONGROUPNAME="actiongroup",ACTIONNAME="actionname";
37.10.4 Result

Copyright Huawei
98391: The action cannot be deleted beause it is not custom
98397: The action cannot be deleted because it is associated with a action element
37.11 Add Action Element (ADD CUSTOMACTIONELEM)

ADD CUSTOMACTIONELEM is used to add an action element.

Size/Range

name of an
action group.
Name specifies the
name of an
action.
3 ACTIONELEMNAME Action This parameter String 1-32 M
Element specifies the
Name name of an
action element.
4 VALUETYPE Element This parameter Enumerated Value M
Value Type specifies that Object
the type of Attribute
element values.
5 VALUE Element This parameter String 1-64 O
Value specifies the
value of an
element.

Copyright Huawei
A maximum of 3072 action elements can be configured in the system.

[ADD]
CUSTOMACTIONELEM:
{ACTIONGROUPNAME} = <Action Group Name> ,
{ACTIONELEMNAME} = <Action Element Name> ,
{VALUETYPE} = <Element Value Type> ,
{VALUE} = <Element Value> ;
Example:
ADD CUSTOMACTIONELEM:
ACTIONGROUPNAME="groupname",ACTIONNAME="actionname",ACTIONELEMNA
ME="elemname",VALUETYPE=Value,VALUE="0";
37.11.4 Result
98393: The action element cannot be added because the action is not custom
98398: The action element cannot be added because the action already exists in action
98400: Invalid action element value

Copyright Huawei
37.12 Modify Action Element (MOD

CUSTOMACTIONELEM)
MOD CUSTOMACTIONELEM is used to modify an action element.

Size/Range

name of an
action group.
Name specifies the
name of an
action.
Name name of an
action element.
4 VALUETYPE Element This parameter Enumerated Value M
Value Type specifies that Object
the type of Attribute
element values.
5 VALUE Element This parameter String 1-64 O
Value specifies the
value of an
element.

[MOD]
CUSTOMACTIONELEM:
{ACTIONELEMNAME} = <Action Element Name> ,
{VALUETYPE} = <Element Value Type> ,
{VALUE} = <Element Value> ;
Example:

Copyright Huawei
MOD CUSTOMACTIONELEM:
ME="elemname",VALUETYPE=Value,VALUE="0";
37.12.4 Result
98357: The action element cannot be modified because it is not custom
98400: Invalid action element value
37.13 Delete Action Element (RMV

CUSTOMACTIONELEM)
RMV CUSTOMACTIONELEM is used to delete an action element.

Size/Range

name of an
action group.
Name specifies the
name of an
action.

Copyright Huawei

Size/Range

Name name of an
action element.
Command Format
[RMV]
CUSTOMACTIONELEM:
{ACTIONELEMNAME} = <Action Element Name>;
Example:
RMV CUSTOMACTIONELEM:
ME="elemname";
37.13.3 Result
98392: The action element cannot be deleted beause it is not custom

Copyright Huawei
UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronyms and Abbreviations Full Name
UPCC Unified Policy and Charging Controller

CLI Command Line Interface
MML Man Machine Language

Copyright Huawei

UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

UPCC V300R006C10 CLI Interface Instruction

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

UPCC

Release Date 2014-3-27

Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd

Issue 1.130 (2014-3-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document

Date Revised Edition Description Prepared by

2014/5/19 V1.134 Delete description about UTF-8 in /

Issue 1.130 (2014-3-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Date Revised Edition Description Prepared by

2014/5/6 V1.133 In chapter 1.2 MML Format Description, /

2014/4/21 V1.132 Update commands ADD/MOD /

2014/4/9 V1.131 Add parameter MTRSWITCH for /

2014/02/27 V1.130 Add error code 98358 in RMV /

2014/2/20 V1.128 Update Decription for ADD PRAYTIME /

2014/01/08 V1.127 Updated the element of the ADD/MOD Wang Juhui

Issue 1.130 (2014-3-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Date Revised Edition Description Prepared by

2014/01/05 V1.126 Add Customized Action Management. Wen Minliang

2013/12/23 V1.124 This issue is the V300R006C10 Baseline. Cheng Zhi

Synchronized changes from

2013/11/11 V1.122 Added CUSTOMERSTRATTRT Jiang Zhihua

Issue 1.130 (2014-3-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Date Revised Edition Description Prepared by

2013/10/15 V1.116 DTS2013101404239 Wang Juhui

Issue 1.130 (2014-3-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Date Revised Edition Description Prepared by

2013-09-21 1.112 DTS2013091700609, modify Wang Juhui

Issue 1.130 (2014-3-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Date Revised Edition Description Prepared by

2013-05-23 v1.104 Modified the parameter Jiang Guilan

Issue 1.130 (2014-3-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Date Revised Edition Description Prepared by

2013-03-20 v1.96 Added the CUSTOMERATTRIBUTE Jiang Guilan

Issue 1.130 (2014-3-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Date Revised Edition Description Prepared by

013-01-28 1.88 This issue is the V300R005C15 baseline. Jiang Zhihua

Issue 1.130 (2014-3-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Date Revised Edition Description Prepared by

2012-09-08 1.78 Modified the PRECEDENCE to be an Jiang Guilan

Issue 1.130 (2014-3-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Date Revised Edition Description Prepared by

2012-07-02 1.60 Updated according to Jiang Guilan

Issue 1.130 (2014-3-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Date Revised Edition Description Prepared by

2012-04-07 1.52 Modified ADD POLICY command,the Jiang Zhihua

Issue 1.130 (2014-3-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Date Revised Edition Description Prepared by

2012-01-19 v1.47 Added the ADD/MOD/RMV Wang Qing

2011-10-14 v1.35 Added the CUSTOMERATTR Wang Qing

Issue 1.130 (2014-3-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Date Revised Edition Description Prepared by

2011-09-23 v1.32 Added BOD SERVICE in the service Xue Zhen

Issue 1.130 (2014-3-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Date Revised Edition Description Prepared by

Issue 1.130 (2014-3-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Date Revised Edition Description Prepared by

2013-12-12 V1.09 Added error code 98325 in ADD Xu Bin 00224192

Issue 1.130 (2014-3-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

About This Document....................................................................................................................ii

Issue 1.130 (2014-3-27) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

3.8 Service Provider Management.........................................................................................................................12